301455

Cisco spa509g ip Manual

22
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/325
Next page
Cisco Small Business
SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310
IP Phones Models SPA301, SPA303, SPA501G,
SPA502G, SPA504G, SPA508G, SPA509G, SPA512G,
SPA514G, SPA525G, SPA525G2, and WIP310
ADMINISTRATION
GUIDE
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 1
Contents
Chapter 1: Getting Started 11
Overview of the Phones 12
Cisco Attendant Console 12
Network Configurations 13
Cisco SPA9000 Voice System 14
Cisco Unified Communications 500 Series for Small Business 14
Other SIP IP PBX Call Control Systems 14
Updating Firmware 15
Determining the Firmware Version 16
Determining the IP Address of the Phone 17
Downloading the Firmware 18
Installing the Firmware 18
Using the Web-Based Configuration Utility 19
Allowing Web Access to the IP Phone 20
Saving the Configuration Profile 22
Understanding Administrator and User Views 22
Restricting User Access to the Phone Interface Menus (Cisco SPA300 and
Cisco SPA500 Series) 23
Accessing Administrative Options 23
Using the Web Administration Tabs 23
Viewing Phone Information 24
Viewing Reboot Reasons 24
Viewing the Reboot History on the Phone Web User Interface 26
Viewing the Reboot History on the IP Phone Screen 26
Viewing the Reboot History in the SPA Status Dump File 26
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens 26
Ensuring Voice Quality 30
Supported Codecs 30
Bandwidth Requirements 31
Factors Affecting Voice Quality 32
SIP Publish Signaling Improvements 34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 2
Contents
Chapter 2: Configuring Lines 36
Configuring a Line Key 37
Configuring Shared–Line Appearance 37
Configuring Call Appearance Per Line 40
Expand Call Appearance Per Line 41
Configuring Unused Line Keys to Access Services 41
Configuring Call Park on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
(MetaSwitch) 42
Assigning Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, or Speed Dial Functions to Unused
Lines 43
Configuring Call Pickup and Busy Lamp Field 44
Configuring Speed Dial 45
Configuring Audio Indication for Call Pickup Event 46
Chapter 3: Customizing Standard Features 47
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings 48
Configuring the Phone Name 48
Configuring Voice Mail 48
Configuring Internal Voice Mail for Each Extension (Using a Cisco SPA400)
48
Customizing the Startup Screen 49
Changing the Display Background 50
Configuring the Screen Saver 51
Configuring the LCD Contrast 53
Configuring Back Light Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 53
Configuring Linksys Key System Parameters 54
Enabling Call Features 55
Enabling Anonymous Call and Caller ID Blocking Services 55
Enabling ACD Service 55
Enabling Call Back Service 55
Enabling Call Park and Call Pickup Services 56
Enabling Call Transfer and Call Forwarding Services 56
Enabling Conferencing 57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 3
Contents
Enabling Do Not Disturb 57
Enabling the Missed Call Shortcut 57
Logging Missed Calls 57
Enabling Paging (Intercom) 58
Configuring Paging Groups 58
Enabling Service Announcements 60
Customizing Phone Softkeys 60
Programmable Softkeys 65
Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator 67
Configuring Ring Tones 68
Configuring On-Demand Ring Tones (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
69
User-Created MP3 Ring Tones (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 70
Creating and Uploading Ring Tones Using the Ring Tone Utility (Cisco SPA300
Series and Cisco SPA500 Series only) 70
Assigning a Ring Tone to an Extension 72
Configuring RSS Newsfeeds (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 73
Configuring Audio Settings 74
Configuring Audio Input Gain (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Se-
ries) 75
Enabling Wireless (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only) 75
Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only) 76
Enabling Bluetooth from the Web Interface 76
Enabling Bluetooth from the Phone 76
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset 77
Pairing Your Cisco SPA525G2 with a Bluetooth-Enabled Mobile Phone 78
Initiating Pairing from the Cisco SPA525G2 79
Initiating Pairing from Your Bluetooth-Enabled Mobile Phone 80
Enabling SMS Messaging 81
Enabling and Configuring the Phone Web Server 82
Configure the Web Server from the Phone Web Interface 82
Configure the Web Server from the Phone Screen Interface 83
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 4
Contents
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP
Phones 83
Configuring BroadSoft Settings (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500
Series) 88
Configuring BroadSoft Directory 88
Configuring Synchronization of Do Not Disturb and Call Forward on a Per Line
Basis (Applicable to Broadsoft) 89
Configuring Synchronization of DND and CEWD 89
Configuring Synchronization of DND and CEWD by Using the Configuration
File 90
Configuring Broadsoft ACD Support 90
Configuring Broadsoft ACD Support 91
Configuring XML Services 91
Configuring Music On Hold 94
Configuring Extension Mobility 94
Configuring Video Surveillance (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 95
Configuring the User Name and Account on the Camera 96
Entering Camera Information Into the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Configuration Utility 96
Viewing the Video 97
Chapter 4: Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT 98
SIP and Cisco IP Phones 98
SIP Over TCP 100
SIP Proxy Redundancy 100
Configuring Survivable Remote Site Telephony (SRST) Support 100
RFC3311 Support 101
Support for SIP NOTIFY XML-Service 101
Configuring SIP 102
Configuring Basic SIP Parameters 102
Configuring SIP Timer Values 106
Configuring Response Status Code Handling 109
Configuring RTP Parameters 109
Configuring SDP Payload Types 111
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 5
Contents
Configuring SIP Settings for Extensions 114
Configuring a SIP Proxy Server 120
Configuring Subscriber Information Parameters 122
Configuring the IP Phone Communications Protocol 123
Configuring the Protocol on a Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 124
Configuring the Protocol on a Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500 Series
IP Phone 124
Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones 124
NAT Mapping with Session Border Controller 125
NAT Mapping with SIP-ALG Router 125
NAT Mapping with a Static IP Address 125
NAT Mapping with STUN 126
Determining Whether the Router Uses Symmetric or Asymmetric NAT 127
Chapter 5: Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features 129
Setting Security Features 130
Challenging SIP Initial INVITE and MWI Messages 130
Encrypting Signaling with SIP Over TLS 130
Securing Voice Traffic with SRTP 131
Authorizing Secure Calls with a Mini-certification 131
Secure Call Indication Tone 132
Configuring Voice Codecs 132
Configuring Domain and Internet Settings 136
Configuring Restricted Access Domains 136
Configuring DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE Connection Type 136
Configuring Power Settings 138
Setting Optional Network Servers 138
Configuring VLAN Settings 140
Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) 140
Configuring LLDP-MED 140
TLV Information 142
Configuring the VLAN Settings 148
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 6
Contents
Configuring SSL VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 150
Configuring the VPN on the Security Appliance 151
Configuring the VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 151
Chapter 6: Provisioning 154
Redundant Provisioning Servers 155
Retail Provisioning 155
Automatic In-House Preprovisioning 156
Using HTTPS 157
Server Certificates 157
Client Certificates 158
Obtaining a Server Certificate 158
Manually Provisioning a Phone from the Keypad 159
Sample Configuration File 160
Updating Profiles and Firmware 161
Launch a Firmware Update by using a Browser Command 166
Launch a Profile Update by using a Browser Command 167
Rebooting a Phone by using a Browser Command 167
Configuring a Custom Certificate Authority 168
General Purpose Parameters 168
Using TR-069 169
Chapter 7: Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services 172
Scripting for Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones 173
Cadence Script 173
Example: Normal Ring 173
Example 2: Distinctive Ring (short, short, short, long) 174
Tone Script 174
Example: Dial Tone 174
Example: SIT Tone 175
Ring Script 176
Call Progress Tones 177
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 7
Contents
Distinctive Ring Patterns 177
Example 1: Normal Ring 177
Example 2: Distinctive Ring (short, short, short, long) 178
Distinctive Call Waiting Tone 178
Control Timer Values (sec) 179
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes) 180
Entering Star Code Values 180
Activating or Deactivating Supplementary Services 184
Vertical Service Announcement Codes (Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series) 185
Bonus Services Announcement Description 185
Outbound Call Codec Selection Codes 187
Miscellaneous Parameters 187
DTMF Parameters 187
Localizing Your IP Phone 188
Managing the Time and Date 189
Configuring Daylight Saving Time 190
Daylight Saving Time Examples 191
Selecting a Display Language 192
Creating a Dictionary Server Script 192
Chapter 8: Configuring Dial Plans 194
About Dial Plans 194
Digit Sequences 195
Digit Sequence Examples 198
Acceptance and Transmission of the Dialed Digits 200
Dial Plan Timer (Off-Hook Timer) 201
Syntax for the Dial Plan Timer 201
Interdigit Long Timer (Incomplete Entry Timer) 202
Syntax for the Interdigit Long Timer 202
Interdigit Short Timer (Complete Entry Timer) 203
Syntax for the Interdigit Short Timer 203
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 8
Contents
Editing Dial Plans on the IP Phone 204
Resetting the Control Timers 205
Chapter 9: Configuring LED Patterns 206
LED Script Examples 209
LED Pattern 209
Appendix A: Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference 211
Info Tab 212
System Information 212
Network Configuration (SPCP) 215
VPN Status (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only) 216
Product Information 216
Phone Status 217
Ext Status 218
Line/Call Status 219
Downloaded Ring Tone 221
System Tab 222
System Configuration 222
Internet Connection Type and Static IP Settings 224
Power Settings (Cisco SPA500 Series or Cisco SPA300 Series Only) 225
PPPoE Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only) 225
Optional Network Configuration 226
VLAN Settings 227
Wi-Fi Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only) 229
Bluetooth Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only) 229
VPN Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only) 229
SIP Tab 230
SIP Parameters 230
SIP Timer Values (sec) 235
Response Status Code Handling 238
RTP Parameters 239
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 9
Contents
SDP Payload Types 241
NAT Support Parameters 244
Linksys Key System Parameters 247
Provisioning Tab 248
Regional Tab 248
Call Progress Tone Description 248
Distinctive Ring Patterns 252
Control Timer Values (sec) 254
Vertical Service Activation Codes 255
Vertical Service Announcement Codes 260
Outbound Call Codec Selection Codes 261
Time (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only) 264
Language (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only) 265
Miscellaneous 265
Phone Tab 270
General 270
Line Key 273
Miscellaneous Line Key Settings 275
Line Key LED Pattern 276
Supplementary Services 278
Ring Tone (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series) 280
Ring Tone (Cisco WIP310) 281
Auto Input Gain (dB) 282
Multiple Paging Group Parameters 283
BroadSoft Settings 284
LDAP Corporate Directory Search 285
XML Service 289
Extension Mobility 289
Programmable Softkeys 290
Ext Tab 291
General 292
Share Line Appearance 292
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 10
Contents
NAT Settings 293
Network Settings 294
SIP Settings 295
Call Feature Settings 299
Proxy and Registration 302
Subscriber Information 305
Audio Configuration 306
Dial Plan Script 310
User Tab 312
Call Forward 312
Speed Dial 312
Supplementary Services 313
Camera Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 313
Web Information Service Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 313
Audio Volume 313
Screen (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 314
Attendant Console Tab (Cisco SPA500 Series) 316
General 316
Attendant Console Status 318
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2-Specific Tabs 319
Wi-Fi 319
Bluetooth 319
Personal Address Book 321
Call History 321
Speed Dials 321
Firmware Upgrade 321
Appendix B: Where to Go From Here 322
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 11
Getting Started
This chapter contains basic information on Cisco SPA300 Series, Cisco SPA500
Series, and Cisco Wireless-G IP phones. This chapter contains the following
sections:
• Overview of the Phones
• Network Configurations
• Updating Firmware
• Using the Web-Based Configuration Utility
• Viewing Phone Information
• Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Overview of the Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 12
1
Overview of the Phones
The Cisco SPA IP Phone family is a line of full-featured VoIP (Voice-over-Internet
Protocol) phones that provide voice communication over an IP network. They
provide all the features of traditional business phones, such as call forwarding,
redialing, speed dialing, transferring calls, conference calling, and accessing voice
mail. Calls can be made or received with a handset, a headset, or a speaker.
For more information on phone features, see the data sheets for each product.
Cisco Attendant Console
The Cisco Attendant Console is an accessory console for the Cisco SPA500
Series IP phones, providing 32 three-color (red, green, and orange) programmable
LEDs. The Cisco Attendant Console attaches to the IP phone with the attachment
arm provided. It obtains power directly from the IP phone; it does not require a
separate power supply. Two Cisco Attendant Console units can be attached to a
single IP phone to monitor a total of 64 separate lines.
The Cisco Attendant Console can can be configured by using the same phone
web user interface for the IP phone to which the Cisco Attendant Console is
attached. Detailed information on the installation of the Cisco Attendant Console is
provided in the Cisco Small Business Attendant Console Quick Start Guide.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Network Configurations
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 13
1
Network Configurations
The Cisco SPA IP phones can be used as part of a Cisco SPA9000 Voice System
phone network, any vendor SIP network, or Cisco Unified Communications 500.
The Cisco SPA IP phones support Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The
Cisco SPA300 Series or the Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones also support Smart
Phone Control Protocol (SPCP).
This document describes some common network configurations; however, your
configuration can vary, depending on the type of equipment used by your service
provider.
Smart
Switch
IP PBX
Wireless
Router
Integrated
Access Device
Analog
Phone Lines
Analog Phones
or Fax Machines
WIP310
SPA
IP Phones
276459
IAD
PSTN
Gateway
Internet
IP
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Network Configurations
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 14
1
Cisco SPA9000 Voice System
The Cisco SPA9000 Voice System is an affordable and feature-rich voice-over-IP
(VoIP) telephone system that is designed for small businesses. The
Cisco SPA9000 Voice System uses standard TCP/IP protocols and can provide
global connectivity through any Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) that
supports SIP.
At minimum, the Cisco SPA9000 Voice System includes a Cisco IP PBX and one or
more Cisco SPA IP phones. These devices are connected through a switch to a
local area network (LAN). With an Internet connection, the Cisco SPA9000 Voice
System can subscribe to ITSP services to take advantage of low calling rates. With
the optional Cisco SPA400, the Cisco SPA9000 Voice System can connect to the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) to support legacy phone lines and
provide local voice mail service.
You can configure and manage the Cisco SPA IP phones by using the Interactive
Voice Response (IVR) system, the Cisco SPA9000 Voice System Setup Wizard, or
a built-in web server.
The phone web user interface is limited when the phone is connected to a
Cisco UC320W. For information on configuring the network phone system, refer to
the Cisco UC320W Administration Guide.
Cisco Unified Communications 500 Series for Small Business
The Cisco Unified Communications 500 Series for Small Business is an affordable
SPCP appliance that provides voice, data, video, network security, and wireless
communications capabilities while integrating with existing desktop applications,
such as calendar, e-mail, and customer relationship management (CRM) programs.
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones can be configured
to work with this system.
Other SIP IP PBX Call Control Systems
Cisco SPA IP phones are compatible with other SIP IP PBX call control systems,
such as BroadSoft and Asterisk. Configuration of these systems is not described in
this document. For more information, see the documentation for the SIP PBX
system to where you are connecting the Cisco SPA IP phones.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Updating Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 15
1
Updating Firmware
Phones should be updated to the latest firmware before using any administration
features. There are several ways to update your firmware:
SIP Phones
• Cisco SPA9000 Voice System Setup Wizard—If you are using the
Cisco SPA IP phones with a Cisco SPA9000 Voice System, see the
Cisco SPA9000 Voice System Setup Wizard User Guide for instructions.
(The Setup Wizard does not support Cisco SPA300 Series IP phones; you
must use a different process to upgrade that firmware.)
• Autoprovisioning—A configuration file that includes firmware upgrade
information is downloaded by a phone when it is powered on or configured
to do so. The configuration file (also referred to as a profile) includes
parameters that direct how and when the phone firmware is to be updated.
See the “Updating Profiles and Firmware” section on page 161 for more
information.
Cisco SPA300 Series, Cisco SPA500 Series, and Cisco WIP310 Executable
• Firmware Update Executable File—Download the firmware update utility
from the related product page on Cisco.com to your PC. Run the update by
double-clicking the executable file. Your computer must be on the same
subnetwork as the Cisco SPA IP phones.
Cisco SPA525G and Cisco SPA525G2
• Configuration Utility—You can download the latest phone firmware
configuration utility from Cisco.com onto your PC and use that utility to
upgrade your firmware.
Cisco WIP310
• TFTP or HTTP server—The latest firmware image file is loaded onto an
HTTP/TFTP server and is accessed by a web browser. See the
Cisco
WIP310 User Guide
for more information.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Updating Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 16
1
Determining the Firmware Version
To determine the current firmware version:
Cisco SPA301G
STEP 1 Quickly press the asterisk (*) button four times to enter the IVR menu.
STEP 2 Enter 150#. The firmware version is recited.
Cisco SPA501G
STEP 1 Press the Setup button. The IVR configuration menu is announced.
STEP 2 Enter 150#. The firmware version is recited.
Cisco SPA303, Cisco SPA500 Series
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Scroll to Product Info and press Select. The current firmware is displayed under
Software Version
.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Scroll to Status and press Select.
STEP 3 Select Product Information. The firmware version is displayed under
Software
Version.
Cisco WIP310
STEP 1 In the Home screen, press Options, highlight Phone Info, and press Select.
STEP 2 Scroll to Software Version. The firmware is displayed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Updating Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 17
1
Determining the IP Address of the Phone
Before you update the device, you must know the IP address of the phone you are
upgrading. Often an IP address is assigned by a DHCP server, so the phone must
be booted up and connected to the subnetwork.
To display your IP address:
Cisco SPA301
STEP 1 Quickly press the asterisk (*) button four times to enter the IVR menu.
STEP 2 Enter 110#. The IP address is recited.
Cisco SPA501G
STEP 1 Press the Setup button. The IVR configuration menu is announced.
STEP 2 Enter 110, then press #. The IP address is recited.
Cisco SPA500 Series
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Scroll to Network and press Select. The IP Address is displayed under Current IP.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Scroll to Status and press Select.
STEP 3 Scroll to Network Status and press Select. The IP address is displayed.
Cisco WIP310
STEP 1 In the Home window, press Select and navigate to Settings.
STEP 2 Press Select and navigate to Phone Info.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Updating Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 18
1
STEP 3 The IP Address field displays the IP address.
Downloading the Firmware
To download firmware from Cisco.com to your PC:
STEP 1 Direct your browser to the URL http://www.cisco.com/cisco/software/
navigator.html?a=a&i=rpm.
STEP 2 Follow the instructions on the page to locate your product and download the
firmware file.
STEP 3 If the firmware file you download is in zip format, double-click the file and extract
its contents to a single folder or to the desktop.
Installing the Firmware
Your computer must be on the same subnetwork as the phone you are upgrading.
Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series
STEP 1 With your PC attached to the same subnetwork as the phone, run the executable
file for the firmware update.
STEP 2 Click Continue after reading the message regarding updating and your service
provider information.
STEP 3 Enter the IP address of the phone.
STEP 4 Follow the on-screen directions.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
STEP 1 Log in to the configuration utility for the phone.
STEP 2 Choose the Firmware Upgrade tab.
STEP 3 Click Firmware Upgrade Window.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Using the Web-Based Configuration Utility
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 19
1
STEP 4 Browse to select the firmware file from your PC. Click Submit. The firmware is
installed and your phone reboots.
Cisco WIP310
STEP 1 Turn off your Cisco WIP310 and connect it to your computer by using a USB cable.
STEP 2 Double-click the executable file for the firmware upgrade (for example, double-
click wip310-5-0-11.exe).
STEP 3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
STEP 4 When the upgrade is complete, disconnect the phone from your PC and power it
on.
Using the Web-Based Configuration Utility
Your phone system administrator can allow you to view the phone statistics and
modify some or all of the parameters by using the phone web user interface. The
features of the Cisco SPA phones that can be modified by the user by using the
phone web user interfaceare described in this document; however, not all features
are available on all phones.
If you are using the Cisco SPA IP phones with the Cisco Unified Communications
500 Series for Small Business for Call Control, use Cisco Unified Communication
Manager Express or Cisco Configuration Assistant (CCA) for phone administration.
For more information, refer to the
Cisco Unified Communications 500 Office
Administrator Guide
or the
Cisco Configuration Assistant Smart Business
Communications System Administrator Guide
.
To access the IP phone configuration utility, launch a web browser on a computer
that can reach the phone on the subnetwork and enter the IP address of the phone
in your web browser address bar. For example, http://192.168.1.8. To get
the IP address of your phone, see Determining the IP Address of the Phone. If
you are connected to a VPN, you must first exit the VPN.
NOTE If your service provider disabled access to the configuration utility, you must
contact the service provider to proceed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Using the Web-Based Configuration Utility
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 20
1
Allowing Web Access to the IP Phone
To view the phone parameters by using the phone web user interface, the
configuration profile must be enabled. To make changes to any of the parameters
by using the phone web user interface, the configuration profile must be writable.
Your system administrator might have disabled the phone option to make the
phone web user interface viewable or writable.
Cisco SPA303, Cisco SPA500 Series
To allow or disallow from the phone viewing of the phone web user interface:
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 To display the Web Server Writable option either:
• Select Network > Enable Web Server.
• Select Settings > Security Configuration > Web Access Enabled.
STEP 3 Press Edit to change the status of the Web Access Enabled parameter.
If the option to edit the parameter is not displayed, press **# to display the option.
If the edit option still does not display, it might be set by your phone system
administrator such that you cannot modify this parameter.
STEP 4 Press Y/ N to toggle the parameter and press ok to set the parameter.
STEP 5 To save your change, press save.
Making the Profile Writeable
On some models you can enable modifying the configuration profile by using the
phone web user interface or disable the ability to modify the profile making the
phone web user interface read only.
To toggle the write access:
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 To display the Web Server Writable option, select Settings > Security
Configuration > Web Server Writable.
STEP 3 To change the status of the Web Server Writable, press Edit.
STEP 4 Press Y/ N to toggle the parameter and press OK to set the parameter.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Using the Web-Based Configuration Utility
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 21
1
STEP 5 To save your change, press Save.
Cisco SPA501G
To allow or disallow from the phone viewing of the phone web user interface by
using the IVR:
STEP 1 Press the Setup button on the phone. The configuration menu is announced.
STEP 2 In the IVR menu, enter 7932.
STEP 3 Press 1 to enable the web server, then press #.
STEP 4 To save the configuration, press 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit,
press *.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
To view the phone parameters by using the phone web user interface, the phone
web server must be enabled. Your system administrator might have disabled the
phone option to make the phone web user interface viewable or writable.
To allow or disallow from the phone viewing of the phone web user interface:
STEP 1 Press Setup.
STEP 2 To display the Web Server Writable option, select Settings > Network
Configuration > Web Server.
STEP 3 To change the status of the Web Server parameter, press the Right Arrow key to
toggle the feature enabled (checked) or disabled (unchecked).
STEP 4 To save your change, press Set.
Cisco WIP310
To allow or disallow from the phone viewing of the phone web user interface:
STEP 1 In the Home screen, press Select to choose Settings.
STEP 2 Press Select again to reach the Settings menu.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Understanding Administrator and User Views
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 22
1
STEP 3 Scroll to highlight Misc Settings and press Select .
STEP 4 Press the left arrow to ensure that Enable Web Server is set to On.
STEP 5 Press Select to save this setting.
Saving the Configuration Profile
Click Submit All Changes when you have finished modifying the fields in the
phone web user interface to update the configuration profile. The phone is
rebooted and the changes are applied.
Click Undo All Changes if you want to clear all changes made this session and
return to the parameter values set before the session began or since the last time
you clicked Submit All Changes.
Understanding Administrator and User Views
The Cisco IP phone firmware provides specific privileges for login to a user
account and an administrator account. The Administrator account name is admin,
and the User account name is user. These account names cannot be changed. The
Admin account is designed to give the service provider or VAR configuration
access to the Cisco IP phone, while the User account is designed to give limited
and configurable control to the end user of the device.
The User and Admin accounts can be independently password protected. If the
service provider set an Administrator account password, you are prompted for it
when you click Admin Login. If it does not yet exist, the screen is refreshed,
displaying the administration parameters. No default passwords are assigned to
either the Administrator or the User accounts. Only the Administrator account can
assign or change passwords.
The Administrator account can view and modify all web profile parameters,
including web parameters available to the user login. The phone system
administrator can further restrict the parameters that a User account can view and
modify by using a provisioning profile.
The configuration parameters available to the User account are configurable in the
Cisco IP phone. User access to the Cisco IP phone web user interface can be
disabled.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Understanding Administrator and User Views
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 23
1
Restricting User Access to the Phone Interface Menus
(Cisco SPA300 and Cisco SPA500 Series)
The Admin account can set the phone web user interface to allow or disable
access by the User account. Allowing User account access gives a user the option
of setting parameters, such as speed dial numbers and caller ID blocking through
the phone web user interface.
The ability to configure individual parameters can be restricted by using phone
profile provisioning. For more information on provisioning, see the
Cisco Small
Business IP Telephony Devices Provisioning Guide
on cisco.com.
To change User account access to the web administration interface, navigate to
Admin Login > advanced > Voice > System. Under System Configuration in the
Phone-UI-user-mode field, choose yes.
Accessing Administrative Options
To access administrative options, either:
• Log in to the configuration utility, then click Admin Login.
• Enter the IP address of the phone in a Web browser and include the admin/
extension. For example: http://192.168.1.220/admin/
Using the Web Administration Tabs
Each tab contains parameters related to that feature. Some tasks require that you
set multiple parameters in different tabs.
Appendix A, “Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference,” briefly describes each
parameter available on the phone web user interface.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Viewing Phone Information
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 24
1
Viewing Phone Information
You can check the current status of the Cisco SPA IP phones by clicking the Info
tab. The Info tab shows information about all phone extensions, including phone
statistics and the registration status.
Viewing Reboot Reasons
The phone stores the most recent five reasons the phone was refreshed or
rebooted. When the phone is reset to factory defaults, this information is deleted.
The list describes the reboot and refresh reasons (Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones).
Reason Description
DHCP Failed The reboot was the result of a DHCP error caused
when the lease expired, or when the renewal or
verification failed.
Upgrade The reboot was a result of an upgrade operation
(regardless whether the upgrade completed or
failed).
Provisioning The reboot was the result of changes made to
parameter values by using the IP phone screen or
phone web user interface, or as a result of
synchronization.
SIP Triggered The reboot was triggered by a SIP request.
Link Down The reboot was triggered when the link to the
network went down.
VLAN Changed The reboot was triggered when the VLAN was
changed.
RC The reboot was triggered as a result of remote
customization.
User Triggered The user manually triggered a warm reboot.
Software Req The warm reboot was triggered by a remote server.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Viewing Phone Information
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 25
1
The following is a list of the supported reboot/refresh reasons (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2):
You can view the reboot history from the phone web user interface, the IP phone
screen, and the phone SPA Status Dump file (http://phoneIP/status.xml or http://
phoneIP/admin/status.xml).
System n The reboot was triggered by system events (for
example, running out of resources).
IP Changed The reboot was triggered after the phone IP address
was changed.
Reason Description
Reason Description
Upgrade The reboot was a result of an upgrade operation
(regardless whether the upgrade completed or
failed).
Provisioning The reboot was the result of changes made to
parameter values via the IP phone screen or phone
web user interface, or as a result of synchronization.
SIP Triggered The reboot was triggered by a SIP request.
RC The reboot was triggered as a result of remote
customization.
User Triggered The user manually triggered a warm reboot.
Software Req The warm reboot was triggered by a remote server.
System n The reboot was triggered by system events (for
example, running out of resources).
IP Changed The reboot was triggered after the phone IP address
was changed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 26
1
Viewing the Reboot History on the Phone Web User Interface
The Info > System Information > Reboot History page displays the device
reboot history, the five most recent reboot dates and times and a reason for the
reboot. Each field displays the reason for the reboot and a time stamp indicating
when the reboot took place. For example:
Reboot Reason 1: Provisioning(06/22/2011 13:29:33)
Reboot Reason 2: Upgrade(06/22/2011 13:01:43)
Reboot Reason 3: Provisioning(06/22/2011 10:40:12)
The reboot history is displayed in reverse chronological order; the reason for the
most recent reboot is displayed in Reboot Reason 1.
Viewing the Reboot History on the IP Phone Screen
Reboot History is located under the Setup menu. On the Reboot History Page,
the reboot entries are displayed in reverse chronological order, similar to the
sequence displayed on the phone web user interface.
Viewing the Reboot History in the SPA Status Dump File
The reboot history is stored in the SPA Status Dump file
(http://<phone_IP_address>/admin/status.xml). In this file, tags Reboot_Reason_1
to Reboot_Reason_5 store the reboot history, as shown in this example:
<Reboot_History><Reboot_String/>
<Reboot_Reason_1>Provisioning(06/13/2011 14:03:43)</Reboot_Reason_1>
<Reboot_Reason_2>Provisioning(06/13/2011 13:58:15)</Reboot_Reason_2>
<Reboot_Reason_3>Provisioning(06/13/2011 12:08:58)</Reboot_Reason_3>
<Reboot_Reason_4>Provisioning(05/26/2011 15:26:49)</Reboot_Reason_4>
<Reboot_Reason_5>System 4(05/24/2011 10:20:06)</Reboot_Reason_5>
<Reboot_History/>
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens
The Cisco SPA301 and Cisco SPA501G provides an IVR menu to perform
configuration tasks and obtain information about the phone.
To access the IVR menu:
• Cisco SPA301: Press the asterisk (*) four times. Enter the number of the
option and press #.
• Cisco SPA501G: Press Settings. Enter the number of the option and press
#.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 27
1
Some menus require entering of more information or numbers.
Press 9 on the IVR menu to be guided through a list of commonly used tasks or
enter the number of the desired menu to go directly to that feature.
Enter the number of the settings you want to change:
• 1—Network
- 1—Connection Type—Recites the connection type.
Press 1 to change the connection type, then press 0 for DHCP or press 1
for static IP.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1.
To r e v i e w, p r e s s 2.
To r e e n t e r, p r e s s 3.
To e x i t , p r e s s *.
- 2—IP Address—Recites the IP address
- 3—Netmask—Recites the network mask.
- 4—Gateway Address—Recites the gateway IP address.
- 5—MAC Address—Recites the MAC (hardware) address.
- 6—DNS—Recites the primary DNS server address.
• 2—Protocol
- 1—Call Control Protocol—Recites the current call control protocol.
Press 1 to change, or * to go back.
- 2—Multicast Address—Recites the multicast address.
Press 1 to change, or * to go back.
- 3—CDP—Tells you if CDP is enabled.
Press 1 to change, or * to go back.
- 4—SPCP Auto Detection—Indicates that SPCP auto detection is
enabled.
Press 1 to change, or * to go back.
• 3— Other Options
- 1—Software Version—Recites the software version.
- 2—Primary Extension—Recites the primary extension.
- 3—Reboot—Reboots the phone. Hang up to exit.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 28
1
- 4—Factory Reset—Restores the phone to the factory default software
and settings. Enter 1 to confirm or * to cancel.
- 5—Debug Server—Recites the address of the debug server.
Press 1 to change, or * to go back.
The following table lists the IVR options that you can enter immediately after
accessing the IVR system.
Number Option
100 Indicates that Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled.
110 Recites the IP address of the phone.
120 Recites the netmask of the phone.
130 Recites the gateway address.
140 Recites the MAC (hardware) address of the phone.
150 Recites the phone software version.
160 Recites the primary DNS server address.
170 Recites the HTTP port on which the web server listens. Defaults to 80.
180 Recites the IP multicast address (used by the Cisco SPA 9000 to
communicate with the IP phone).
220 Recites the method of call control (SIP or SPCP).
221 Set call control—enter the value for the call control method and press #:
•0: SIP
•1: SPCP
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit, press *.
73738 Restores the phone to the factory default software and settings.
Enter 1 to confirm, or * to exit. If you chose to reset, hang up to exit and
begin the restore process.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 29
1
87778
(Cisco
SPA501G)
Restore the phone user settings to the default. (Clears all user settings
such as speed dials.)
Enter 1 to confirm, or * to exit. If you chose to reset, hang up to exit and
begin the restore process.
732668 Reboot the phone. Enter # and hang up to begin rebooting.
111 Set a static IP address. Enter the IP address (use * to enter the decimal
(.)), then press #.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit, press *.
NOTE DHCP must be disabled to use this option; if DHCP is not
disabled, you receive an error message.
121 Set a netmask. Enter the address (use * to enter the decimal (.)), then
press #.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit, press *.
NOTE DHCP must be disabled to use this option; if DHCP is not
disabled, you receive an error message.
131 Set a gateway. Enter the address (use * to enter the decimal (.)), then
press #.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit, press *.
NOTE DHCP must be disabled to use this option; if DHCP is not
disabled, you receive an error message.
161 Set the address of the primary Domain Name Server (DNS). Enter the
address (use * to enter the decimal (.)), then press #.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit, press *.
181 Set the IP multicast address (used by the Cisco SPA 9000 to
communicate with the IP phone). Enter the address (use * to enter the
decimal (.)), then press #.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit, press *.
7932 Enable or disable the web-based configuration utility. Press 1 to enable
or 0 to disable, then press #.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press
3; to exit, press *.
Number Option
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Ensuring Voice Quality
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 30
1
Ensuring Voice Quality
Voice quality perceived by the subscribers of the IP Telephony service should be
indistinguishable from that of a PSTN.
Supported Codecs
The table shows the codecs (voice compression algorithms) supported by
Cisco SPA IP phones. The Mean Opinion Score (MOS) measures the voice quality
by using a scale of 1–5, where 1 is the lowest quality and 5 is the highest quality.
723646 Enable or disables access to the administrative (admin) login on the
configuration utility. Press 1 to enable or 0 to disable, then press #.
To s a v e , p r e s s 1; to review, press 2; to re-enter, press 3; to exit, press *.
Number Option
Codec Complexity and Description MOS
G.711 (A-law
and u-law)
Very low complexity. Supports uncompressed
64 kbps digitized voice transmission at one to ten
5ms voice frames-per-packet. This codec
provides the highest voice quality and uses the
most bandwidth of any of the available codecs.
4.5
G.726 Low complexity. Supports compressed 16, 24,
32, or 64 kbps digitized voice transmission at
one to ten 10ms voice frames per packet. When
no static payload value is assigned per
RFC-1890, Cisco SPA IP phones can support
dynamic payloads for G.726.
G.726 is supported only for 32 kbps on the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2.
4.1
(32 kbps)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Ensuring Voice Quality
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 31
1
Bandwidth Requirements
Depending on how you have your IP phones configured, each call requires 55 to
110 kbps of the bandwidth in each direction. For example, using G.729 with an
average business-grade broadband Internet connection supporting 1.5 Mbps
downstream and 384 kbps upstream, a total of seven (7) simultaneous
conversations can be reliably supported with adequate bandwidth available for
file downloads.
We recommend using Cisco SPA IP phones with QoS-capable networking
equipment that can prioritize the VoIP traffic. A QoS-enabled device prioritizes the
packets going upstream to the ISP.
G.729 and
G.729A
G.729A low-medium complexity. G.729 medium
complexity.
G.729A requires about half the processing power
of G.729. The G.729 and G.729A bit streams are
compatible and interoperable, but not identical.
4
G.723.1 High complexity. Cisco SPA IP phones support
the use of ITU G.723.1 audio codec at 6.4 kbps.
Up to two channels of G.723.1 can be used
simultaneously. For example, Line 1 and Line 2
can use G.723.1 simultaneously, or Line 1 or
Line 2 can initiate a three-way conference with
both call legs using G.723.1.
G.723.1 is not supported on the Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2 or Cisco WIP310 phones.
3.8
G.722 Only one G.722 call at a time is allowed. If a
conference call is placed, a SIP re-invite message
is sent to switch the calls to narrowband audio.
Not supported on the Cisco WIP310.
4.3
(approx)
Codec Complexity and Description MOS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Ensuring Voice Quality
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 32
1
The table approximates the bandwidth budget for each side of the conversation
(in each direction) using different codecs and the number of calls the network
might support. The table is based on the following assumptions:
• Bandwidth calculated with no silence suppression, as the use of silence
suppression can reduce the average bandwidth budget by 30 percent or
more.
• 20 millisecond of payload per RTP packet
For more information about bandwidth calculation, refer to the following web sites:
http://www.erlang.com/calculator/lipb/
http://www.packetizer.com/voip/diagnostics/bandcalc.html
Factors Affecting Voice Quality
The following factors contribute to voice quality:
• Audio compression algorithm—Speech signals are sampled, quantized,
and compressed before they are packetized and transmitted to the other
end. For IP Telephony, speech signals are usually sampled at 8000 samples
per second with 12–16 bits per sample. The compression algorithm plays a
large role in determining the voice quality of the reconstructed speech
signal at the other end. Cisco SPA IP phones support popular audio
compression algorithms for IP Telephony: G.711 a-law and u-law, G.726,
G.729a, G.722 (not supported on Cisco WIP310) and G.723.1. (not
supported on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 or Cisco WIP310.)
Codec Estimated
Bandwidth
2 Calls 4 Calls 6 Calls 8 Calls
G.711 110 kbps 220 kbps 440 kbps 660 kbps 880 kbps
G.722 110 kbps 220 kbps 440 kbps 660 kbps 880 kbps
G.726-40 87 kbps 174 kbps 348 kbps 522 kbps 696 kbps
G.726-32 79 kbps 158 kbps 316 kbps 474 kbps 632 kbps
G.726-24 71 kbps 142 kbps 284 kbps 426 kbps 568 kbps
G.726-16 63 kbps 126 kbps 252 kbps 378 kbps 504 kbps
G.729 55 kbps 110 kbps 220 kbps 330 kbps 440 kbps
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Ensuring Voice Quality
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 33
1
• The encoder and decoder pair in a compression algorithm is known as a
codec. The compression ratio of a codec is expressed in terms of the bit
rate of the compressed speech. The lower the bit rate, the smaller the
bandwidth required to transmit the audio packets. Although voice quality is
usually lower with a lower bit rate, it is usually higher as the complexity of
the codec gets higher at the same bit rate.
• Silence suppression—Cisco SPA IP phones apply silence suppression so
that silence packets are not sent to the other end to conserve more
transmission bandwidth. IP bandwidth is used only when someone is
speaking. Voice activity detection (VAD) with silence suppression is a
means of increasing the number of calls supported by the network by
reducing the required bidirectional bandwidth for a single call. A noise level
measurement is sent periodically during silence suppressed intervals so
that the other end can generate artificial comfort noise by using a comfort
noise generator (CNG).
• Packet loss—Audio packets are transported by UDP. Packets might be lost
or contain errors that can lead to audio sample drop-outs and distortions
and lower the perceived voice quality. The Cisco SPA IP phones apply an
error concealment algorithm to alleviate the effect of packet loss.
• Network jitter—The IP network can induce varying delays of received
packets. The RTP receiver in Cisco SPA IP phones keep a reserve of
samples to absorb the network jitter, instead of playing out all the samples
as soon as they arrive. This reserve is known as a jitter buffer. The bigger the
jitter buffer, the more jitter it can absorb, but this also introduces bigger
delay.
- Jitter buffer size should be kept to a relatively small size whenever
possible. If jitter buffer size is too small, many late packets might be
considered lost and thus lower the voice quality. Cisco SPA IP phones
dynamically adjust the size of the jitter buffer according to the network
conditions that exist during a call.
- The minimum jitter buffer size is 30 ms or 10 ms plus the current RTP
frame size, whichever is larger, for all jitter level settings. However, the
starting jitter buffer size value is larger for higher jitter levels. This setting
controls the rate at which the jitter buffer size is adjusted to reach the
minimum.
- Jitter Buffer Adjustment—Controls how the jitter buffer should be
adjusted.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Ensuring Voice Quality
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 34
1
• Echo—Impedance mismatch between the telephone and the IP telephony
gateway phone port can lead to near-end echo. Cisco SPA IP phones have
a near-end echo canceller with at least 8 ms tail length to compensate for
impedance mismatch. Cisco SPA IP phones implement an echo suppressor
with CNG so that any residual echo is not noticeable.
• Hardware noise—Certain levels of noise can be coupled into the
conversational audio signals because of the hardware design. The source
can be ambient noise or 60 Hz noise from the power adaptor. The Cisco
hardware design minimizes noise coupling.
• End-to-end delay—End-to-end delay does not affect voice quality directly,
but is an important factor in determining whether IP phone subscribers can
interact normally in a conversation. A reasonable delay should be 50 to
100 ms. End-to-end delay larger than 300 ms is unacceptable to most
callers. Cisco SPA IP phones support end-to-end delays well within
acceptable thresholds.
• Adjustable Audio Frames Per Packet—Allows you to set the number of
audio frames contained in one RTP packet. Packets can be adjusted to
contain from 1–10 audio frames. Increasing the number of frames
decreases the bandwidth utilized, but it also increases delay and can affect
voice quality.
SIP Publish Signaling Improvements
The Cisco SPA IP phones resend the SIP PUBLISH messages with the voice
quality report once per 5xx response with a valid Retry-After header.
A valid time value in seconds is a positive integer from 0 to 65536. A SIP message
with a Retry-After time value of 0 is treated as a 500 Server Internal Error
message. A time value less than 0 is ignored.
The following is a summary of the 5xx messages with Retry-After header that the
phone supports:
5xx SIP Response Description
500 Server Internal Error An unexpected server condition prevents the
fulfillment of request.
503 Service Unavailable The server is unavailable due to a temporary
overload or maintenance.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started
Ensuring Voice Quality
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 35
1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 36
Configuring Lines
The Cisco SPA IP phones provide different numbers of lines depending on the
phone model. Each line corresponds to a phone number (or extension) used for
calls. Each line can support two calls. For example, a four-line phone can handle
eight calls. One call can be active (in conversation) and seven can be on hold.
This chapter contains the following sections:
• Configuring a Line Key
• Assigning Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, or Speed Dial Functions to
Unused Lines
• Configuring Audio Indication for Call Pickup Event
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Configuring a Line Key
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 37
2
Configuring a Line Key
Each line key can be assigned multiple extensions, a short name, and share call
appearance. The number of line keys depends on the model of the IP phone (does
not apply to the Cisco WIP310). Generally you should reserve Line Key 1 on the IP
phone as the primary and private extension of the designated user.
To configure a phone line:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Under each line key for the phone, configure the following:
• Extension—Assign an extension number to the line key. Defaults to1.
• Short Name—Enter a short name or a number to display on the IP phone
screen.
• Share Call Appearance—Select shared to share incoming call appearances
with other phones. See Configuring Shared–Line Appearance. If you
select private, the call appearance is not shared with any other phone.
Defaults to private.
• Extended Function—See Assigning Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, or
Speed Dial Functions to Unused Lines.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring Shared–Line Appearance
You create a shared-line appearance by assigning the same directory number to
different devices. A Cisco system considers a directory number to be a shared line
if it appears on more than one device. In a shared-call appearance, for example,
you can set up a shared line, so a directory number appears on line 1 of a manager
phone and on line 2 of an assistant phone. Another example of a shared line
involves a single incoming 800 number that is set up to appear as line 2 on every
sales representative phone in an office.
Most devices with a shared-line appearance can make or receive new calls or
resume held calls at the same time. Incoming calls display on all devices that share
a line, and anyone can answer the call. Only one call remains active at a time on a
device.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Configuring a Line Key
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 38
2
Call information (such as calling party or called party) displays on all devices that
are sharing a line. If one of the devices turns on the Privacy feature, other devices
that share the line will not see outbound calls that are made from the device that
turned on privacy. All devices will still see inbound calls to the shared line.
Devices with shared-call appearances can initiate independent transfer or
conference transactions.
When a call is made to the extension number for the shared-call, all sharing
Cisco SPA IP phones ring. Any IP phone can answer the call. If the active phone
places the shared call on hold, the call can be resumed from any of the sharing
Cisco SPA IP phones by pressing the corresponding line key (except for the
Cisco SPA502G) or the Select button when the Resume icon is displayed
(Cisco WIP310).
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones support the private
hold feature for MetaSwitch and BroadSoft. Users who have a shared line can
press PrivHold, and the call can only be resumed by the user who placed the call
on hold.
Each IP phone can be configured independently. Although the account information
is usually the same for all of the Cisco SPA IP phones, settings such as the dial plan
or the preferred codec can vary between phones and continue to support shared-
line appearance.
To configure the line:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice.
STEP 2 Click the Ext_n tab of the extension that is shared (do not use Ext 1).
STEP 3 Under General in the Line Enable list, choose yes.
STEP 4 Under Share Line Appearance in the Share Ext list, select shared. If you set this
extension to private (not shared), the extension does not share calls, regardless of
the Share Call Appearance setting on the Phone tab. If you set this extension to
shared, calls follow the Share Call Appearance setting on the Phone tab. On the
Cisco SPA500 Series phones that have line buttons, a hollow telephone icon is
displayed next to the shared line button. For the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2, a telephone icon is displayed.
STEP 5 In the Shared User ID field, enter the user ID (name) of the phone with the extension
that is being shared.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Configuring a Line Key
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 39
2
STEP 6 In the Subscription Expires field, enter the number of seconds before the SIP
subscription expires. Until the subscription expires, the phone gets NOTIFY
messages from the SIP server on the status of the shared phone extension. The
default is 60 seconds.
STEP 7 In the Restrict MWI (message waiting indicator) field, choose yes to set the
message waiting indicator to light only for messages on private lines (SIP). Choose
no to set the message waiting indicator to light for all messages.
STEP 8 Under Proxy and Registration, in the Proxy field, enter the IP address of the proxy
server (for example, the IP address of the Cisco SPA9000).
STEP 9 Under Subscriber Information, enter a Display Name and User ID (extension
number) for the shared extension. These are shown on the IP phone screen.
STEP 10 (Optional) In the Phone tab, under Miscellaneous Line Key Settings, configure line
mapping. Each LED (line/extension) can hold two calls. You can assign an extension
to two LEDs. The first call always causes the assigned LED to flash. Choose one of
the following:
• Vertical first—The next LED on the phone flashes with the second incoming
call.
• Horizontal first—The same LED to flashes with the second incoming call.
STEP 11 (Optional) In the Phone tab, under Miscellaneous Line Key Settings, configure SCA
Barge-In Enable. Choose yes to allow users sharing call appearances to take over
the call on a shared line. Choose no to prevent users from taking over the call on a
shared line.
For example, Bob and Chris share the extension 401. Adam, calls extension 401.
Bob answers the call. Adam and Bob are connected. If Chris has the SCA Barge-In
Enable field on her phone set to yes, she can press the line button for extension
401. Chris and Adam are connected in a call and Bob is dropped from the call.
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 support the private hold feature for
MetaSwitch and Broadsoft. Users who have a shared line can press PrivHold, and
the call can only be resumed by the user who placed the call on hold; no barge-in
can be performed on these calls.
STEP 12 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Configuring a Line Key
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 40
2
Configuring Call Appearance Per Line
In the Phone tab, Call Appearance Per Line (under Miscellaneous Line Key
Settings) lets you choose the number of calls per line button. The default value is 2.
This option is not supported on the Cisco SPA501G and Cisco SPA301 phones.
Also, this feature is only supported when the phones are operating in SIP mode.
When you increase the number of calls per line to a value greater than 2, you must
set the following:
• Line ID Mapping (under Miscellaneous Line Key Settings) to Horizontal
First.
• Line Navigation (under Miscellaneous Line Key Settings) to Per Call.
• Programmable Softkey Enable (under Programmable Softkeys) to Ye s.
When the maximum numbers of calls per phone is reached, the phone does not
allow you to make a new call and rejects incoming calls. Table 1 lists the maximum
number of calls per phone for each model.
Table 1 Maximum Number of Allowed Calls Per Phone
Phone Maximum Number of Calls
Cisco SPA303, SPA502G,
SPA504G
10
Cisco_SPA508G 16
Cisco SPA509G 24
Cisco SPA512G and
Cisco SPA514G
10
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Configuring a Line Key
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 41
2
Expand Call Appearance Per Line
To expand the call appearances per line:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 In the Miscellaneous Line Key Settings section in the Call Appearance Per Line
field, choose how many calls per line to allow from the drop-down.
Configuring Unused Line Keys to Access Services
On the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones, unused or idle
phone lines can also be configured to access services, such as:
• XML services
• MP3 player (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
• Weather (RSS)
• News (RSS)
To configure line keys to access services:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone
STEP 2 In the Line Key to configure (line 4 in this example):
a. From the Extension drop down list, choose Disabled.
b. Enter the following string in the Extended Function field:
fnc=type
where:
• fnc: function
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Configuring a Line Key
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 42
2
• type:
- xml: pressing the line button accesses XML services. The XML service
configured on the Phone tab under the launches the page identified in
the XML Service field (see Configuring XML Services). You can specify
a different XML service to connect to by using the syntax
fnc=xml;URL=http://xxx.xx.xxx/entry.html
where xxx.xx.xxx is the URL of the XML service.
- mp3: pressing the line button starts the mp3 player.
- weather: pressing the line button accesses weather information.
- news: pressing the line button accesses news.
For example, to configure line 4 for the mp3 player:
fnc=mp3
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes. After the phone reboots, configured lines glow orange
and display the following icons next to the extension label:
• xml: XML icon
• mp3: mp3 player icon (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
• news: RSS icon
• weather: thermometer icon
Configuring Call Park on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 (MetaSwitch)
Unused line keys can be enabled to allow call park (for the MetaSwitch soft switch)
on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2. Users can press this line button to
park a call or retrieve a parked call.
To configure unused line keys for call park and retrieval:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Att(endant) Console.
STEP 2 In the General section under Server Type, choose RFC3265_4236.
STEP 3 Click the Phone tab.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Assigning Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, or Speed Dial Functions to Unused Lines
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 43
2
STEP 4 Choose the line key to configure (line 5 in this example):
a. From the Extension drop down list, choose Disabled.
b. From the Share Call Appearance drop-down list, choose private.
c. Enter the following string in the Extended Function field:
fnc=prk;sub=05@domain.com
where:
- fnc: function
- prk: call park
- sub: call park orbit, or location where the call is parked. Valid value range
is from 01 through 10. In this example, 5 is used.
- domain.com: phone domain, usually the same as the proxy value in the
Ext 1 tab. You can also use fnc=prk;sub=05@$PROXY to set this value.
STEP 5 Click Submit All Changes.
Assigning Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, or Speed Dial
Functions to Unused Lines
You can configure unused or idle lines on a Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500
Series IP phones to interact with another line in the system. For example, if you
have two idle lines on an assistant’s phone, you can configure those lines to show
the status of a supervisor’s phone (Busy Lamp Field [BLF]). You can also configure
the idle lines so that they can be used to speed dial the supervisor’s phone, or pick
up calls that are ringing on the supervisor’s phone.
A monitored extension must be private, not shared. Additionally, if using the
Cisco SPA9000 for call control, an extension can only be monitored by one other
extension.
For detailed instructions on configuring the phones with the BroadSoft Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) feature, see
Configuring SPA303 and 5xxG IP Phones with Broadsoft's
BLF
, available on the Cisco Support Community at
https://supportforums.cisco.com/docs/DOC-9977
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Assigning Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, or Speed Dial Functions to Unused Lines
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 44
2
Configuring Call Pickup and Busy Lamp Field
You must enable BLF to configure call pickup.
In this example, the assistant Bob (extension 200) has an idle line (line 4) on his
Cisco SPA508G. He would like to be able to see if his supervisor Stephanie
(extension 300) is on the phone, and pick up calls that are ringing at her extension.
To configure this feature for Bob:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 In the Line Key to configure (line 4 in this example):
a. From the Extension drop down list, choose Disabled.
b. From the Share Call Appearance drop-down list, choose private.
c. Enter the following string in the Extended Function field:
fnc=blf+cp;sub=Stephanie@$PROXY;ext=300@$PROXY
Using the following syntax:
fnc=type;sub=stationname@$PROXY;ext=extension#@$PROXY
where:
- fnc: function
- blf: busy lamp field
- cp: call pickup
- sub: station name
- ext or usr: extension or user (the usr and ext keywords are
interchangeable)
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes. After the phone reboots, the phone in this example
displays the following color LEDs for the monitored lines:
• Green: Available
• Red: Busy
• Red Fast Blink: Ringing
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Assigning Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, or Speed Dial Functions to Unused Lines
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 45
2
If the phone LEDs display orange or slow blinking orange, there is a problem:
Orange indicates that the phone failed to subscribe (received a 4xx response) and
slow-blinking orange denotes an undefined problem (there might be no response
to the subscribe request, or the BLF).
When the phone is successfully configured, Bob can monitor Stephanie’s line.
When a call is ringing at Stephanie’s line, he can press line button 4 to pick it up.
Configuring Speed Dial
In this example, the assistant, Bob (extension 200), has another idle line (line 5) on
his Cisco SPA508G. He wants to speed dial his supervisor Mark (extension 400)
from that line.
To configure this feature for Bob:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 In the Line Key to configure (line 5 in this example):
a. From the Extension drop down list, choose Disabled.
b. From the Share Call Appearance drop-down list, choose private.
c. Enter the following string in the Extended Function field:
fnc=sd;ext=400@$PROXY
Using the following syntax:
fnc=type;ext=extension#@$PROXY
where:
- fnc: function
- sd: speed dial
- ext or usr: extension or user (the usr and ext keywords are
interchangeable)
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
When the phone is successfully configured, Bob can press line button 5 to dial
Mark’s line.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Lines
Configuring Audio Indication for Call Pickup Event
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 46
2
Configuring Audio Indication for Call Pickup Event
You can configure the phone to play the Call Pickup tone when there are incoming
calls to any of the lines that the user is monitoring with the Call Pickup function.
To configure Audio Indication:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Att(endant) Console.
STEP 2 In the General section under Call Pickup Audio Notification, select Ye s,
To configure this parameter by using the configuration file, configure the following
line to the profile:
<Call_Pickup_Audio_Notification ua="na">Yes
</Call_Pickup_Audio_Notification>
STEP 3 Click the Regional tab.
STEP 4 In the Call Progress Tones section under the Call Pickup Tone parameter.
The default value is 440@-10;30(.3/9.7/1), same as the call waiting tone.
To configure this parameter by using the configuration file, configure the following
line the profile:
<Call_Pickup_Tone ua="na">440@-10;30(.3/9.7/1)</Call_Pickup_Tone>
STEP 5 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 47
Customizing Standard Features
This chapter describes customizing the Cisco SPA IP phones and contains the
following sections:
• Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
• Configuring Linksys Key System Parameters
• Enabling Call Features
• Customizing Phone Softkeys
• Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator
• Configuring Ring Tones
• Configuring RSS Newsfeeds (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
• Configuring Audio Settings
• Enabling Wireless (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
• Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
• Enabling SMS Messaging
• Enabling and Configuring the Phone Web Server
• Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500
Series IP Phones
• Configuring BroadSoft Settings (Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series)
• Configuring XML Services
• Configuring Music On Hold
• Configuring Extension Mobility
• Configuring Video Surveillance on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 48
3
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
The phone web user interface allows you to customize settings such as the phone
name, background photo, logo, and screen saver.
Configuring the Phone Name
Navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
Under General, enter the Station Name for the phone. This name displays in the
corporate directory.
Configuring Voice Mail
This configures the internal or external phone number or URL for the the voice mail
system. If you are using an external voice-mail service, the number must include
any digits required to dial out and any required area code.
To configure the phone to connect to voice mail:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone
STEP 2 Under General, enter the Voice Mail Number.
STEP 3 (Optional) Enter the Voice Mail Subscribe Interval; the expiration time in seconds,
of a subscription to a voice mail server.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes. The phone reboots.
Configuring Internal Voice Mail for Each Extension (Using a
Cisco SPA400)
To configure internal voice mail, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
Ext n. Under Call Feature Settings, enter the voice mail line number and phone
extension in the Mailbox ID field. For example, 2101 indicates that the Cisco
SPA400 voice mail server is configured on the Cisco SPA9000 Line 2, phone
extension 101.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 49
3
Customizing the Startup Screen
You can create a text or 128-by-48 pixel by 1-bit deep image logo to display when
the IP phone boots up. (Not applicable to Cisco WIP310 or the Cisco SPA501G.) A
logo displays during the boot sequence for a short period after the Cisco logo
displays.
To configure a custom logo:
STEP 1 For the Cisco SPA303 and Cisco SPA5XXG, click Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > Phone.
For the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, click Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > User.
STEP 2 To display a text logo, in the Text Logo field enter text as follows:
• Up to two lines of text
• Each line must be less than 32 characters
• Insert a new line character (\n) and escape code (%0a) between the two
lines
For example, Super\n%0aTelecom displays:
Super
Telecom
• Use the + character to add spaces for formatting. You can add multiple +
characters before and after the text to center it.
STEP 3 To display a picture logo:
a. In the BMP Picture Download URL field, enter the path, for example:
http://192.168.2.244/pictures/image04_128x48.bmp
(you can also use a TFTP server)
b. Change Select Logo to BMP Picture.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes. The phone reboots, retrieves the .bmp file, and displays
the picture when it next boots.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 50
3
Changing the Display Background
You can use a picture to customize the background on your IP phone screen. (Not
applicable to Cisco WIP310 or the Cisco SPA501G.) Phone models and
acceptable image file types are:
• Cisco SPA303 and Cisco SPA500 Series: Bitmap format, 1 bit-per-pixel
color, size 128-by-48 pixels.
• Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2: Either .jpg format (recommended) or
bitmap (1, 2, 4, 8, or 24 bits-per-pixel). Recommended image size is
320-by-240 pixels. Other image sizes are scaled to fit, which can cause
distortion.
When the
BMP Picture Download URL
is changed, the phone compares the URL to
the previous image URL. (If the URLs are the same, the phone does not perform the
download.) If the URLs are different, the phone downloads the new image and
displays it (providing the
Select Background Picture
field is set to BMP Picture).
The phone does not reboot after you change the background image URL.
Cisco SPA303 and Cisco SPA500 Series
A background image is displayed while the phone is running. To display a logo
during the phone boot sequence.
STEP 1 Copy the image to a TFTP or HTTP server that is accessible from the phone.
STEP 2 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 3 Select the background picture in the Select Background Picture menu:
• None–Does not display a background picture.
• BMP Picture–Displays the BMP Picture Download URL picture.
• Text Logo–Displays the text string in the Text Logo field.
STEP 4 If you selected None, in STEP 3, go to STEP 6. If you selected Tex t Lo go in STEP
3, go to Otherwise, enter the URL of the image file you want in BMP Picture
Download URL. The URL must include the TFTP or HTTP server name (or IP
address), directory, and filename, for example:
tftp://myserver.mydomain.com/images/downloadablepicture.bmp
or
http://myserver.mydomain.com/images/downloadablepicture.bmp
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 51
3
If the HTTP Refresh Timer is set in the server response to BMP Picture Download
URL, the phone downloads the picture from the link and displays it on the IP phone
screen. The phone automatically retrieves the picture after the specified number
of seconds.
STEP 5 If you selected Tex t Lo go, enter a text string in the Text Logo field.
STEP 6 Click Submit All Changes.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
STEP 1 Copy the image to an HTTP server that is accessible from the phone. (TFTP is not
supported.)
STEP 2 Click Admin Login > advanced > User.
STEP 3 In the Screen section, Background Picture Type field, select Download BMP
Picture.
STEP 4 Enter the URL of the .bmp file you want in the
BMP Picture Download URL
field. The
URL must include the HTTP server name (or IP address), directory, and filename,
for example:
http://myserver.mydomain.com/images/downloadablepicture.jpg
If the HTTP Refresh Timer is set in the server response to BMP Picture Download
URL, the phone downloads the picture from the link and displays it on the IP phone
screen. The phone automatically retrieves the picture after the specified number
of seconds.
STEP 5 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring the Screen Saver
You can configure a screen saver for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500
Series IP phones. (Not applicable to Cisco WIP310 or the Cisco SPA501G.) When
the phone is idle for a specified time, it enters screen saver mode. (Users can set
up screen savers directly by using phone Setup button.)
Any button press or on/off hook event triggers the phone to return to normal mode.
If a user password is set, the user must enter it to exit screen saver mode.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 52
3
To configure the screen saver:
Cisco SPA303 or Cisco SPA5XXG
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 In the General section, in the Screen Saver Enable field, choose yes to enable.
STEP 3 In the Screen Saver Wait field, enter the number of seconds of idle time to elapse
before the screen saver starts.
STEP 4 In the Screen Saver Icon field, choose the display type:
• A background picture.
• The station time in the middle of the IP phone screen.
• A moving padlock icon. When the phone is locked, the status line displays a
scrolling message “Press any key to unlock your phone.”
• A moving phone icon.
• The station date and time in the middle of the IP phone screen.
• A blank power save screen.”
STEP 5 Click Submit All Changes.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Screen, in the Screen Saver Enable field, choose yes to enable.
STEP 3 In the Screen Saver Type field, choose the display type:
• Black Background—Displays a black screen.
• Gray Background—Displays a gray screen.
• Black/Gray Rotation—The screen incrementally cycles from black to gray.
• Picture Rotation—The screen rotates through available pictures on the
phone.
• Digital Frame—Shows the background picture.
STEP 4 In the Screen Saver Trigger Time field, enter the number of seconds that the phone
remains idle before the screen saver turns on.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Phone Information and Display Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 53
3
STEP 5 In the Screen Saver Refresh Time field, enter the number of seconds before the
screen saver should refresh (if, for example, you chose a rotation of pictures).
STEP 6 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring the LCD Contrast
You can configure the LCD contrast on the Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones. (Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.)
To configure the contrast for the IP phone screen on the phone:
Cisco SPA303 and Cisco SPA5XXG
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > User.
STEP 2 Under LCD, in the LCD Contrast field, enter a number value from 1 to 30. The higher
the number, the greater the contrast on the IP phone screen.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Screen, in the LCD Contrast field, enter a number value from 1 to 30. The
higher the number, the greater the contrast on the IP phone screen.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring Back Light Settings (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2)
To configure the back light settings for the IP phone screen on the phone:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Screen in the Back Light Enable field, choose yes to enable the screen back
light.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Linksys Key System Parameters
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 54
3
STEP 3 In the Back Light Timer field, enter the number of seconds of idle time that can
elapse before the back light turns off.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring Linksys Key System Parameters
To configure the phone as part of a Linksys Key System (for use with the
Cisco SPA9000):
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > SIP.
STEP 2 Under Linksys Key System Parameters, configure the following fields:
• Linksys Key System—Enables or disables the Linksys Key System for use
with the Cisco SPA9000. Defaults to yes. See the Cisco SPA9000
System
Administration Guide
for more details.
• Multicast Address—Used by the Cisco SPA9000 to communicate with
Cisco SPA IP phones. Defaults to 224.168.168.168:6061. (The
Cisco SPA501G, can be configured by using the IVR. See the “Using IVR on
IP Phones Without Screens” section on page 26.)
• Key System Auto Discovery—Enables or disables auto discovery of the call
control server (for example, the Cisco SPA9000). Disable this feature for
teleworkers or other scenarios where multicast does not work.
• Key System IP Address—IP address of the call control server IP. Enter the IP
address for teleworkers or other scenarios where multicast does not work.
• Force LAN Codec—Used with the Cisco SPA9000. Choices are none,
G.711u, or G.711a. Defaults to none.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling Call Features
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 55
3
Enabling Call Features
This section describes how to enable and disable call features on the phone.
Enabling Anonymous Call and Caller ID Blocking Services
To enable Anonymous Call and Caller ID Blocking navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > User. Under Supplementary Services under the type of call
blocking, choose yes to enable or no to disable:
• Block ANC Serv—Blocks anonymous calls.
• Block CID Serv—Blocks outbound caller ID.
Enabling ACD Service
Typically used for call centers, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) handles incoming
calls and manages them based on a database of instructions. You can enable this
with the SIP B parameter (
“Configuring SIP” section on page 102).
To enable ACD
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Supplementary Services from the ACD Login Serv list, choose yes to
enable. (Defaults to no (disabled).)
STEP 3 In the ACD Ext field, choose the extension used for handling ACD calls. Select 1-6
(depending on your phone model). Defaults to 1.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
Enabling Call Back Service
Call back forces the phone to repeatedly try a number that received a busy
response. The busy number is tried until the call goes through and the target
phone rings.
To enable call back service, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
Phone. Under Supplementary Services in the Call Back Serv field, choose yes to
enable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling Call Features
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 56
3
Enabling Call Park and Call Pickup Services
Call park allows users to put a call on a line and make it available for another user
to pick up. Call pickup allows a user to pick up a phone that is ringing at another
user phone. Call park and call pickup are available on IP phones when used with a
Cisco SPA9000 system.
To enable call park and call pickup, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
Phone. Under Supplementary Services, under the type of call feature to enable,
choose yes to enable or no to disable:
• Call Park Serv—Enables call parking.
• Call Pickup Serv—Enables call pickup.
Enabling Call Transfer and Call Forwarding Services
You can transfer or forward a call when the service is enabled.
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Under Supplementary Services, under the transfer type you want to enable,
choose yes:
• Attn Transfer Serv—Attended call transfer service. The user answers the call
before transferring it.
• Blind Transfer Serv—Blind call transfer service. The user transfers the call
without speaking to the caller.
You can also enable or disable call forwarding:
• Cfwd All—Forwards all calls.
• Cfwd Busy—Forwards calls only if the line is busy.
• Cfwd No Ans—Forwards calls only if the line is not answered.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling Call Features
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 57
3
Enabling Conferencing
To allow the user to perform call conferencing, navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > Phone. Under Supplementary Services in the Conference
Serv field, choose yes to enable.
Enabling Do Not Disturb
You can allow users to turn the Do Not Disturb feature on or off. This feature directs
all incoming calls to voice mail or, if voice mail is not configured, plays a message
to the caller saying the user is unavailable. On the Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones, users can press the Ignore softkey to divert a
ringing call to another destination.
To allow users to use Do Not Disturb (enabled by default), navigate to Admin Login
> advanced > Voice > Phone. Under Supplementary Services under DND Serv,
choose yes to enable. (This feature can also be configured from the User tab,
under Supplementary Services.)
Enabling the Missed Call Shortcut
The IP phones can display a notification that a call has been missed. (Not
applicable to Cisco WIP310.) To enable this notification, navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > User. Under Supplementary Services in the Miss Call
Shortcut list, choose yes to enable.
Logging Missed Calls
You can disable or enable missed call logging per extension. For example, if you
have set up a line to monitor another user line, you can disable missed call logging
for the monitored line.
To enable logging, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User. Under
Supplementary Services in the Log Missed Calls for Ext <number> field, choose
yes to enable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling Call Features
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 58
3
Enabling Paging (Intercom)
The paging, or intercom feature, allows two types of paging, single page and
group paging. When paging occurs, the speaker on the paged IP phone is
automatically activated unless the handset or headset is being used.
A user can directly contact another user by phone. If the person being paged has
configured their phone to automatically accept pages, the phone does not ring; a
direct connection between the two phones is automatically established when
paging is initiated.
Group Paging lets the user page all the client Cisco SPA IP phones at once, or
page groups of phones. If the client phone is on an active call while a group page
starts, the incoming page is ignored. Group page is one-way; the paged client IP
phones can only listen to the call from the originator.
To enable paging, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone. Under
Supplementary Services in the Paging Serv list, choose yes to enable.
To configure a phone to automatically accept pages, navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > User. Under Supplementary Services in the Auto Answer
Page list, choose yes to enable.
Configuring Paging Groups
You can configure a phone to be a member of a paging group. Users can then
direct pages to specific groups of phones.
Limitations:
• A phone can be a listening member of no more than two paging groups.
• No more than five paging groups can be configured on a phone.
To configure a phone as part of a paging group:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Under Multiple Paging Group Parameters, enter the paging commands into the
Group Paging Script field. The syntax is as follows:
pggrp=ip-address:port;[name=xxx;]num=xxx;[listen={yes|no}]];
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling Call Features
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 59
3
Where:
• IP address: Multicast IP address of the phone that listens for and receives
pages.
• port: Port on which to page; use different ports for each paging group. All
phones in the same paging group must use the same port number.
• name (optional): The name of the paging group. In this name, do not use the
pggrp string because it is reserved. Using it causes the script not to work,
as in these examples:
pggrp=224.168.168.168:3141;name=ITGPgGrp;num=800;listen=y
es;
pggrp=224.168.168.168:3141;name=PgGrp;num=800;listen=yes;
• num: The number users will dial to access the paging group; must be unique
to the group.
• listen: If the phone being configured is a listening member of the page
group. A phone can be a listening member of a maximum of two groups. If
no value is entered, the default is to not listen as a member of this group.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Paging Group Example
This example sets up four paging groups:
All
,
Sales
,
Support
, and
Engineering
.
Users will press 801 to send pages to all phones, 802 to send pages to phones
configured as part of the Sales group, 803 to send pages to phones configured as
part of the Support group, and 804 to send pages to phones configured as part of
the Engineering group.
A phone that is configured with this example is a listening member of the “All” and
“Sales” paging groups. That phone will automatically receive pages sent to those
two paging groups. For each Sales phone, enter the following in the Phone >
Multiple Paging Groups Parameters > Group Paging Script field:
pggrp=224.123.123.121:43210;name=All; num=801;listen=yes;
pggrp=224.123.123.121:43211;name=Sales;num=802; listen=yes;
pggrp=224.123.123.121:43212;name=Support;num=803;
pggrp=224.123.123.121:43213;name=Engineering;num=804;
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Customizing Phone Softkeys
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 60
3
Enabling Service Announcements
Service Announcements allows a user to send announcement requests to a
customer-supplied announcement server. (Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.)
To configure Service Announcements, navigate to Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > Phone. Under Supplementary Services, in the Service Annc Serv list,
choose yes to enable.
Customizing Phone Softkeys
You can customize the softkeys displayed on the phone. The default softkeys
(when the phone is in an idle state) are Redial, Directory, Call Forward, and Do Not
Disturb. Other softkeys are available during specific call states (for example, if a
call is on hold, the Resume softkey displays).
This feature is not available on the IP phones that are using SPCP.
To program softkeys:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only) Under Programmable Softkey Enable,
choose yes to enable.
STEP 3 Edit the softkeys depending on the call state that you want the softkey to display.
Refer to the table for information about softkeys.
In the Programmable Softkeys section, each phone state is displayed and the
softkeys that are available to display during that state are listed. Each softkey is
separated by a semicolon. Softkeys are shown in the format:
softkeyname|[position]
where
softkeyname
is the name of the key and
position
is where the key is
displayed on the IP phone screen. Positions are numbered, with position one
displayed on the lower left of the IP phone screen, followed by positions two
through four. Additional positions are accessed by pressing the right arrow key on
the phone. If no position is given for a softkey, the key will float and appears in the
first available empty position on the IP phone screen.
NOTE On a Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 in the Off Hook state, the More softkey
is fixed in position 4 and cannot be changed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Customizing Phone Softkeys
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 61
3
The table below lists each softkey and the phone state under which the softkey
displays. You can have a maximum of 16 softkeys for each call state field.
Keyword Key Label Definition Available Phone
States
acd_login Login Logs user in to Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD).
Idle
acd_logout Logout Logs user out of ACD. Idle
alpha Alpha Enter alphabetic characters in a
data entry field.
Off-Hook, Dialing
Input
answer Answer Answers an incoming call. Ringing
avail Avail Denotes that a user who is
logged in to an ACD server has
set his status as available.
Idle
barge Barge Allows another user to interrupt
a shared call.
Shared-Active,
Shared-Held
bxfer BlindXfer/
bxfer
Performs a blind call transfer
(transfers a call without
speaking to the party to whom
the call is transferred). Requires
that Blind Xfer Serv is enabled.
Connected,
Connected
cancel Cancel Cancels a call (for example,
when conferencing a call and
the second party is not
answering).
Dialing Input
cfwd Forward Forwards all calls to a specified
number.
Idle, Off-Hook,
Hold, Shared-
Active, Shared-
Held
chkcfwd Clr Fwd/-
cfwd
Deactivates call forwarding. Idle
chkdnd Clr DND/-
dnd
Deactivates Do Not Disturb. Idle
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Customizing Phone Softkeys
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 62
3
clear Clear Clears an entire text/number
field.
Input
conf Conf Initiates a conference call.
Requires that Conf Serv is
enabled and there are two or
more calls that are active or on
hold.
Connected,
Start-Conf
confLx Conf Line Conferences active lines on the
phone. Requires that Conf Serv
is enabled and there are two or
more calls that are active or on
hold.
Connected
delchar delChar Deletes a character when
entering text.
Dialing (input)
dial Dial Dials a number. Dialing (input)
dir Dir Provides access to phone
directories.
Idle, Connected,
Start-Conf, Start-
Xfer, Off-Hook
(no input), Redial
dnd DND Sets Do Not Disturb to prevent
calls from ringing the phone.
Idle, Off-Hook
(no input), Hold,
Shared-Active,
Shared-Held
em_login Login Logs user in to Extension
Mobility.
Idle
em_logout Logout Logs user out of Extension
Mobility.
Idle
Keyword Key Label Definition Available Phone
States
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Customizing Phone Softkeys
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 63
3
endcall End Call Ends a call. Connected, Off-
hook,
Progressing,
Start-Xfer, Start-
Conf,
Conferencing,
Releasing,
Resume
gpickup GrPickup/
grPick
Allows user to answer a call
ringing on an extension by
discovering the number of the
ringing extension.
Idle, Off-Hook
(no input)
hold Hold Put a call on hold. Connected,
Start-Xfer, Start-
Conf,
Conferencing
ignore Ignore Ignores an incoming call. Ringing
join Join Connects a conference call. Conferencing
lcr Call Rtn/lcr Returns the last missed call. Idle, Missed-Call,
Off-Hook (no
input)
left Left Moves the cursor to the left. Dialing Input
miss Miss Displays the list of missed calls. Missed-Call
newcall New Call Begins a new call. Hold, Shared-
Active
option Option Opens a menu of input options. Off-Hook (no
input), Dialing
(input)
park Park Puts a call on hold at a
designated “park” number.
Connected
phold PrivHold Puts a call on hold on an active
shared line.
Connected
Keyword Key Label Definition Available Phone
States
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Customizing Phone Softkeys
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 64
3
pickup Pickup Allows user to answer a call
ringing on another extension by
entering the extension number.
Idle, Off-Hook
(no input)
redial Redial Displays the redial list. Idle, Connected,
Start-Conf, Start-
Xfer, Off-Hook
(no input), Hold
resume Resume Resumes a call that is on hold. Idle, Hold,
Shared-Held
right Right Moves the cursor to the right. Dialing (input)
starcode Input Star
Code/
*code
Displays a list of star codes that
can be selected.
Off-Hook, Dialing
(input)
toggle Toggle Switches between two calls
that are active or on hold.
(Cisco SPA502)
Connected
unavail Unavail Denotes that a user who is
logged in to an ACD server has
set his status as unavailable.
Idle
unpark Unpark Resumes a parked call. Idle, Off-Hook
(no input)
xfer Transfer/
xfer
Performs a call transfer.
Requires that Attn Xfer Serv is
enabled and there is at least
one connected call and one
idle call.
Connected,
Start-Xfer
xferLx Xfer Line/
xferLx
Transfers an active line on the
phone to a called number.
Requires that Attn Xfer Serv is
enabled and there are two or
more calls that are active or on
hold.
Connected
Keyword Key Label Definition Available Phone
States
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Customizing Phone Softkeys
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 65
3
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
Programmable Softkeys
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones provide six
programmable softkeys (fields PSK 1 through PSK 6). These keys can be defined
by either a speed dial script or an XML service script.
To configure programmable softkeys:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only) Under Programmable Softkey Enable,
choose yes to enable.
To configure a speed dial script, enter the following in the PSK field:
fnc=sd;ext=extensionname@$PROXY;vid=outboundextnum;nme=name
where
fnc
is the function of the key (speed dial), ext (
extensionname
) is the
extension being dialed,
vid
is the extension on the calling phone from which the
outbound call is sent, and
name
is the name of the speed dial being configured.
Vertical service activation codes (* codes) are supported in speed dial
configurations.
The
name
field displays on the softkey on the IP phone screen. Cisco recommends
a maximum of 8 characters for a Cisco SPA30X or Cisco SPA50X phone and 10
characters for a Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 phone. If more characters
are used, the label can be truncated on the IP phone screen.
To configure an XML script, enter the following in the PSK field:
fnc=xml;url=http://scriptURL.xml;nme=scriptname
where
fnc
is the function of the key (an XML script),
scriptURL.xml
is the URL
where the script is located, and
scriptname
is the name of the script.
The
scriptname
field displays on the softkey on the IP phone screen. Cisco
recommends a maximum of 8 characters for a Cisco SPA300 Series or
Cisco SPA500 Series phone and 10 characters for a Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 phone. If more characters are used, the label can be truncated
on the IP phone screen.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Customizing Phone Softkeys
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 66
3
You can use macro variables in XML URLs. The following macro variables are
supported:
• User ID—UID1, UID2
• Display name—DISPLAYNAME1, DISPLAYNAME2
• Auth ID—AUTHID1, AUTHID2
• Proxy—PROXY1, PROXY2
• MAC Address—MA
• Product Name—PN
• Product Series Number—PSN
• Serial Number—SERIAL_NUMBER
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Softkey Example
Configure the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 phone with softkey that, when
pressed, dials the Sales Department extension (200). You want this button to
display on the far lower left of the IP phone screen when the phone is idle, when
the phone is off hook, or when the phone is connected on a call. You want the
outbound call (that is going to the speed dial) to originate from the second
extension on the user phone, not the primary extension.
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Under Programmable Softkey Enable, choose yes to enable.
STEP 3 In the Programmable Softkeys section, edit the following:
• Programmable Softkey Enable: yes
• PSK1: fnc=sd;ext=200@$PROXY;vid=2;nme=Sales
• Idle Key List: Edit the field to add psk1|1 to the beginning of the string; for
example:
psk1|1;em_login;acd_login;acd_logout;avail;unavail;
redial;dir;cfwd;dnd;lcr;pickup;gpickup;unpark;em_logout;
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 67
3
• Off Hook Key List: Edit the field to add psk1|1 to the beginning of the string;
for example:
psk1|1;option;redial;dir;cfwd;dnd;lcr;unpark;pickup;
gpickup;
• Connected Key List: Edit the field to add psk1|1 to the string, editing the
existing
softkeyname
|1 to PSK1. For example, the original string:
hold|1;endcall|2;conf|3;xfer|4;bxfer;confLx;xferLx;park;p
hold;flash;
becomes:
psk|1;hold|2;endcall|3;conf|4;xfer;bxfer;confLx;xferLx;
park;phold;flash
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes. The Sales speed dial softkey is displayed in the lower
left of the IP phone screen when the phone is idle, when the phone is connected
on a call, and when the phone is off hook.
Configuring the Message Waiting Indicator
You can configure the message waiting indicator (MWI) for separate extensions on
the phone. The MWI lights based on the presence of new voicemail messages in
the mailbox.
To enable the indicator at the top of your Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500
Series IP phone to light when voice mail is left, or on a Cisco WIP310 display a
seeing message waiting notification, navigate to Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > Ext_n. Under Call Feature Settings in the Message Waiting list, choose yes
to enable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 68
3
Configuring Ring Tones
You can define up to 12 ring tones for a Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500
Series IP phone. In addition to these 12 ring tones, 4 user-configurable ring tones
can be used in place of some of the default ring tones. See Appendix A, “Ring
Tone (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series),” for more information
about ring tones.
Cisco WIP310 ring tones are not configurable from the phone web user interface.
You can define:
• The default ring tone for the extension
• Specific ring tones assigned to individual callers in the personal directory.
These override the default ring tone.
To configure ring tones:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone and scroll to the Ring Tone
section.
Configure the characteristics of each ring tone by using a Ring Tone script.
Specify:
• Name (n)—Ring tone name, such as Classic, Simple, or Office
• Waveform (w):
- (Not supported on the Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA5XXG.)
- (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2) 1, 2, 3, 4, file://Pulse1.raw, file://
Ring7.raw, file://Warble.raw, w=file://Low.raw, file://Floor.raw, file://
Reverb.raw
• Cadence (c)—1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (Not supported on the Cisco SPA300 Series or
Cisco SPA5XXG.)
You can also use the configuration file to configure a ring tone. For example, to
configure Ring1 to play the Warble ring tone, change the Ring1 parameter as
follows
• Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA5XXG
<Ring1 ua="na">n=warble;w=7;c=1</Ring1>
• (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 69
3
<Ring1 ua="na">n=warble;w=file://Warble.raw;c=1</Ring1>
You can also download one of two available ring tones (user ring tone 1 or 2) by
using TFTP:
http://phone_ip_addr/ringtone1?[url]
The [url] syntax is tftp://host[:port]/path.
• The default host is the TFTP host.
• Port is optional. The default port is 69.
• The link is case sensitive.
On the IP phones, user-downloaded ring tones are labeled User 1 and User 2 in
the choices for the Default Ring. On the phone ring tone menu, the User 1 and
User 2 choices are replaced by the corresponding name of the ring tone. Not
Installed appears if the user ring tone slots are not used.
For ring tone User 1 and User 2, the cadence is fixed with the on-time equals to the
duration of the ring tone file and off-time equals to four seconds. The total ring
duration is fixed at 60 seconds. The user ring tone names displayed on the IP
phone screen are derived from the ring tone file header file.
The phone does not require rebooting after downloading a ring tone.
To remove the User 1 ring tone from the phone, set the
path
to delete, as follows:
http://phone_ip_addr/ringtone1?/delete
STEP 2 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring On-Demand Ring Tones (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2)
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 support on-demand ring tones; ring
tones are downloaded from a TFTP server and played when a call comes in. To
configure:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Scroll to the Ring Tone section.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 70
3
STEP 3 In one or more of the ten ring tone fields, enter the following:
n=office;w=[tftp://]host[:port]/path;c=0
Specify the URL to download in the host/port/path field. If the connection
cannot be established, a default ring tone is played.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
User-Created MP3 Ring Tones (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2)
A Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 user can create up to two ring tones from
an MP3 audio file stored on a USB memory device. For instructions, see the
Cisco Small Business SPA525G and SPA525G2 SIP IP Phones User Guide,
located on Cisco.com.
Creating and Uploading Ring Tones Using the Ring Tone
Utility (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series only)
To convert a file for use as a ring tone, use the Ring Tone Utility, available at:
https://supportforums.cisco.com/docs/DOC-9944
You must have a .wav file of less than 8 seconds in length saved to your computer.
You can also use a sound editor to create the file with the following restrictions:
• 16-bit PCM mono
• 8000 samples per second
• Less than 6000 ms in length
To create a ring tone and upload it to a phone:
STEP 1 Open the Ring Tone Utility.
STEP 2 Enter the IP address of the phone.
STEP 3 Click Browse and navigate to the directory on your computer where the source
.wav file is stored. Select the wav file and click Open.
STEP 4 Click Load Source File.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 71
3
STEP 5 Enter a name for the ring tone. This name will appear in the display on the phone.
You choose the file name later.
STEP 6 Enter the target. You can have up to two customized ring tones uploaded to the
phone.
STEP 7 (Optional) Click Preview to preview the ring tone. Click Options to change the start
or end positions, or to squeeze or stretch the audio.
STEP 8 Click Upload to Phone to upload the ring tone to the phone. Click OK when the
success status message appears.
STEP 9 Close the open Ring Tone Utility windows.
To create a ring tone and save it to a file:
STEP 1 Open the Ring Tone Utility.
STEP 2 Enter the IP address of the user phone or press Skip to create the ring tone and
save it as a file.
STEP 3 Click Browse and navigate to the directory on your computer where the source
wav file is stored. Select the wav file and click Open.
STEP 4 Click Load.
STEP 5 Enter a name for the ring tone. This name will appear in the IP phone screen. You
choose the file name later.
STEP 6 (Optional) Click Preview to preview the ring tone. Click Options to change the start
or end positions, or to squeeze or stretch the audio.
STEP 7 Click Save As to save the file to your computer. Enter the file name and press Save.
STEP 8 Close the open Ring Tone Utility windows.
To delete a ring tone from a phone:
STEP 1 Open the Ring Tone Utility.
STEP 2 Enter the IP address of the phone.
STEP 3 Click the Delete button next to the ring tone you want to delete.
STEP 4 Click OK.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 72
3
STEP 5 Close the Ring Tone Utility windows.
Assigning a Ring Tone to an Extension
To assign a ring tone to an extension:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Ext Ext <number> tab.
STEP 2 Under Call Feature Settings in the Default Ring field, choose from the following:
• No Ring
• 1 through 12
• User 1
• User 2
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring RSS Newsfeeds (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 73
3
Configuring RSS Newsfeeds (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2)
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 provides the option to view RSS
newsfeeds for news in the categories of local, world, finance, sports, and politics.
Newsfeeds provided by Yahoo are supported for U.S. customers only.
To configure newsfeeds:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Web Information Service Settings, you can edit the following fields:
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes. The phone reboots.
Parameter Description
RSS Feed URLs 1-
5
URLs for Local and World news, Finance, Sports, and
Politics. Default values are:
• 1—Local News (defaults to URL http://rss.cnn.com/
rss/cnn_us.rss)
• 2—World News (defaults to URL http://
newsrss.bbc.co.uk/rss/newsonline_uk_edition/
world/rss.xml)
• 3—Finance News (defaults to URL http://
finance.yahoo.com/rss/topstories)
• 4—Sports News (defaults to URL http://
rss.news.yahoo.com/rss/sports
• 5—Politics News (defaults to URL http://
rss.news.yahoo.com/rss/politics)
Weather
Temperature Unit
Choose which unit to display for weather information
(Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Audio Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 74
3
Configuring Audio Settings
You can configure default audio settings for the phone. The volume settings can be
modified by the user by pressing the volume control button on the phone, then
pressing the Save soft button. (Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.)
To configure the audio volume settings:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 In the Audio Volume section, configure a volume level between 1 and 10, with 1
being the lowest level:
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Parameter Description
Ringer Volume Sets the volume for the ringer.
Speaker Volume Sets the volume for the full-duplex
speakerphone.
Handset Volume Sets the volume for the handset.
Headset Volume Sets the volume for the headset.
Bluetooth Volume Sets the volume for the Bluetooth device
(Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only).
Handset Version Handset Version—Change the handset version
manually.
Auto—Phone automatically sets the handset
version based on the hardware version and
model. (Default)
Original—Handset set to Version 2 and below.
V3—Handset set to Version 3.
Deep Bass Sets a standard tone or an enhanced bass tone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling Wireless (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 75
3
Configuring Audio Input Gain (Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series)
The value on the handset, headset, or speakerphone parameters default to zero,
indicating that the volume is set to a base level. This does not mean that the sound
is turned off; it is set to a level the average person can hear in a normal office
environment.
To amplify or reduce the sound level, navigate to Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > Phone. Under Audio Input Gain (dB), choose the item to configure:
• A positive value increases amplification (sound is louder).
• A negative value decreases amplification (sound is quieter).
• Set a value that is loud enough to hear clearly without producing echo (an
indication that the input gain is too high).
Enabling Wireless (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 provides a Wireless-G interface. If a
wired link is connected to the phone, the wireless connection is automatically
disabled.
To enable wireless communications, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice
> System. Under Wi-Fi Settings, in the SPA525-wifi-on field, choose yes to enable
or no to disable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 76
3
Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
only)
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 supports Bluetooth to allow use of the
phone with a wireless Bluetooth-enabled headset. The Cisco SPA525G2 also
supports Bluetooth communications with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. You
can do the following:
• Pair your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone and Cisco SPA525G2. Your
mobile phone is assigned a line button on your Cisco SPA525G2. You can
make and receive mobile network calls by using the Cisco SPA525G2.
• Switch audio for in-progress calls between your mobile phone and the
Cisco SPA525G2.
• Import your mobile phone address book to your Cisco SPA525G2 personal
address book.
• Use your Cisco SPA525G2 as a handsfree device for your mobile phone.
For a list of supported Bluetooth headsets, see https://supportforums.cisco.com/
docs/DOC-9926.
Enabling Bluetooth from the Web Interface
To enable Bluetooth from the phone web user interface:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > System.
STEP 2 Under Bluetooth Settings in the Enable BT field, choose yes to enable or no to
disable.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Enabling Bluetooth from the Phone
To enable Bluetooth from the IP phone screen:
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Scroll to User Preferences and press Select.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 77
3
STEP 3 Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select.
STEP 4 With Bluetooth selected, press the Right Arrow key until a blue check mark
appears indicating that the feature is enabled.
STEP 5 Press Save.
Pairing a Bluetooth Headset
To enable a Bluetooth headset from the phone web user interface:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Bluetooth.
STEP 2 Under Bluetooth Device, choose On.
STEP 3 Under Bluetooth Device List, press Scan for Bluetooth Devices.
STEP 4 In the Bluetooth Device List, click the name of the Bluetooth headset.
STEP 5 Enter the PIN for the Bluetooth headset.
STEP 6 Press Submit All Changes.
To enable a Bluetooth headset from the IP phone screen:
STEP 1 Enable Bluetooth as described in “Enabling Bluetooth from the Web Interface.”
STEP 2 Press the Setup button.
STEP 3 Scroll to User Preferences and press Select.
STEP 4 Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select.
STEP 5 Scroll to Bluetooth Mode and press the Right Arrow key to choose one of the
following:
• Phone—Configures a Cisco SPA525G2 with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone. (The Cisco SPA525G pairs with headsets only; it does not pair with
mobile phones.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 78
3
• Both—The Cisco SPA525G2 uses a Bluetooth headset or operates with a
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone (see Pairing Your Cisco SPA525G2 with
a Bluetooth-Enabled Mobile Phone). The Cisco SPA525G2 connects to
only one device at a time (either a Bluetooth headset or a Bluetooth-enabled
mobile phone).
If multiple Bluetooth devices are in range of the Cisco SPA525G2, the order
of devices in the Bluetooth Configuration > Bluetooth Profiles list is used,
and the device with a higher priority is activated first.
STEP 6 Scroll to Bluetooth Profiles and press the Right Arrow key to enter the profile
screen.
STEP 7 Press Scan to scan for your headset.
NOTE Depending on the network environment (such as the number of Bluetooth devices
and noise level), your Bluetooth headset might not appear on the found devices list.
Ensure the headset is powered on and has Bluetooth activated, and retry the scan.
STEP 8 In the list of found devices, select your headset and press Select to edit the
profile.
STEP 9 Scroll to PIN and enter the PIN for your Bluetooth headset.
STEP 10 Scroll to Connect Automatically and press the Right Arrow key to turn to On.
STEP 11 Press Connect. The profile screen displays and a check mark appears next to the
headset if the connection was successful.
Pairing Your Cisco SPA525G2 with a Bluetooth-Enabled
Mobile Phone
This feature is based on the following standard Bluetooth profiles:
• Phone Book Access Profile 1.0
• Handsfree Profile 1.5
• Handset Profile 1.1
Make sure your mobile phone provides support for one of the above profiles.
Cisco provides a reference list of Bluetooth-enabled mobile phones supported
with the Cisco SPA525G2. See the Cisco support community at
http://www.cisco.com/go/smallbizsupport and consult the latest
Cisco SPA525G2 release notes, available at cisco.com.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 79
3
For more detailed instructions, see the
Cisco Small Business Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 IP Phone User Guides
.
To pair your Cisco SPA525G2 with your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, you can
either initiate pairing from the Cisco SPA525G2, or from your mobile phone.
Initiating Pairing from the Cisco SPA525G2
STEP 1 Enable Bluetooth as described in Enabling Bluetooth from the Web Interface.
STEP 2 Press the Setup button.
STEP 3 Scroll to User Preferences and press Select.
STEP 4 Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select.
STEP 5 Scroll to Bluetooth Mode and press the Right Arrow key to choose one of the
following:
• Handsfree—Your Cisco SPA525G2 operates as a handsfree device with a
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone.
• Both—Your Cisco SPA525G2 operates with your Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone or operate with a Bluetooth headset. The Cisco SPA525G2 connects
to only one device at a time (either the Bluetooth headset or the Bluetooth-
enabled mobile phone.)
If multiple Bluetooth devices are in range of the Cisco SPA525G2, the order
of devices in the Bluetooth Configuration > Bluetooth Profiles list is used,
and the device with a higher priority is activated first.
STEP 6 Scroll to Bluetooth Profiles and press the Right Arrow key to enter the profile
screen.
STEP 7 Press Scan to scan for your mobile phone.
Depending on the network environment (such as the number of Bluetooth devices
and the noise level), your Bluetooth headset might not appear on the found
devices list. Ensure the headset is powered on and has Bluetooth activated, and
retry the Scan.
STEP 8 In the Select a Bluetooth Device to Pair list, select the mobile phone to which you
want to pair and press Connect.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 80
3
Initiating Pairing from Your Bluetooth-Enabled Mobile Phone
The procedure varies depending on your phone model. The example in this
section uses an Apple iPhone.
Before starting, it is helpful to find the MAC address of your Cisco SPA525G2 IP
phone. From your IP phone, go to the Setup menu and select Status. Select
Product Information. The MAC address is displayed.
STEP 1 On your iPhone, click Settings.
STEP 2 Under General, choose Bluetooth. Ensure Bluetooth is turned on.
STEP 3 In the Bluetooth Window, under Devices, find the MAC address of your
Cisco SPA525G2 IP phone.
STEP 4 Select the MAC address of the Cisco SPA525G2.
STEP 5 Enter the PIN (the default is 0000) and press Connect.
When paired with your mobile phone, the Cisco SPA525G2 IP phone screen
assigns one of your line buttons to the mobile phone. A mobile phone icon with a
flashing lightning bolt icon is displayed next to the mobile phone number.
To verify the mobile phone configuration:
STEP 1 On the Cisco SPA525G2, press the Setup Button.
STEP 2 Scroll to User Preferences and press Select.
STEP 3 Scroll to Bluetooth Configuration and press Select.
STEP 4 Scroll to Bluetooth Profiles and press the Right Arrow key.
The mobile phone appears in the list of Bluetooth devices.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling SMS Messaging
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 81
3
Enabling SMS Messaging
The Cisco SPA IP phones can receive and display text messages by using SIP
(RFC-3428). Cisco WIP310 users can send
and
receive text messages.
When this feature is enabled, the IP phone screen displays messages up to 255
characters in length. The message appears on the IP phone screen along with the
date and time.
Service providers could use text messages to:
• Send billing information, calling minutes consumed, minutes available.
• Include additional text with a call to facilitate call processing.
Cisco SPA303 and Cisco SPA5XXG
To enable text message receipt on the Cisco SPA303 or Cisco SPA500 Series
phones:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Supplementary Services in the Te x t M e s s a g e field, choose yes to enable.
STEP 3 (Optional) To enable receipt of text messages from a third party directly without
proxy involvement, in the Text Message from 3rd Party field, choose yes to enable.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
To enable text messaging on Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 phones:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Supplementary Services in the Display Text Message on Recv field, choose
yes to enable.
STEP 3 (Optional) To enable receipt of text messages from a third party directly without
proxy involvement, in the Text Message from 3rd Party field, choose yes to enable.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Enabling and Configuring the Phone Web Server
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 82
3
Cisco WIP310
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Phone.
STEP 2 Under SMS Enable, choose yes to enable.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Enabling and Configuring the Phone Web Server
The web server allows administrators and users to log in to the phone by using a
phone web user interface. Administrators and users have different privileges and
see different options for the phone based on their role.
Configure the Web Server from the Phone Web Interface
To enable the web server:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > System.
STEP 2 Under the System Configuration section in the Enable Web Server field, verify
that the parameter is set to yes to enable the web administration server. (For the
Cisco 301 and Cisco SPA501G, this can be configured by using the IVR. See the
“Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens” section on page 26.)
STEP 3 In the Web Server Port field, enter the port to access the web server. The default is
port 80.
STEP 4 In the Enable Web Admin Access field, you can enable or disable local access to
the Admin Login of the phone web user interface. Defaults to yes (enabled). (For
the Cisco SPA301 and Cisco SPA501G, can be configured using the IVR. See the
“Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens” section on page 26.)
STEP 5 In the Admin Passwd field, enter a password if you want the system administrator
to log in to the phone web user interface with a password. The password prompt
appears when an administrator clicks Admin Login. The maximum password
length is 32 characters.
STEP 6 In the User Password field, enter a password if you want users to log in to the
phone web user interface with a password. The password prompt appears when
users click User Login. The maximum password length is 32 characters
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 83
3
STEP 7 Click Submit All Changes.
Configure the Web Server from the Phone Screen Interface
To enable the phone web user interface from the Phone tab (does not apply to the
Cisco WIP310):
STEP 1 Press menu.
STEP 2 Select Network and Enable Web Server.
STEP 3 Select the Edit.
STEP 4 Press y/n to toggle the selection to Yes and enable.
STEP 5 Click OK > Save.
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones support
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) v3. LDAP Corporate Directory
Search allows a user to search a specified LDAP directory for a name, phone
number, or both. LDAP-based directories, such as Microsoft Active Directory 2003
and OpenLDAP-based databases, are supported. (LDAP is not supported on the
Cisco WIP310.)
Users access LDAP from the Directory menu on their IP phone. There is a limit of
20 records returned from a LDAP search.
The instructions in this section assume you have the following equipment and
services:
• A LDAP server, such as OpenLDAP or Microsoft Active Directory Server
2003
• A Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500 Series IP phone running firmware
version 6.1.3a or higher
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 84
3
To prepare the LDAP Corporate Directory Search:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > System.
STEP 2 In the Optional Network Configuration section, under Primary DNS, enter the IP
address of the DNS server. (Only required if using Active Directory with
authentication set to MD5.)
STEP 3 In the Optional Network Configuration section, under Domain, enter the LDAP
domain. (Only required if using Active Directory with authentication set to MD5.)
Some sites might not deploy DNS internally and instead use Active Directory
2003. In this case, it is not necessary to enter a Primary DNS address and an LDAP
Domain. However, with Active Directory 2003, the authentication method is
restricted to Simple.
STEP 4 Click the Phone tab.
STEP 5 Under LDAP, in the LDAP Dir Enable field, choose yes to enable LDAP and cause
the name defined in LDAP Corp Dir Name to appear in the phone directory.
STEP 6 Configure values for the fields in the following table and click Submit All Changes.
Parameter
Description
LDAP Corp Dir Name Enter a free-form text name, such as Corporate
Directory.
LDAP Server Enter a fully qualified domain name or IP address of
LDAP server, in the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
Enter the host name of the LDAP server if the MD5
authentication method is used.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 85
3
LDAP Auth Method Select the authentication method that the LDAP
server requires:
None—No authentication is used between the client
and the server.
Simple—The client sends its fully-qualified domain
name and password to the LDAP server. Might create
security issues.
Digest-MD5—The LDAP server sends authentication
options and a token to the client. The client returns an
encrypted response that is decrypted and verified
by the server.
LDAP Client DN Enter the distinguished name domain components
[dc] ; for example: dc=cv2bu,dc=com
If using the default Active Directory schema
(Name(cn)->Users->Domain), example of the client
DN:
cn="David Lee",dc=users,dc=cv2bu,dc=com
LDAP Username Enter the username for a credentialed user on the
LDAP server.
LDAP Password Enter the password for the LDAP username.
LDAP Search Base Specify a starting point in the directory tree from
which to search. Separate domain components [dc]
with a comma. For example: dc=cv2bu,dc=com
LDAP Last Name Filter Define the search for surnames [sn], known as last
name in some parts of the world. For example,
sn:(sn=*$VALUE*). This searches for the text
string anywhere in the beginning, middle, or at the
end of a name.
You must enter a value in both the last name and first
name fields so that the LDAP corporate directory
option displays on the phone. If both fields are empty,
the directory does not display.
Parameter
Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 86
3
LDAP First Name Filter Define the search for the common name [cn]. For
example, cn:(cn=*$VALUE*). This searches for
the text string anywhere in the beginning, middle, or
at the end of a name.
You must enter a value in both the last name and first
name fields so that the LDAP corporate directory
option displays on the phone. If both fields are empty,
the directory does not display.
LDAP Search Item 3 Enter a customized search item. Can be blank if not
needed.
LDAP Item 3 Filter Enter a customized filter for the searched item. Can
be blank if not needed.
LDAP Search Item 4 Enter a customized search item. Can be blank if not
needed.
LDAP Item 4 Filter Enter a customized filter for the searched item. Can
be blank if not needed.
Parameter
Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 87
3
For more information on LDAP, including troubleshooting information, see the
Configuring LDAP Directory Search on SPA SIP IP Phones
Application Note,
available from http://www.cisco.com/web/partners/sell/smb/products/
voice_and_conferencing.html#~vc_technical_resources
(partner log on required).
LDAP Display Attrs Enter the format of LDAP results display on phone where:
• a—Attribute name
• cn—Common name
• sn—Surname (last name)
• telephoneNumber—Phone number
•n—Display name
For example,
n=Phone causes Phone: to be displayed
in front of the phone number of an LDAP query result when
the detail soft button is pressed.
t—type
When
t=p, t is of type phone number and the retrieved
number can be dialed. Only one number can be made
dialable. If two numbers are defined as dialable, only the
first number is used. For example,
a=ipPhone, t=p;
a=mobile, t=p;
This example results in only the ipPhone number being
dialable and the mobile number is ignored.
• p—phone number
When p is assigned to a type attribute, example
t=p, the
the retrieved number is dialable.
LDAP Number Mapping
With the LDAP number mapping you can manipulate
the number that was retrieved from the LDAP server.
For example, you can append
9 to the number if your
dial plan requires a user to enter 9 before dialing.
Add the 9 prefix by adding (<:9>xx.>) to the LDAP
Number Mapping field. For example, 555 1212 will
become 9555 1212.
Can be blank if not needed.
If you do not manipulate the number in this fashion, a user
can use the Edit Dial feature to edit the number before
dialing out.
Parameter
Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring BroadSoft Settings (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 88
3
Configuring BroadSoft Settings (Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series)
Configuring BroadSoft Directory
The BroadSoft directory service enables users to search and view their personal,
group, or enterprise contacts. This application feature uses BroadSoft's Extended
Services Interface (XSI).
To configure the BroadSoft Directory service:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Under Broadsoft Settings, configure the following:
• Directory Enable: Set to yes.
• XSI Host Server: Enter the name of the server; for example,
xsp.xdp.broadsoft.com.
• Directory Name: Name of the directory. Displays on the user phone as a
directory choice (for example, John’s Personal Directory).
• Directory Type: Select the type of BroadSoft directory:
- Enterprise (default): Allows users to search on last name, first name, user
or group ID, phone number, extension, department, or email address.
- Group: Allows users to search on last name, first name, user ID, phone
number, extension, department, or email address.
- Personal: Allows users to search on last name, first name, or telephone
number.
• Directory UserID: BroadSoft User ID of the phone user; for example,
johndoe@xdp.broadsoft.com.
• Directory Password: Alphanumeric password associated with the User ID.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring BroadSoft Settings (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 89
3
To improve security, the SPA phone firmware places access restrictions on the
host server and directory name entry fields.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring Synchronization of Do Not Disturb and Call
Forward on a Per Line Basis (Applicable to Broadsoft)
Enabling synchronization of Do Not Disturb (DND) and Call Forward (CFWD) allows
the phone to synchronize with the call server (for example, the BroadSoft server)
so that if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding settings are changed on the phone,
changes are also made on the server; if changes are made on the server, they are
propagated to the phone. You can enable DND/CFWD per extension.
This feature is disabled by default.
Limitations:
• Cisco SPA301 or Cisco SPA501G—The softkey and phone menu settings
are not available.
• Cisco SPA509—Lines 9–12 cannot be set by using the SoftKeys or Menu
settings.
Configuring Synchronization of DND and CEWD
To enable synchronization:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice.
STEP 2 Click the Ext n tab.
Field Access Restriction
Dir. Name Admin password required (if set)
Host Server Admin password required (if set)
Type None
User ID None
Password None
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring BroadSoft Settings (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 90
3
STEP 3 Under Call Feature Settings in the Device Feature Sync field, choose yes to
enable DND/CFWD.
STEP 4 Under SIP, enable the relevant event package (Talk Package, Hold Package, and
Conference Package).
STEP 5 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring Synchronization of DND and CEWD by Using the
Configuration File
You can also configure broadsoft DND and CFWD on a per line basis by modifying
your configuration. For example, to configure this feature on line 1, add the
following line to the configuration file:
<Device_Feature_Sync_1_ ua="na">Yes</Device_Feature_Sync_1_>
Configuring Broadsoft ACD Support
To support basic Broadsoft Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), enable the relevant
Broadsoft ACD option. This option is available for each extension under Call
Feature Settings.
The supported values for this option are Yes and No (default).
If you set Broadsoft ACD to Yes, the phone sends a Subscribe message
according to the Broadsoft specification.
If you set Broadsoft ACD to No, the phone may still send out a Subscribe
message because another feature is using ACD, but the phone ignores any Notify
message from the Broadsoft server related to ACD.
Limitations:
• Cisco SPA301 or Cisco SPA501G—ACD is not supported. The ACD Login
and Status keys are not visible.
• Cisco SPA509—Lines 9–12 cannot be used as ACD Agents since the Lines
cannot be selected for Login/Logout and Agent status.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring XML Services
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 91
3
Configuring Broadsoft ACD Support
To enable broadsoft ACD support, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
Ext n. Under Call Feature Settings, in the Broadsoft ACD list, choose yes to
enable broadsoft ACD support.
You can also configure broadsoft ACD support by adding the following line to your
configuration file to configure this feature on line 1:
<Broadsoft_ACD_1_ ua="na">Yes</Broadsoft_ACD_1_>
Configuring XML Services
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones provide support
for XML services, such as an XML Directory Service or other XML applications.
The following table shows some Cisco XML objects that are supported:
Cisco XML Object Supported Phone
CiscoIPPhoneMenu Cisco SPA5XXG, Cisco SPA30X,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
CiscoIPPhoneText
CiscoIPPhoneInput
CiscoIPPhoneDirectory
CiscoIPPhoneIconMenu
CiscoIPPhoneStatus
CiscoIPPhoneExecute
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring XML Services
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 92
3
You can use macro variables in XML URLs. The following macro variables are
supported:
• User ID—UID1, UID2
• Display name—DISPLAYNAME1, DISPLAYNAME2
• Auth ID—AUTHID1, AUTHID2
• Proxy—PROXY1, PROXY2
• MAC Address—MA
• Product Name—PN
• Product Series Number—PSN
• Serial Number—SERIAL_NUMBER
For more information on XML support, see the Cisco Small Business Support
community. The URL is given in Appendix B, “Where to Go From Here.”
CiscoIPPhoneImage Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
CiscoIPPhoneImageFile
CiscoIPPhoneGraphicMenu
CiscoIPPhoneFileMenu
CiscoIPPhoneStatusFile
CiscoIPPhoneResponse
CiscoIPPhoneErrror
CiscoIPPhoneGraphicFileMenu
Init:CallHistory Cisco SPA5XXG
Key:Headset
EditDial:n
Cisco XML Object Supported Phone
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring XML Services
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 93
3
To configure the phone to connect to an XML Directory service:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Enter the following information:
• XML Directory Service Name: Name of the XML Directory. Displays on the
user phone as a directory choice.
• XML Directory Service URL: URL where the XML Directory is located.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
To configure the phone to connect to an XML application:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Enter the following information:
• XML Application Service Name: Name of the XML application. Displays on
the user phone as a menu item.
• XML Application Service URL: URL where the XML application is located.
If you have configured an unused line button to connect to an XML application, the
button connects to the URL configured here, unless you enter a different URL when
configuring the line button. See the “Configuring Unused Line Keys to Access
Services” section on page 41.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Music On Hold
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 94
3
Configuring Music On Hold
Your phone can play music on hold if it is part of a system that has a music-on-hold
(MOH) server. To configure music on hold:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Ext_n.
STEP 2 Under Call Feature Settings in the MOH Server field, enter the user ID or the URL of
the MOH streaming audio server. If you enter a user ID (no server), the current or
outbound proxy is contacted. Defaults to blank (no MOH). If used with a
Cisco SPA9000, it defaults to
imusic
. For more information, see the
Cisco SPA9000 Administration Guide.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring Extension Mobility
Extension mobility allows mobile users to access their personalized phone
settings, such as the personal extensions, shared lines, and speed dials, from
other phones. For example, people who work different shifts or who work at
different desks during the week can share an extension, yet have their own
personalized settings. EM is supported for BroadSoft and other servers. EM
dynamically configures a phone according to the current user.
A Login prompt appears on the IP phone screen when EM is enabled on a phone
(for example, a conference room phone). A user can either enter their User ID and
Password to access their personal phone settings, or ignore the login and use the
phone as a guest. After logging on, users have access to personal directory
numbers, services, speed dials, and other properties on the phone. When a user
logs out, the phone reverts to a basic profile with limited features enabled.
This feature is not available on the Cisco WIP310.
To configure extension mobility:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone.
STEP 2 Under Extension Mobility, in the EM Enable field, choose yes to enable.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Video Surveillance (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 95
3
STEP 3 In the EM User Domain field, enter the domain for the phone, or the authentication
server. For example, @domain.com, which is appended to the user ID
(userID@domain.com) for authentication to the HTTP server.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes. The phone reboots.
You must also configure the Extension Mobility parameters in the profile rule field
in the Provisioning tab. See the Provisioning Parameters for Extension Mobility on
Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones application note at:
https://www.myciscocommunity.com/docs/DOC-11277
For more information on extension mobility and BroadSoft, see
http://www.broadsoft.com.
Configuring Video Surveillance (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2)
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 provides a simple video surveillance
solution for a small business office. It works with the Cisco WVC2300 Wireless-G
Business Internet Video Camera and the Cisco PVC2300 Business Internet Video
Camera to provide simple video monitoring from your IP phone of a location such
as a lobby entrance or doorway. Up to four cameras can be monitored from one IP
phone.
Camera audio is not supported.
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 connects to the videocamera and
provides a real-time video stream display from the camera. Storage and
manipulation of video and physical camera control are not available from the IP
phone.
The IP phone supports the camera display at a rate of two to three frames per
second with good video quality. However, video quality can degrade if the camera
is processing multiple streaming sessions, there is heavy Wi-Fi network traffic, or
the IP phone is performing other processing. To avoid degrading voice audio
quality on a call, the frame rate decreases to one frame per second if a codec
other than G.711 is used for a call or when the user accesses the video monitoring
page during a call.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Video Surveillance (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 96
3
Configuring the User Name and Account on the Camera
To configure the username and account:
STEP 1 Download and install the software release for the camera that provides video
monitoring support. For more information, consult the release notes for the camera
software.
STEP 2 Use the phone web user interface to create a user ID and password that are used
by the phone to connect to the camera. The IP phone user account that you create
should have viewer privileges.
Entering Camera Information Into the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 Configuration Utility
To add camera information:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > User.
STEP 2 Under Camera Settings in the Enable Video VLAN field, choose yes to enable.
This option sends the camera traffic to a separate VLAN.
STEP 3 (Optional) If configuring Virtual LAN (VLAN) support, in the Enable Video VLAN
field, choose yes to enable. The default Video VLAN ID is 1, the data VLAN. To
separate traffic onto another VLAN (for example, a VLAN for video traffic only),
enter the ID for that VLAN. (Video VLAN parameters do not apply to Wi-Fi or VPN.)
STEP 4 Under Camera Profile 1, enter the settings for the first camera. Enter the camera
name (for example, Lobby). This name is displayed on the IP phone screen to
identify the camera.
STEP 5 In the Access URL field, enter the URL to access the camera, in the following
format:
rtsp://xxx.xxx.x.xxx/img/jpgvideo.sav
where xxx.xxx.x.xxx is the IP address of the camera.
STEP 6 In the Access User Name field, enter the username for the phone that you created
by using the camera phone web user interface.
STEP 7 In the Access Password field, enter the password for the phone username that
you created by using the camera phone web user interface.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customizing Standard Features
Configuring Video Surveillance (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 97
3
STEP 8 (Optional) In the Associated Caller ID field, enter the phone number of the phone
associated with the camera. For example, if the camera is located in the lobby, you
can enter the extension of the lobby phone if one is installed there. People
monitoring that camera from their phone can press Call to dial the number of the
phone associated with the camera. For example, someone monitoring the lobby
could call the receptionist to identify a visitor.
STEP 9 Repeat STEP 3 through STEP 7 for each camera.
STEP 10 Click Submit All Changes.
Viewing the Video
To view video from the phone:
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Scroll to Video Monitoring and press Select.
STEP 3 Scroll to the camera from which you want to view and press Monitor or Select.
Pressing Call dials the number associated with the camera (see Entering Camera
Information Into the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Configuration
Utility).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
4
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 98
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
The Cisco SPA IP phones use the following protocols:
• Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)—Cisco SPA300 Series, Cisco SPA500
Series, Cisco WIP310
• Cisco Smart Phone Control Protocol (SPCP)—Cisco SPA300 Series,
Cisco SPA500 Series
This chapter describes how to configure the phone protocols:
• SIP and Cisco IP Phones
• Configuring SIP
• Configuring the IP Phone Communications Protocol
• Configuring the Protocol on a Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500
Series IP Phone
• Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones
SIP and Cisco IP Phones
Cisco IP phones use Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), allowing interoperation with
all IT service providers supporting SIP.
SIP handles signaling and session management within a packet telephony
network.
Signaling
allows call information to be carried across network
boundaries.
Session management
controls the attributes of an end-to-end call.
The diagram shows a SIP request for connection to another subscriber in the
network.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
SIP and Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 99
4
In typical commercial IP telephony deployments, all calls go through a SIP proxy
server. The requesting phone is called the SIP user agent server (UAS), while the
receiving phone is called the user agent client (UAC).
SIP message routing is dynamic. If a SIP proxy receives a request from a UAS for a
connection but cannot locate the UAC, the proxy forwards the message to another
SIP proxy in the network. When the UAC is located, the response is routed back to
the UAS, and a direct peer-to-peer session is established between the two UAs.
Voice traffic is transmitted between UAs over dynamically-assigned ports using
Real-time Protocol (RTP).
RTP transmits real-time data such as audio and video; it does not guarantee real-
time delivery of data. RTP provides mechanisms for the sending and receiving
applications to support streaming data. Typically, RTP runs on top of UDP. See NAT
Mapping with STUN.
SIP UA
SIP UA
SIP Proxy
SIP Proxy
RTP
1
2
3
4
SIP Proxy
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
SIP and Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 100
4
SIP Over TCP
To guarantee state-oriented communications, Cisco IP phones can use TCP as the
transport protocol for SIP. This protocol provides guaranteed delivery that assures
that lost packets are retransmitted. TCP also guarantees that the SIP packages are
received in the same order that they were sent.
TCP overcomes the problem UDP ports have of being blocked by corporate
firewalls. With TCP, new ports do not need to be opened or packets dropped,
because TCP is already in use for basic activities, such as Internet browsing or
e-commerce.
SIP Proxy Redundancy
An average SIP proxy server can handle tens of thousands of subscribers. A
backup server allows an active server to be temporarily switched out for
maintenance. Cisco phones support the use of backup SIP proxy servers to
minimize or eliminate service disruption.
A static list of proxy servers is not always adequate. If your user agents are served
by different domains, for example, you would not want to configure a static list of
proxy servers for each domain into every Cisco IP phone.
A simple way to support proxy redundancy is to configure a SIP proxy server in
the Cisco IP phone configuration profile. The DNS SRV records instruct the phones
to contact a SIP proxy server in a domain named in SIP messages. The phone
consults the DNS server. If configured, the DNS server returns an SRV record that
contains a list of SIP proxy servers for the domain, with their host names, priority,
listening ports, and so forth. The Cisco IP phone tries to contact the hosts in the
order of their priority.
If the Cisco IP phone currently uses a lower-priority proxy server, the phone
periodically probes the higher-priority proxy and switches to the higher-priority
proxy when available.
Configuring Survivable Remote Site Telephony (SRST) Support
The
proxy
and
outbound proxy
fields in the Ext tab can be configured with an
extension that includes a statically-configured DNS SRV record or DNS A record.
This allows for failover and fallback functionality with a secondary proxy server.
The format for the parameter value is:
FQDN format: hostname[:port][:SRV=host-list OR :A=ip-list]
host-list: srv[|srv[|srv…]]
srv: hostname[:port][:p=priority][:weight][:A=ip-list]
ip-list: ip-addr[,ip-addr[,ip-addr…]]
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
SIP and Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 101
4
The default priority is 0 and default weight is 1. The default port is 0, and the
application substitutes the proper port value (for example, port 5060 for SIP).
RFC3311 Support
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 support RFC-3311, the SIP UPDATE
Method.
Support for SIP NOTIFY XML-Service
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones support the SIP
NOTIFY XML-Service event. On receipt of a SIP NOTIFY message with an XML-
Service event, the IP phone challenges the NOTIFY with a 401 response if the
message does not contain correct credentials. The client must be furnish the
correct credentials using MD5 digest with the SIP account password for the
corresponding line of the IP phone.
The body of the message can contain the XML event Message. For example:
<CiscoIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem Priority="0" URL="http://xmlserver.com/event.xml"/>
</CiscoIPPhoneExecute>
Authentication:
challenge = MD5( MD5(A1) ":" nonce ":" nc-value ":" cnonce ":" qop-value
":" MD5(A2) )
where A1 = username ":" realm ":" passwd
and A2 = Method ":" digest-uri
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 102
4
Configuring SIP
SIP settings for the Cisco SPA IP phones are configured for the phone in general
and for individual extensions.
Configuring Basic SIP Parameters
To configure general SIP parameters, navigate to Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > SIP. Under SIP Parameters, make these changes:
Parameter Description
Max Forward The number of proxies or gateways that can forward the
request to the next downstream server. The Max-Forwards
value is an integer in the range of 0 to 255 indicating the
remaining number of times the request message is allowed
to be forwarded. This count is decremented by each server
that forwards the request. The initial value is 70.
Max Redirection Number of times an invite can be redirected to avoid an
infinite loop. The default is 5.
Max Auth Maximum number of times (from 0 to 255) a request might
be challenged. The default is 2.
SIP User Agent
Name
User-Agent header used in outbound requests. The default
is $VERSION. If empty, the header is not included. Macro
expansion of $A to $D corresponding to GPP_A to GPP_D
allowed.
SIP Server Name Server header used in responses to inbound responses.
The default is $VERSION.
SIP Reg User
Agent Name
User-Agent name used in a REGISTER request. If not
specified, the SIP User Agent Name is used for the
REGISTER request.
SIP Accept
Language
The preferred languages for reason phrases, session
descriptions, or status responses carried as message
bodies in the response. If blank, the header is not included
and the server assumes that all languages are acceptable to
the client. Defaults to blank.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 103
4
DTMF Relay
MIME Type
MIME Type used in a SIP INFO message to signal a DTMF
event. This parameter must match that of the service
provider.
Defaults to application/dtmf-relay.
Hook Flash MIME
Type
MIME Type used in a SIPINFO message to signal a hook
flash event.
Remove Last
Reg
If set to yes, removes the previous registration before
re-registering (if the value is different). Defaults to no.
Use Compact
Header
If set to yes, the Cisco IP phone uses compact SIP headers
in outbound SIP messages. If inbound SIP requests contain
normal (non-compact) headers, the phone substitutes
incoming headers with compact headers.
If set to no, Cisco SPA IP phones use normal SIP headers. If
inbound SIP requests contain compact headers, the phones
reuse the same compact headers when generating the
response, regardless of this setting. Defaults to no.
Escape Display
Name
If set to yes, encloses the configured Display Name string in
a pair of double quotes for outbound SIP messages. Any
occurrences of or \ in the string is escaped with \ and \\
inside the pair of double quotes. Defaults to yes.
SIP-B Enable If set to yes, enables SIP for Business (supports Sylantro call
flows) call features. See www.broadsoft.com for more
information. Defaults to no.
Talk Package If set to yes, enables support for the BroadSoft Talk Package
that lets users answer or resume a call by clicking a button
in an external application. Defaults to no.
Hold Package If set to yes, enables support for the BroadSoft Hold
Package, which lets users place a call on hold by clicking a
button in an external application. Defaults to no.
Conference
Package
If set to yes, enables support for the BroadSoft Conference
Package that enables users to start a conference call by
clicking a button in an external application. Defaults to no.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 104
4
Notify
Conference
If set to yes, Cisco SPA IP phones send out a NOTIFY with
event=conference when starting a conference call (with the
BroadSoft Conference Package). Defaults to no.
RFC 2543 Call
Hold
If set to yes, Cisco SPA IP phones include Session
Description Protocol (SDP) syntax c=0.0.0.0 when sending a
SIP re-INVITE to a peer to hold the call. If set to no,
Cisco SPA IP phones do not include the c=0.0.0.0 syntax in
the SDP. With either setting, the phone includes a=sendonly
syntax in the SDP. Defaults to yes.
Random REG
CID On Reboot
If set to yes, Cisco SPA IP phones use a different random
call-ID for registration after the next software reboot. If set to
no, the phone tries to use the same call-ID for registration
after the next software reboot. With either setting the phone
uses a new random call-ID for registration after a power-
cycle. Defaults to no. Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Mark All AVT
packets
If set to yes, all audio video transport (AVT) tone packets
(encoded for redundancy) have the marker bit set. If set to
no, only the first packet has the marker bit set for each DTMF
event.
Defaults to yes.
SIP TCP Port Min Lowest TCP port number that can be used for SIP sessions.
Defaults to 5060.
SIP TCP Port
Max
Highest TCP port number that can be used for SIP sessions.
Defaults to 5080.
Keep Referee
When REFER
Failed
When set to yes, the phone immediately handles NOTIFY
sipfrag messages.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 105
4
CTI Enable If set to yes, enables the computer telephony integration
(CTI), where a computer can act as a call center handling all
sorts of incoming and outgoing communications., including
phone calls, faxes, and text messages. The CTI interface
allows a third-party application to control and monitor the
state of a Cisco IP phone and, for example, initiate or answer
a call by clicking a mouse on a PC,
CTI must be enabled on the Cisco SPA300 Series or
Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones for an attached
Cisco Attendant Console to properly monitor the IP phone
line status. If setting up a Cisco Attendant Console, see
Configuring the Cisco Attendant Console.
Defaults to no.
Caller ID Header Select from where the IP phone gets the caller ID:
PAI D- RPID -FR OM
P-ASSERTED-IDENTITY
REMOTE-PARTY-ID
FROM header
Defaults to PAID-RPID-FROM.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
SRTP Method The method to use for Secure Real-time Transport Protocol
(SRTP):
x-sipura—legacy SRPT method
s-descriptor—compliant with RFC-3711 and RFC-4568
The default value is x-sipura.
Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 106
4
Configuring SIP Timer Values
All SIP timer values are in seconds. To configure SIP timer values, navigate to
Admin Login > advanced > Voice > SIP. Under SIP Timer Values (sec), make these
changes:
Hold Target
Before REFER
Controls whether to hold call leg with transfer target before
sending REFER to the transferee when initiating a fully-
attended call transfer (where the transfer target has
answered). Default value is “no,” where the call leg is not
held.
Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.
Dialog SDP
Enable
When enabled and the Notify message body is too big
causing fragmentation, the Notify message xml dialog is
simplified; Session Description Protocol (SDP) is not
included in the dialog xml content.
Display
Diversion Info
Parses Diversion Header information in an incoming SIP
Invite and displays it as the Caller ID.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
SIP T1 RFC-3261 T1 value (RTT estimate). Ranges from 0 to 64
seconds. Defaults to .5 seconds.
SIP T2 RFC-3261 T2 value, the maximum retransmit interval for
non-INVITE requests and INVITE responses. Ranges from 0
to 64 seconds. Defaults to 4 seconds.
SIP T4 RFC-3261 T4 value, which is the maximum duration a
message remains in the network. Ranges from 0 to 64
seconds. Defaults to 5 seconds.
SIP Timer B RFC-3261 INVITE transaction time-out value. Ranges from 0
to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16 seconds.
SIP Timer F RFC-3261 Non-INVITE transaction time-out value. Ranges
from 0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16 seconds.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 107
4
SIP Timer H RFC-3261 INVITE final response time-out value for ACK
receipt. Ranges from 0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16
seconds.
SIP Timer D RFC-3261 wait time for response retransmits. Ranges from
0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16 seconds.
SIP Timer J RFC-3261 Wait time for Non-INVITE request retransmits.
Ranges from 0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16 seconds.
INVITE Expires The length of time the INVITE is valid. If you enter 0, the
Expires header is not included in the request. Ranges from
0 to 19999999999999999999999999999999. Defaults to
240 seconds.
ReINVITE Expires ReINVITE request Expires header value. If you enter 0, the
Expires header is not included in the request. Ranges from
0 to 19999999999999999999999999999999. Defaults to
30
Reg Min Expires Minimum registration expiration time allowed from the
proxy in the Expires header or as a Contact header
parameter. If the proxy returns a value less than this setting,
the smallest of the two values is used. Defaults to 1 second.
Reg Max Expires Maximum registration expiration time allowed from the
proxy in the Min-Expires header. If the value is greater than
this setting, the largest of the two values is used. Defaults to
7200 seconds.
Reg Retry Intvl
1
Interval to wait before the Cisco IP phone retries
registration after failing during the previous registration. The
range is from 1 to 268435455. Do not enter 0. Defaults to 30
seconds.
Reg Retry Long
Intvl1
When registration fails with a SIP response code that does
not match the Retry Reg response status code (RSC) value
(see next table), the IP phone waits for this length of time
before retrying.
If this interval is 0, the Cisco IP phone stops trying. This
value should be much larger than the Reg Retry Intvl value.
The range is from 0 to 268435455. Defaults to 1200
seconds.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 108
4
Reg Retry
Random Delay
Random delay added to the Register Retry Intvl value when
retrying REGISTER after a failure. Minimum and maximum
random delay to be added to the short timer. The range is
from 0 to 268435455. Defaults to 0, which disables this
feature.
Reg Retry Long
Random Delay
Random delay added to Register Retry Long Intvl value
when retrying REGISTER after a failure.
Minimum and maximum random delay to be added to the
long timer. Random delay range (in seconds) to add to the
Register Retry Long Intvl when retrying REGISTER after a
failure. Defaults to 0, which disables this feature.
Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.
Reg Retry Intvl
Cap
Reg_Retry_Intvl_Cap—Maximum value of the exponential
delay. The maximum value to cap the exponential backoff
retry delay (which starts at the Register Retry Intvl and
doubles every retry). Defaults to 0, which disables the
exponential backoff (that is, the error retry interval is always
at the Register Retry Intvl). When this feature is enabled, the
Reg Retry Random Delay is added to the exponential
backoff delay value. The range is from 0 to 268435455.
Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.
Sub Min Expires Lower limit of the REGISTER (subscribe) expires value
returned from the proxy server. The range is from 0 to
268435455. Defaults to 10 seconds.
Sub Max Expires Upper limit of the REGISTER (subscribe) min-expires value
returned from the proxy server in the Min-Expires header.
The range is from 0 to 268435455. Defaults to 7200
seconds.
Sub Retry Intvl The retry interval when the last Subscribe request fails. The
range is from 0 to 268435455. Defaults to 10 seconds.
1. Cisco IP phones can use a RETRY-AFTER value when it is received from a SIP proxy
server that is too busy to process a request (503 Service Unavailable message). If the
response message includes a RETRY-AFTER header, the phone waits for the specified
length of time before to REGISTER again. If a RETRY-AFTER header is not present, the
phone waits for the value specified in the Reg Retry Interval or the Reg Retry Long Interval.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 109
4
Configuring Response Status Code Handling
To configure response status code handling , under Response Status Code
Handling make these changes:
• SIT1 through SIT4 RSC
—
SIP response status code for the appropriate
Special Information Tone (SIT). If you set the SIT1 RSC to 404, when the
user makes a call and a failure code of 404 is returned, the SIT1 tone is
played. The Reorder or Busy tone is played by default for all unsuccessful
response status code for SIT 1 RSC through SIT 4 RSC. Defaults to blank.
• Try Backup RSC—SIP response code that retries a backup server for the
current request. Defaults to blank.
• Retry Reg RSC—Interval the device waits before re-trying registration after
a failed registration. Defaults to blank.
Configuring RTP Parameters
To configure Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP), navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > SIP. Under RTP Parameters, configure these fields:
• RTP Port Min—Minimum port number for RTP transmission and reception.
<RTP Port Min> and <RTP Port Max> defines a range that contains at least
10 even number ports (twice the number of lines); for example, 100–106.
Defaults to 16384.
• RTP Port Max—Maximum port number for RTP transmission and reception.
<RTP Port Min> and <RTP Port Max> should define a range that contains at
least 10 even number ports (twice the number of lines); for example, 100–
106. Defaults to 16482.
• RTP Packet Size—Packet size in seconds. The range is from 0.01 to 0.16.
Valid values must be a multiple of 0.01 seconds. Defaults to 0.030.
• Max RTP ICMP Err—Number of successive ICMP errors allowed when
transmitting RTP packets to the peer before the Cisco IP phone terminates
the call. If the value is set to 0 (the default), the Cisco IP phone ignores the
limit on ICMP errors, disabling the feature.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 110
4
• RTCP Tx Interval
—
Interval for sending out Real-Time Transport Control
Protocol (RTCP) sender reports on an active connection. During an active
connection, the Cisco SPA IP phones send out compound RTCP packets.
Each compound RTP packet, except the last one, contains a sender report
(SR) and a source description (SDES). The last RTCP packet contains an
additional BYE packet. Each SR, except the last one, contains one receiver
report (RR); the last SR carries no RR.
The SDES contains CNAME, NAME, and TOOL identifiers:
- CNAME—
User ID@Proxy
- NAME—
Display Name
(or
Anonymous
if user blocks caller ID)
- TOOL—Vendor/Hardware-platform-software-version (such as
Cisco SPA9000-5.2.2(SCb)).
The NTP timestamp used in the SR is a snapshot of the Cisco IP phone local
time, not the time reported by an NTP server.
If the Cisco IP phone receives a RR from a peer, it tries to compute the round
trip delay and show it as the
Call Round Trip Delay
value in the Info section
of the phone web user interface administration page. The range is from 0 to
255 seconds. Defaults to 0.
• No UDP Checksum—Select yes to enable the Cisco IP phone to calculate
the UDP header checksum for SIP messages. Since this adds to the
computation load, we recommend the default value, no (disabled).
• Symmetric RTP—Select yes to enable Symmetric RTP operation. When
enabled, it sends RTP packets to the source address and the port of the last
received valid inbound RTP packet. If disabled (or before the first RTP
packet arrives) it sends RTP to the destination as indicated in the inbound
SDP. Defaults to no.
• Stats in BYE—Select yes to send the P-RTP-Stat header in response to a
BYE message. The header contains the RTP statistics on the current call.
Defaults to no.
The format of the P-RTP-Stat header is:
P-RTP-State: PS=<packets sent>,OS=<octets
sent>,PR=<packets received>,OR=<octets
received>,PL=<packets lost>,JI=<jitter in ms>,LA=<delay
in ms>,DU=<call duration in s>,EN=<encoder>,DE=<decoder>
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 111
4
Configuring SDP Payload Types
Configured dynamic payloads are used for outbound calls only when the Cisco IP
phone presents a Session Description Protocol (SDP) offer. For inbound calls with
a SDP offer, the phone follows the caller’s assigned dynamic payload type.
Cisco IP phones use the configured codec names in outbound SDP. For incoming
SDP with standard payload types of 0-95, the Cisco IP phone ignores the codec
names. For dynamic payload types, the Cisco IP phone identifies the codec by the
configured codec names (comparison is case-sensitive).
To configure SDP payload types, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
SIP. Under SDP Payload Types, configure these parameters:
Parameter Description
AVT Dynamic Payload Any non-standard data. Both sender and receiver
must agree on a number. Ranges from 96 to 127.
Defaults to 101.
INFOREQ Dynamic Payload Codec number used in the SIP messaging for the
Dynamic Payload size mechanism. This number
should match the number configured in the
network/other party to enable the use of Dynamic
Payload. The best range is 96 to 27 for any
dynamic payload type. Defaults to blank.
G726r16 Dynamic Payload RTP Payload Type Number that indicates the
transmitted packet is using the G.726 codec.
Other codecs have preassigned payload
numbers that you do not have to be set, but G.726
does not.. Ranges from 96 to 127. Defaults to 98.
Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
G726r24 Dynamic Payload RTP Payload Type Number that indicates the
transmitted packet is using the G.726-24 codec.
Ranges from 96 to 127. Defaults to 97.
Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 112
4
G726r32 Dynamic Payload RTP Payload Type Number that indicates the
transmitted packet is using the G726r32 codec.
The range is from 0 to 268435455. Defaults to 2.
G726r40 Dynamic Payload RTP Payload Type Number that indicates the
transmitted packet is using the G.726-40 codec
Ranges from 96 to 27. Defaults to 96.
Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
G729b Dynamic Payload RTP Payload Type Number that indicates the
transmitted packet is using the G729b codec. The
range is from 0 to 268435455. Defaults to 99.
EncapRTP Dynamic
Payload
EncapRTP Dynamic Payload type. The range is
from 0 to 268435455.
Defaults to 112.
RTP-Start-Loopback
Dynamic
RTP-Start-Loopback Dynamic Payload.
Defaults to 113.
RTP-Start-Loopback
Codec
RTP-Start-Loopback codec. Select one of
following: G711u, G711a, G726-16, G726-24,
G726-32, G726-40, G729a, or G723. Defaults to
G711u.
AVT Codec Name AVT codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
telephone-event.
G711u Codec Name G.711u codec name used in SDP. Defaults to Pulse
Code Modulation mu-law (PCMU).
G711a Codec Name G.711a codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
Pulse Code Modulation A-Law (PCMA).
G726r16 Codec Name G.726-16 codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
G726-16.
Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 113
4
G726r24 Codec Name G.726-24 codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
G726-24.
Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
G726r32 Codec Name G.726-32 codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
G726-32.
G726r40 Codec Name G.726-40 codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
G726-40.
Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
G729a Codec Name G.729a codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
G729a.
G729b Codec Name G.729b codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
G729ab.
G723 Codec Name G.723 codec name used in SDP. Defaults to G723.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2.
EncapRTP Codec Name EncapRTP codec name used in SDP. Defaults to
encaprtp.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 114
4
Configuring SIP Settings for Extensions
To configure the network settings for SIP extensions, navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > Ext_n. Under Network Settings, configure the following fields:
To configure SIP settings, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Ext_n.
Under SIP Settings, configure the following fields:
Parameter Description
SIP ToS/DiffServ
Value
Time of service (ToS)/differentiated services (DiffServ) field
value in UDP IP packets carrying a SIP message. Defaults to
0x68.
SIP CoS Value [0-7] Class of service (CoS) value for SIP messages. Ranges from 0
to 7. Defaults to 3.
RTP ToS/DiffServ
Value
ToS/DiffServ field value in UDP IP packets carrying RTP data.
Defaults to 0xb8.
RTP CoS Value [0-7] CoS value for RTP data. Ranges from 0 to 7. Defaults to 6.
Network Jitter Level The jitter buffer size as it is adjusted by a device. Jitter buffer
size is adjusted dynamically. The minimum jitter buffer size is
30 milliseconds or (10 milliseconds plus the current RTP frame
size), whichever is larger, for all jitter level settings. However,
the starting jitter buffer size value is larger for higher jitter
levels. This setting controls the rate at which the jitter buffer
size is adjusted to reach the minimum milliseconds. Select: low
(30 ms), medium (40 ms), high (60 ms), very high (80 ms), or
extremely high (180 ms). Defaults to high.
Jitter Buffer
Adjustment
How the jitter buffer is adjusted. Select: up and down, up only,
down only, or disable. Defaults to up and down.
Parameter Description
SIP Transport Select from UDP, TCP or TLS. Defaults to UDP.
SIP Port Port number of the SIP message listening and
transmission port. Defaults to 5060.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 115
4
SIP 100REL Enable Support of 100REL SIP extension for reliable
transmission of provisional responses (18x) and use of
PRACK requests. Select yes to enable. Otherwise, select
no. Defaults to no.
EXT SIP Port The external SIP port number substituted for the actual
SIP port in all outgoing SIP messages. If 0 is specified, no
SIP port substitution is performed. Defaults to blank. The
range is from 0 to 65535.
Auth Resync-
Reboot
The Cisco IP phone authenticates the sender when it
receives a NOTIFY message with the following requests:
resync
reboot
report
restart
XML-service
Select yes to enable. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to
yes.
SIP Proxy-Require SIP proxy for each extension or behavior when an
extension sees this header from the user agent. If this
field is configured and the proxy does not support it, it
responds with the message, unsupported. Enter the
appropriate header in the field provided. For example,
com.nortel.networks.firewall.
SIP Remote-Party-
ID
The Remote-Party-ID header to use instead of the From
header. Select yes to enable. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
Referor Bye Delay Time when the Cisco IP phone sends BYE to terminate
stale call legs upon completion of call transfers. Multiple
delay settings (Referor, Refer Target, Referee, and Refer-
To Target). Enter the appropriate period of time in
seconds. Defaults to 4.
R e fe r-To Ta r g e t
Contact
Indicates the refer-to target. Select yes to send the SIP
Refer to the contact. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to no.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 116
4
Referee Bye Delay Delay time for the Referee Bye Delay. Enter the
appropriate period of time in seconds. Defaults to 0.
SIP Debug Option How SIP messages are received at or sent from the
proxy listen port to the log. Select:
• none—No logging.
• 1-line—Logs the start-line only for all messages.
• 1-line excl. OPT—Logs the start-line only for all
messages except OPTIONS requests/responses.
• 1-line excl. NTFY—Logs the start-line only for all
messages except NOTIFY requests/responses.
• 1-line excl. REG—Logs the start-line only for all
messages except REGISTER requests/responses.
• 1-line excl. OPT|NTFY|REG—Logs the start-line
only for all messages except OPTIONS, NOTIFY,
and REGISTER
requests/responses.
• full—Logs all SIP messages in full text.
• full excl. OPT—Logs all SIP messages in full text
except OPTIONS requests/responses.
• full excl. NTFY—Logs all SIP messages in full text
except NOTIFY requests/responses.
• full excl. REG—Logs all SIP messages in full text
except REGISTER requests/responses.
• full excl. OPT|NTFY|REG—Logs all SIP messages in
full text except for OPTIONS, NOTIFY, and
REGISTER requests/responses.
Defaults to none.
Refer Target Bye
Delay
Delay time for the Refer Target Bye Delay. Enter the
appropriate period of time in seconds. Defaults to 0.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 117
4
Sticky 183 When enabled, the IP telephony ignores further 180 SIP
responses after receiving the first 183 SIP response for
an outbound INVITE. To enable this feature, select yes.
Otherwise, select no. Defaults to no.
Auth INVITE When enabled, authorization is required for initial
incoming INVITE requests from the SIP proxy. To enable
this feature, select yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to
no.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Ntfy Refer On 1xx-
To - I n v
When enabled as a transferee, the phone sends a
NOTIFY with Event:Refer to the transferor for any 1xx
response returned by the transfer target, on the transfer
call leg. To enable this feature, select yes.
If set to no, the phone only sends a NOTIFY for final
responses (200 and higher).
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Use Anonymous
with RPID
When enabled and the caller blocks his caller-id, the
FROM header display-name and user-id fields are set to
anonymous. This parameter applies only if <SIP Remote-
Party-ID> is set to yes; otherwise, it is ignored.
When disabled, the FROM header display-name and
user-id are not masked. The Remote-Party-ID header
indicates privacy=full when the caller tries to block his
caller-id.
To enable this feature, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 118
4
Set G729 annexb G.729 Annex B (G.729b) that provides silence
compression by enabling a voice activity detection (VAD)
module. It uses 2-byte Silence Insertion Descriptor (SID)
frames transmitted to initiate comfort noise generation
(CNG). If transmission is stopped and the link goes quiet
because of there is no speech transmitted, the receiving
side might assume that the link has been cut. By inserting
comfort noise, analog hiss is simulated digitally during
the silence to assure the receiver that the link is active
and operational.
none—do not enable.
no—turn on but do not silence the VAD.
yes—enable.
Not applicable to the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 119
4
Voice Quality Report
Address
The name of the collector that collects the statistics from
SIP PUBLISH events. For example, collector@
fully-
qualified-domain-name
(collector@reports.cisco.com) or
collector
@
IP
-
address
(collector@192.168.5.1). The SIP
event package, SIP PUBLISH, enables the collection and
reporting of metrics that measure the quality for VoIP
sessions. Voice call quality information derived from
RTCP-XR and call information from SIP is conveyed from
a User Agent in a session to the third party in SIP
PUBLISH method.
RTCP-XR must be configured first (see Configuring RTP
Parameters). After RTCP-XR is enabled, the call status
information is updated on the Voice > Info page during an
active call. Additionally, RTCP-XR packets containing a
voice metrics block report are sent with the interval
specified in the RTCP Tx Interval. When the call session is
ended, a SIP PUBLISH with voice metrics info is sent to
the collector endpoint.
This parameter supports a full SIP URI. Examples of valid
addresses:
• collector@domain.com
• 123.collect@123.123.123.123:5555
• 5678@domain.com:5656
For example if extension 1 was configured by using the
phone profile:
<Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_ ua="na">
collector@domain.com
</Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_>
or
<Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_ ua="na">
123.collect@123.123.123.123:5555
</Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_>
or
<Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_ ua="na">
5678@domain.com:5656
</Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_>
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 120
4
Configuring a SIP Proxy Server
To configure SIP proxy and registration parameters, navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > Ext_n. Under Proxy and Registration, configure the following
fields:
Parameter Description
Proxy SIP proxy server and port number set by the
service provider for all outbound requests. For
example: 192.168.2.100:6060.
The port number is optional. The default is port
5060.
Use Outbound Proxy The outbound proxy (for example,
172.20.2.1:5060—port is optional) or a domain
name, such as sip.server.com, as long as this name
is a fully-qualified domain name. When set to no, the
Outbound Proxy and Use OB Proxy in Dialog
parameters are ignored. Defaults to no.
Optionally, the proxy can be configured
(Cisco SPA300 or Cisco SPA500 Series only) for
Survivable Remote Site Telephony (SRST) support.
The proxy is configured with an extension that
includes a statically-configured DNS SRV record or
DNS A record. Configuring the proxy allows for
failover and fallback functionality with a secondary
proxy server. For example:
For SRV Record:
sip.server.com:SRV=node1.sip.server.co
m:5060:p=1:w=50|node2.sip.server.com:5
060:p=2:w=50
For A Record:
sip.server.com:A=172.20.2.1,172.20.2.2
In both examples Use DNS SRV to no and DNS
SRV Auto Prefix are set to no.
Outbound Proxy All outbound requests are sent as the first hop.
Enter an IP address or domain name.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 121
4
Use OB Proxy In Dialog SIP requests are sent to the outbound proxy within
a dialog. This field is ignored if Use Outbound
Proxy is set to no, or Outbound Proxy is blank. To
enable this feature, select yes. Otherwise, select
no. Defaults to yes.
Register Enables periodic registration with the proxy. This
parameter is ignored if a proxy is not specified. To
enable this feature, select yes. Otherwise, select
no. Defaults to yes.
Make Call Without Reg Enables making outbound calls without successful
(dynamic) registration by the phone. If set to no, the
dial tone plays only when registration is successful.
To enable this feature, select yes. Otherwise, select
no. Defaults to no.
Register Expires Defines how often the phone renews registration
with the proxy. If the proxy responds to a REGISTER
with a lower expires value, the phone renews
registration based on that lower value instead of the
configured value.
If registration fails with an “Expires too brief” error
response, the phone retries with the value specified
in the Min-Expires header of the error.
The range is from 0 to 268435455. Defaults to 3600
seconds.
Ans Call Without Reg The user does not have to be registered with the
proxy to answer calls. To enable this feature, select
yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to no.
Use DNS SRV Enables DNS SRV lookup for the proxy and
outbound proxy. To enable this feature, select yes.
Otherwise, select no. Defaults to no.
DNS SRV Auto Prefix The phone automatically prepends the proxy or
outbound proxy name with _sip._udp when
performing a DNS SRV lookup on that name. To
enable this feature, select yes. Otherwise, select
no. Defaults to no.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring SIP
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 122
4
STEP 1 Click Submit All Changes.
Configuring Subscriber Information Parameters
To configure subscriber information parameters for each extension, navigate to
Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Ext_n. Under Subscriber Information,
configure the following fields:
Proxy Fallback Intvl Sets the delay after which the phone retries from
the highest priority proxy (or outbound proxy) after
it has failed over to a lower priority server.
The phone should have the primary and backup
proxy server list from a DNS SRV record lookup on
the server name. It needs to know the proxy
priority; otherwise, it does not retry.
The range is from 0 to 65535. Defaults to 3600
seconds.
Proxy Redundancy
Method
The phone creates an internal list of proxies
returned in the DNS SRV records.
Select Normal to create a list that contains proxies
ranked by weight and priority.
Select Based on SRV and the phone creates a
Normal list, then inspects the port numbers based
on the first-listed proxy port. When the weight and
priority match, the device selects the first port in the
list. Defaults to Normal.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Display Name Name displayed as the caller ID.
User ID Extension number for this line.
Password Password for this line. Defaults to blank (no password
required).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Configuring the IP Phone Communications Protocol
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 123
4
Configuring the IP Phone Communications Protocol
By default, the phone automatically detects the protocol and the Unified
Communications device.
Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones can be used as part of a Cisco Unified
Communications System that uses Smart Phone Control Protocol (SPCP), also
known as Skinny Call Control Protocol (SCCP), to manage a voice network. Or the
phones can be configured to use Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), an IETF-defined
signaling protocol that controls voice communication sessions in an IP network.
Use Auth ID Enables the authentication ID and password for SIP
authentication. To enable this feature, select yes.
Otherwise, select no. Defaults to no.
Auth ID Authentication ID for SIP authentication. Defaults to blank.
Mini Certificate Base64 encoding of a mini-certificate concatenated with
the 1024-bit public key of the certificate authority (CA)
signing the mini-certificate of all subscribers in the group.
Defaults to blank.
SRTP Private Key Base64 encoding of the 512-bit private key per
subscriber for establishment of a secure call. Defaults to
blank.
Reversed
Authentication
Realm
The IP address for an authentication realm other than the
proxy IP address. The default value is blank; the proxy IP
address is used as the authentication realm.
The parameter for extension 1 appears as follows in the
phone configuration file:
<Reversed_Auth_Realm_1_ ua="na">
</Reversed_Auth_Realm_1_>
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 124
4
Configuring the Protocol on a Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
To configure the protocol on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, navigate to
Admin Login > advanced > Voice > System. Under System Configuration in the
SPA525-protocol field, choose SCCP or SIP.
To configure the phone to automatically detect the protocol being used on the
network that it is connected to, in the SPA525-auto-detect-sccp field, choose yes.
Configuring the Protocol on a Cisco SPA300 Series or
Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phone
To configure the protocol on a Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500 Series IP
phone, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > System. Under System
Configuration in the Signaling Protocol field, choose SCCP or SIP.
To configure the phone to automatically detect the protocol being used on the
network that it is connected to, in the SPCP Auto-detect field, choose yes. The
phone defaults to SIP unless it detects a Cisco Unified Communications device.
When set to no, the phone uses the protocol set in the Signaling Protocol field.
The Cisco SPA301 or the Cisco SPA501G can be configured by using the IVR. See
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens for more information.
Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones
Network Address Translation (NAT) allows multiple devices to share a single,
public, routable, IP address to establish connections over the Internet. NAT is
present in many broadband access devices to translate public and private IP
addresses. For VoIP to co-exist with NAT, NAT traversal is required.
Not all service providers provide NAT traversal. If your service provider does not
provide NAT traversal, you have several options:
• NAT Mapping with Session Border Controller
• NAT Mapping with SIP-ALG Router
• NAT Mapping with a Static IP Address
• NAT Mapping with STUN
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 125
4
NAT Mapping with Session Border Controller
We recommend that you choose an service provider that supports NAT mapping
through a Session Border Controller. With NAT mapping provided by the service
provider, you have more choices in selecting a router.
NAT Mapping with SIP-ALG Router
NAT mapping can be achieved by using a router that has a SIP Application Layer
Gateway (ALG). By using a SIP-ALG router, you have more choices in selecting an
service provider.
NAT Mapping with a Static IP Address
You can configure NAT mapping on the phone to ensure interoperability with the
service provider.
• You must have an external (public) IP address that is static.
• The NAT mechanism used in the router must be symmetric. See Determining
Whether the Router Uses Symmetric or Asymmetric NAT.
Use NAT mapping only if the service provider network does not provide a Session
Border Controller functionality. To configure NAT mapping on the phone:
STEP 1 Click Voice > SIP and navigate to NAT Support Parameters.
STEP 2 Set the following parameters to yes:
• Handle VIA received
• Insert VIA received,
• Substitute VIA Addr
• Handle VIA rport
• Insert VIA rport
• Send Resp To Src Port
STEP 3 Enter the public IP address for your router EXT IP field.
STEP 4 Click the Ext_n tab and navigate to NAT Settings.
STEP 5 Set NAT Mapping Enable to yes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 126
4
STEP 6 (Optional) Set NAT Keep Alive Enable to yes.
The service provider might require the phone to send NAT keep alive messages to
keep the NAT ports open. Check with your service provider to determine the
requirements.
STEP 7 Click Submit All Changes.
STEP 8 Configure the firewall settings on your router to allow SIP traffic. See Configuring
SIP.
NAT Mapping with STUN
If the service provider network does not provide a Session Border Controller
functionality and if the other requirements are met, it is possible to use Session
Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN) to discover the NAT mapping. The STUN
protocol allows applications operating behind a network address translator (NAT)
to discover the presence of the network address translator and to obtain the
mapped (public) IP address (NAT addresses) and the port number that the NAT
has allocated for the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) connections to remote hosts.
The protocol requires assistance from a third-party network server (STUN server)
located on the opposing (public) side of the NAT, usually the public Internet. This
option is considered a last resort and should be used only if the other methods are
not available. To use STUN
• The router must use asymmetric NAT. See Determining Whether the Router
Uses Symmetric or Asymmetric NAT.
• A computer running STUN server software is available on the network. You can
also use a public STUN server or set up your own STUN server.
STEP 1 Click Voice > SIP and navigate to NAT Support Parameters.
STEP 2 Set the following parameters to yes:
• Handle VIA received
• Insert VIA received,
• Substitute VIA Addr
• Handle VIA rport
• Insert VIA rport
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 127
4
• Send Resp To Src Port
• STUN Enable
STEP 3 Enter the IP address for your STUN server in the STUN Server field.
STEP 4 Click Ext_n.
STEP 5 Set NAT Mapping Enable to yes.
STEP 6 (Optional) Set NAT Keep Alive Enable to yes.
The service provider might require the phone to send NAT keep alive messages to
keep the NAT ports open. Check with your service provider to determine the
requirements.
STEP 7 Click Submit All Changes.
STEP 8 Configure the firewall settings on your router to allow SIP traffic. See Configuring
SIP.
Determining Whether the Router Uses Symmetric or Asymmetric NAT
STUN does not work on routers with symmetric NAT. With symmetric NAT, IP
addresses are mapped from one internal IP address and port to one external,
routable destination IP address and port. If another packet is sent from the same
source IP address and port to a different destination, a different IP address and
port number combination is used. This method is restrictive because an external
host can send a packet to a particular port on the internal host only if the internal
host first sent a packet from that port to the external host.
This procedure assumes that a syslog server is configured and is ready to receive
syslog messages.
To Determine Whether the Router Uses Symmetric or Asymmetric NAT:
STEP 1 Verify that the firewall is not running on your PC. (It can block the syslog port.) By
default, the syslog port is 514.)
STEP 2 Click Voice > System and navigate to Optional Network Configuration.
STEP 3 Enter the IP address for the Debug Server and port number of your syslog server,
if the port number is anything other than the default, 514. It is not necessary to
include the port number if it is the default.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring SIP, SPCP, and NAT
Managing NAT Transversal with Cisco IP Phones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 128
4
The address and port number must be reachable from the Cisco IP phone. The
port number appears on the output log file name. The default output file is
syslog.514.log (if port number was not specified).
STEP 4 Set the Debug Level to 3.
STEP 5 To capture SIP signaling messages, click the Ext tab and navigate to SIP Settings.
Set the SIP Debug Option to Full.
STEP 6 To collect information about what type of NAT your router uses click the SIP tab
and navigate to NAT Support Parameters.
STEP 7 Click Voice > SIP and navigate to NAT Support Parameters.
STEP 8 Set STUN Test Enable
to yes.
STEP 9 Determine the type of NAT by viewing the debug messages in the log file. If the
messages indicate that the device is using symmetric NAT, you cannot use STUN.
STEP 10 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 129
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network
Features
This chapter describes how to configure security, voice quality, and optional
network features for the phone:
• Setting Security Features
• Configuring Voice Codecs
• Configuring Domain and Internet Settings
• Setting Optional Network Servers
• Configuring VLAN Settings
• Configuring SSL VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Setting Security Features
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 130
5
Setting Security Features
The security features ensure that calls are secure and authenticated.
Challenging SIP Initial INVITE and MWI Messages
The SIP INVITE (initial) and Message Waiting Indication (MWI) messages in a
session can be challenged by the endpoint. The challenge restricts the SIP
servers that are permitted to interact with the devices on a service provider
network. This significantly increases the security of the VoIP network by
preventing malicious attacks against the device.
To configure SIP INVITE challenge, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
Ext_n. Under
SIP Settings in the Auth INVITE field, choose yes.
Encrypting Signaling with SIP Over TLS
Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a standard protocol for securing and
authenticating communications over the Internet. SIP Over TLS encrypts the SIP
messages between the service provider SIP proxy and the end user. SIP Over TLS
encrypts only the signaling messages, not the media. A protocol such as Secure
Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) can be used to encrypt voice packets (see
Securing Voice Traffic with SRTP).
TLS has two layers:
• TLS Record Protocol--layered on a reliable transport protocol, such as SIP
or TCH, it ensures that the connection is private by using symmetric data
encryption and it ensures that the connection is reliable.
• TLS Handshake Protocol--authenticates the server and client, and
negotiates the encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before the
application protocol transmits or receives data.
Cisco SPA IP phones use UDP as a standard for SIP transport, but they also
support SIP over TLS for added security.
To enable TLS for the phone, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
Ext_n. Under
SIP Settings, select TLS from the SIP Transport list.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Setting Security Features
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 131
5
Securing Voice Traffic with SRTP
Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) is a secure protocol for transporting
real-time data over networks. It provides media encryption to ensure that media
streams between devices are secure and that only the intended devices receive
and read the data. Cisco SPA IP phones use SRTP to securely send and receive
voice traffic to and from phones and gateways that support SRTP. (Security
Description (RFC-4568) is supported.)
When a call is secured with SRTP, the voice conversation is encrypted so that
others cannot eavesdrop on the conversation. To enable this feature, Cisco SPA IP
phones must have a mini-certificate installed.
Defaults to prefer to use encrypted media (voice codecs). Audio packets in both
directions of outbound calls are encrypted by using SRTP.
Authorizing Secure Calls with a Mini-certification
The phone can encrypt calls to protect them from eavesdroppers. The dial pad
codes for encrypting calls are:
• *16—Secures all calls.
• *17—Disable the call security the user enabled by dialing *16.
• *18—Secures an individual call when dialed before or during a call. Using
this star code is redundant if all outbound calls are already secure by
default or from having dialed *16.
To enable call encryption on the phone web user interface:
STEP 1 Obtain the Generate Mini-Cert tool from your service provider.
STEP 2 Navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Ext_n.
STEP 3 Under
Subscriber Information, enter the Mini Certificate and the SRTP Private
Key that provide secure encryption of RTP streams between two endpoints on an
extension.
STEP 4 To enable the secure call service, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
Phone.
STEP 5 Under Supplementary Services verify that Secure Call Serv is set to yes. (This
feature can also be configured in the User tab under Supplementary Services.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring Voice Codecs
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 132
5
Secure Call Indication Tone
This tone is played when a call that has been successfully switched to secure
mode. It should be played only for a short while (less than 30 seconds) and at a
reduced level (less than -19 dBm), so it does not interfere with the conversation.
To configure the tone, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Regional.
Under Call Progress Tones, enter the tone string in the Secure Call Indication Tone
field. Defaults to 397@-19,507@-19;15(0/2/0,.2/.1/1,.1/2.1/2). See Scripting for
Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones for syntax information.
Configuring Voice Codecs
A codec resource is considered allocated if it has been included in the SDP codec
list of an active call, even though it eventually might not be chosen for the
connection. If the G.729a codec is enabled and included in the codec list, that
resource is tied up until the end of the call whether or not the call actually uses
G.729a. If the G729a resource is already allocated (and since only one G.729a
resource is allowed per IP phone), no other low-bit-rate codec can be allocated for
subsequent calls. The only choices are G711a and G711u.
Since two G.723.1/G.726 resources are available per IP phone, you should disable
the use of G.729a to guarantee support for two simultaneous G.723/G.726
codecs.
Negotiation of the optimal voice codec sometimes depends on the ability of the
Cisco SPA IP phones to match a codec name with the far-end device or gateway
codec name. Cisco SPA IP phones allow the network administrator to individually
name the various codecs that are supported such that the correct codec
successfully negotiates with the far-end equipment.
Note that Cisco SPA IP phones support voice codec priority. You can select up to
three preferred codecs. The administrator can select the low-bit-rate codec used
for each line. G.711a and G.711u are always enabled.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring Voice Codecs
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 133
5
To configure the voice codecs on each extension, navigate to Admin Login >
advanced > Voice > Ext_n. Under Audio Configuration, configure the following
parameters:
Parameter Description
Preferred Codec Preferred codec for all calls. (The actual codec used in a
call still depends on the outcome of the codec negotiation
protocol.) Select one of the following:
• G711u (all models)
• G711a (all models)
• G726-16 (not supported on Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
• G726-24 (not supported on Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
• G726-32 (all models)
• G726-40 (not supported on Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
• G729a (all models)
• G723 (not supported on Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
• G722 (not supported on Cisco WIP310)
Defaults to G711u.
Use Pref Codec
Only
To use only the preferred codecs for all calls, select yes.
(The call fails if the far end does not support these
codecs.) Otherwise, select no. Defaults to no.
Second Preferred
Codec
If the first codec fails, this codec is tried. Defaults to
unspecified.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Third Preferred
Codec
If the second codec fails, this codec is tried. Defaults to
unspecified.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring Voice Codecs
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 134
5
G729a Enable To enable the use of the G.729a codec at 8 kbps, select
yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to yes.
G722 Enable Enables use of the G.722 codec. Defaults to yes.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
G723 Enable To enable the use of the G.723a codec at 6.3 kbps, select
yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to yes.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA300
Series, Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2.
G726-16 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 16 kbps, select
yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to yes.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
G726-24 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 24 kbps, select
yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to yes.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
G726-32 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 32 kbps, select
yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to yes.
G726-40 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 40 kbps, select
yes. Otherwise, select no. Defaults to yes.
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Release Unused
Codec
To enable the release of codecs not used after codec
negotiation on the first call so that other codecs can be
used for the second line, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
DTMF Process
AV T
Processes RTP DTMF events. When yes DTMF is relayed
by using Named Telephony Events (NTEs) in Real-Time
Transport Protocol (RTP) packets (RFC-2833, RTP Payload
for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones and Telephony Signals).
Defaults to yes.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring Voice Codecs
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 135
5
Silence Supp
Enable
To enable silence suppression so that silent audio frames
are not transmitted, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
DTMF Tx Method The method for transmitting DTMF signals to the far end.
The options are: InBand, audio video transport (AVT), INFO,
Auto, InBand+INFO, or AVT+INFO.
• InBand sends DTMF by using the audio path.
• AVT sends DTMF as AVT events.
• INFO uses the SIP INFO method.
• Auto uses InBand or AVT based on the outcome of
codec negotiation.
Defaults to Auto.
DTMF Tx Volume
for AVT Packet
Allows you to manually configure the AVT Tx volume. The
value of this parameter is inserted into the volume field of
the payload in the AVT packet.
Values are based on the AVT specification as described in
RFC-2833,
RTP Payload for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones
and Telephony Signals
. According to RFC-2833, the
volume field is represented by 6 bits, and describes the
power level of the tone, expressed in dBm0 after dropping
the sign.
Valid range for this parameter is 0 to 63. If the provisioned
value is negative, it is negated first. Thereafter, if the value
is beyond the high limit of 63, it is clipped to 63.
The default value is 0 and the recommended setting.
However, some gateways do not accept this volume
setting. If the gateway does not accept a value of 0, the
DTMF tone is not relayed to the remote end. As a
workaround for the phone to interoperate with those
gateways, you can change the value to a value greater
than 0.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring Domain and Internet Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 136
5
Configuring Domain and Internet Settings
Configuring Restricted Access Domains
If you enter domains, the Cisco IP phones respond to SIP messages only from the
identified servers.
To configure restricted access domains, navigate to Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > System. Under System Configuration in the Restricted Access Domains
field. Enter fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) for each SIP server you want the
phone to respond to. Separate FQDNs with semicolons. For example,
voiceip.com;voiceip1.com.
Configuring DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE Connection Type
You can set the connection type to one of the following:
Use Remote Pref
Codec
To set the phone to communicate by using the remote
phone-preferred codec, select yes. If set to no, the Cisco
IP phone communicates by using its own preferred codec
(as indicated in the Preferred Codec field and in the SDP
by order of preferences). The default vale is no.
Codec Negotiation When set to Default, the Cisco IP phone responds to an
Invite with a 200 OK response advertising the preferred
codec only. When set to List All, the Cisco IP phone
responds listing all the codecs that the phone supports.
The default value is Default.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring Domain and Internet Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 137
5
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) receives an IP address from
the network DHCP server. Cisco SPA IP phones typically operate in a
network where a DHCP server assigns the devices their IP addresses.
Because IP addresses are a limited resource, the DHCP server periodically
renews the device lease on the IP address. If a phone loses its IP address
for any reason, or if some other device on the network is assigned its IP
address, the communication between the SIP proxy and the phone is either
severed or degraded. Whenever an expected SIP response is not received
within a programmable amount of time after the corresponding SIP
command is sent, the
DHCP Timeout on Renewal
parameter causes the
device to request a renewal of its IP address. If the DHCP server returns the
IP address that it originally assigned to the phone, the DHCP assignment is
presumed to be operating correctly. Otherwise, the phone resets to try to
fix the issue.
• Static IP—A static IP address for the phone.
• PPPoE—Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) connects users on an
Ethernet network to the Internet through a common broadband medium,
such as DSL line, wireless device, or cable modem. All users on an Ethernet
share a common connection, so the Ethernet principles supporting multiple
users in a LAN combine with the principles of PPP that apply to serial
connections.
To set the connection type, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
System. Under Internet Connection Type choose the Connection Type:
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
• Static IP, and configure the following:
- Static IP Address of the phone.
- Netmask of the phone.
- Gateway IP address
If you are configuring a Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, also configure:
- LAN MTU—LAN Maximum Transmission Unit size. Default value: 1500.
- Duplex Mode—Choose the speed/duplex for the phone Ethernet ports:
Auto, 10MBps/Duplex, 10MBps/Half, 100Mbps/Duplex, 100MBps/Half
• PPPoE (PPPoE is only available on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2), and configure the following:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Setting Optional Network Servers
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 138
5
- PPPoE Login Name—The account name assigned by the ISP for
connecting on a PPPoE link.
- PPPoE Login Password—The password assigned by the ISP.
- PPPoE Service Name—The service name assigned by the ISP.
The Cisco SPA301 or Cisco SPA501G can be configured by using the IVR. See
Using IVR on IP Phones Without Screens.
Configuring Power Settings
The Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) requirements requested of a PoE switch by the
phone can be Normal (default) or Maximum.
When one or more attendant consoles are attached to the phone, use Maximum to
advertise to a PoE switch that the phone might consume up to 12 W.
When no attendant consoles are attached, use Normal to advertise a required power
budget of 6.5 Watts.
To configure the (PoE) requirements, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice
> System. Under Power Setting select Normal or Maximum.
Setting Optional Network Servers
Optional network servers provide resources such as DNS lookup, network time,
logging, and device discovery.
To configure the (PoE) requirements, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice
> System. Under Optional Network Configuration configure the following fields:
• Host Name—The host name of the phone.
• Domain—The network domain of the phone. If using LDAP see Configuring
LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phones.
• Primary DNS—DNS server used by the phone in addition to the
DHCP-supplied DNS servers (if DHCP is enabled), When DHCP is disabled,
this is the primary DNS server. Defaults to 0.0.0.0. If using LDAP see
Configuring LDAP for the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500
Series IP Phones.
• Secondary DNS—DNS server used by the phone in addition to the
DHCP-supplied DNS servers (if DHCP is enabled), When DHCP is disabled,
this is the secondary DNS server. Defaults to 0.0.0.0.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Setting Optional Network Servers
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 139
5
• DNS Server Order—Method for selecting the DNS server. The options are:
- Manual—Enter the IP address of the DNS server manually; do not use
the DHCP-supplied DNS table.
- Manual/DHCP—Look for a manual entry of the IP address of the DNS
server. Use the DHCP-supplied DNS table if it is not found.
- DHCP/Manual—Use the DHCP-supplied DNS table. If not found, look for
a manual entry of the IP address of the DNS server.
DNS Query Mode—Parallel or Sequential DNS query. A parallel DNS query sends
the same DNS lookup request to all of the DNS servers at the same time. The first
incoming reply is accepted by the phone. A sequential query polls the DNS
servers in sequence. Defaults to parallel. Not available on Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2.
Syslog Server—Syslog server name and port for logging system information and
critical events. If both Debug Server and Syslog Server are specified, Syslog
messages are also logged to the Debug Server.
Debug Server—Debug server name and port for logging debug information. The
level of detailed output depends on the Debug Level.
Debug Level—The debug level ranges from 0 to 3. The higher the level, the more
debug information is generated. Zero (0) means no debug information is
generated. To log SIP messages, you must set the Debug Level to at least 2.
Defaults to 0.
NTP Enable—Enables the Network Time Protocol (NTP). Applies to the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only.
Primary NTP Server—IP address or name of the primary NTP server used to
synchronize its time. Defaults to blank.
Secondary NTP Server—IP address or name of the secondary NTP server used
to synchronize its time. Defaults to blank.
Enable Bonjour—Bonjour is used by Office Manager and Cisco Configuration
Assistant to discover the Cisco IP phones. Choose yes to enable or no to disable.
Applies to the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 140
5
Configuring VLAN Settings
If you use a VLAN, your IP phone voice packets are tagged with the VLAN ID. (This
section does not apply to the Cisco WIP310.)
Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)
CDP is negotiation-based and determines which VLAN the IP phone resides in. If
you are using a Cisco switch, Cisco discovery protocol (CDP) is available and
enabled by default. CDP:
• Obtains the protocol addresses of neighboring devices and discovers the
platform of those devices.
• Shows information about the interfaces your router uses.
• Is media and protocol-independent.
If you are using a VLAN without CDP, you must enter a VLAN ID for the IP phone.
Configuring LLDP-MED
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones support Link Layer
Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) for deployment with
Cisco or other third-party network connectivity devices that use a Layer 2 auto-
discovery mechanism. Implementation of LLDP-MED is done in accordance with
IEEE 802.1AB (LLDP) Specification of May 2005, and ANSI TIA-1057 of April 2006.
Cisco SPA IP phones operate as LLDP-MED Media End Point Class III devices with
direct LLDP-MED links to Network Connectivity Devices, according to the Media
Endpoint Discovery Reference Model and Definition (ANSI TIA-1057 Section 6).
Cisco SPA IP phones support only the following limited set of TLVs as LLDP-MED
Media Endpoint device class III:
• Chassis ID TLV
• Port ID TLV
• Time to live TLV
• Port Description TLV
• System Name TLV
• System Capabilities TLV
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 141
5
• IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV (for wired network only)
• LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV
• LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV (for application type=Voice only)
• LLDP-MED Extended Power-Via-MDI TLV (for wired network only)
• LLDP-MED Firmware Revision TLV
• End of LLDPDU TLV
The outgoing LLDPDU contains all the above TLVs when if applicable. For the
incoming LLDPDU, the LLDPDU is discarded if any of the following TLVs are
missing. All other TLVs are not validated and ignored.
• Chassis ID TLV
• Port ID TLV
• Time to live TLV
• LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV
• LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV (for application type=Voice only)
• End of LLDPDU TLV
The phone sends out the shutdown LLDPDU if applicable. The LLDPDU frame
contains the following TLVs:
• Chassis ID TLV
• Port ID TLV
• Time to live TLV
• End of LLDPDU TLV
There are some restrictions in the implementation of LLDP-MED on the Cisco IP
Phones:
• Storage and retrieval of neighbor information is not supported.
• SNMP and corresponding MIBs are not supported.
• Recording and retrieval of statistical counters are not supported.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 142
5
• There is no full validation of all TLVs; TLVs that do not apply to the phones are
ignored.
• Protocol state machines as stated in the standards are only used for
reference.
TLV Information
These sections provide the TLV information.
Chassis ID TLV
For the outgoing LLDPDU, the TLV supports sub-type=5 (Network Address). When
IP address is known, the value of Chassis ID is an octet of the INAN address family
number followed by the octet string for the IPv4 address used for voice
communication. If the IP address is unknown, the value for Chassis ID is 0.0.0.0.
The only INAN address family supported is IPv4. Currently, IPv6 address for the
Chassis ID is not supported. For the incoming LLDPDU, the Chassis ID is treated as
an opaque value to form MSAP identifier. The value is not validated against its sub-
type. The Chassis ID TLV is mandatory as the first TLV. Only one Chassis ID TLV is
allowed for the outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs.
Port ID TLV
For the outgoing LLDPDU, the TLV supports sub-type=3 (MAC address). The 6
octet MAC address for the Ethernet port is used for the value of Port ID in wired or
wireless mode. For the incoming LLDPDU, the Port ID TLV is treated as an opaque
value to form the MSAP identifier. The value is not validated against its sub-type.
The Port ID TLV is mandatory as the second TLV. Only one Port ID TLV is allowed
for the outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs.
Time to Live TLV
For the outgoing LLDPDU, the Time to live TTL value is 180 seconds. This is
different from 120 seconds as recommended by the standard. For the shutdown
LLDPDU, the TTL value is always 0. The Time to Live TLV is mandatory as the third
TLV. Only one Time to Live TLV is allowed for the outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs.
End of LLDPDU TLV
The value is 2-octet, all zero. This TLV is mandatory and only one is allowed for the
outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 143
5
Port Description TLV
For the outgoing LLDPDU, in the Port Description TLV, the value for the port
description is the same as “Port ID TLV” for CDP. The incoming LLDPDU, the Port
Description TLV, is ignored and not validated. Only one Port Description TLV is
allowed for outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs.
System Name TLV
For the outgoing LLDPDU, in the System Name TLV, the value is the same as
‘Platform TLV” for CDP. For the Cisco SPA525G2, the name is “SPA525G2.” The
incoming LLDPDU, the System Name TLV, is ignored and not validated. Only one
System Name TLV is allowed for the outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs.
System Capabilities TLV
For the outgoing LLDPDU, in the System Capabilities TLV, the bit values for the 2
octet system capabilities field should be set for Bit 2 (Bridge) and Bit 5 (Phone) for
a phone with a PC port. If the phone does not have a PC port, only Bit 5 should be
set. The same system capability value should be set for the enabled capability
field. For the incoming LLDPDU, the System Capabilities TLV is ignored. The TLV is
not validated semantically against the MED device type. The System Capabilities
TLV is mandatory for outgoing LLDPDUs. Only one System Capabilities TLV is
allowed.
IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV
The TLV is not for auto-negotiation, but for troubleshooting purposes. For the
incoming LLDPDU, the TLV is ignored and not validated. For the outgoing LLDPDU,
for the TLV, the octet value auto-negotiation support/status should be:
• Bit 0—Set to 1 to indicate the auto-negotiation support feature is supported.
• Bit 1—Set to 1 to indicate auto-negotiation status is enabled.
• Bit 2-7—Set to 0.
The bit values for the 2 octets PMD auto-negotiation advertised capability field
should be set to:
• Bit 13—10BASE-T half duplex mode
• Bit 14—10BASE-T full duplex mode
• Bit 11—100BASE-TX half duplex mode
• Bit 10—100BASE-TX full duplex mode
• Bit 15—Unknown
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 144
5
Bit 10, 11, 13 and 14 should be set.
The value for 2 octets operational MAU type should be set to reflect the real
operational MAU type:
• 16—100BASE-TX full duplex
• 15—100BASE-TX half duplex
• 11—10BASE-T full duplex
• 10—10BASE-T half duplex
For example, in most cases, the phone is set to 100BASE-TX full duplex. The value
16 should then be set. The TLV is optional for a wired network and not applicable
for a wireless network. The phone will send out this TLV only when in wired mode.
When the phone is not set for auto-negotiation but specific speed/duplexity, for
the outgoing LLDPDU TLV, bit 1 for the octet value auto-negotiation support/status
should be clear (0) to indicate auto-negotiation is disabled. The 2 octets PMD auto-
negotiation advertised capability field should be set to 0x8000 to indicate
unknown. The Cisco SPA525G/525G2 allows the administrator to set the switch
operational mode to auto-negotiation or to a specific speed/duplexity.
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV
For the outgoing LLDPDU, the TLV should have the device type 3 (End Point Class
III) and with the following bits set for 2-octet Capability field:
For the incoming TLV, if the LLDP-MED TLV is not present, the LLDPDU is
discarded. The LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV is mandatory and only one is allowed
for the outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs. Any other LLDP-MED TLVs will be ignored
if they present before the LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV.
Bit Position Capability
0 LLDP-MED Capabilities
1Network Policy
4 Extended Power via MDI-PD
5Inventory
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 145
5
Network Policy TLV
Outgoing LLDPDU—The phone will send out only one Network Policy TLV with the
Application Type Value set to 1 (Voice). Before the VLAN or DSCP is determined,
the Unknown Policy Flag (U) is set to 1. If the VLAN setting or DSCP is known, the
value is set to 0. When the policy is unknown, all other values are set to 0. Before
the VLAN is determined or used, the Tagged Flag (T) is set to 0. If the tagged VLAN
(VLAN ID > 1) is used for the phone, the Tagged Flag (T) is set to 1. Reserved (X) is
always set to 0. If the VLAN is used, the corresponding VLAN ID and L2 Priority will
be set accordingly. VLAN ID valid value is range from 1-4094. However, VLAN ID=1
will never be used (limitation). If DSCP is used, the value range from 0-63 is set
accordingly.
Incoming LLDPDU—Multiple Network Policy TLVs for different application types
are allowed. The phone will only support and interpret the TLV with the application
type=1 (Voice). TLVs for other application types are ignored and not validated.
LLDP-MED Extended Power-Via-MDI TLV
In the TLV for the outgoing LLDPDU, the binary value for Power Type is set to “0 1”
to indicate the power type for phone is PD Device. The Power source for the
phone is set “PSE and local” with binary value “1 1”. The Power Priority is set to
binary “0 0 0 0” to indicate unknown priority while the Power Value is set to
maximum power value based on phone type:
For the incoming LLDPDU, the TLV is ignored and not validated. Only one TLV is
allowed in the outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs. The phone will send out the TLV
for wired network only.
The LLDP-MED standard was originally drafted in the context of Ethernet.
Discussion is ongoing for LLDP-MED for Wireless Networks. Refer to ANSI-TIA
1057, Annex C, C.3 Applicable TLV for VoWLAN, table 24. It is recommended that
the TLV is not applicable in the context of the wireless network. This TLV is
targeted for use in the context of PoE and Ethernet. The TLV, if added, will not
provide any value for network management or power policy adjustment at the
switch.
Phone Type Power Value
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 125
Cisco SPA500 Series 120
Cisco SPA300 Series 100
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 146
5
LLDP-MED Inventory Management TLV
This TLV is optional for Device Class III. For the outgoing LLDPDU, we support only
Firmware Revision TLV. The value for the firmware revision is the firmware version.
For the incoming LLDPDU, the TLVs are all ignored and not validated. Only one
Firmware Revision TLV is allowed for the outgoing and incoming LLDPDUs.
Final Network Policy Resolution and QoS For the Phone
The following sections describe network policy and QoS for the IP phones.
Special VLANs
VLAN=0, VLAN=1 and VLAN=4095 are treated the same way as an untagged
VLAN. As the VLAN is untagged, CoS is not applicable.
Default QoS for SIP Mode
If there is no network policy from CDP or LLDP-MED, the default network policy is
used. CoS is based on configuration for the specific extension. It is applicable only
if the manual VLAN is enabled and manual VLAN ID is not equal to 0, 1, or 4095. ToS
is based on configuration for the specific extension.
Default QoS for SPCP Mode
If there is no network policy from CDP or LLDP-MED, the default network policy is
used. CoS is based on a pre-defined value of 5. It is applicable only if the manual
VLAN is enabled and manual VLAN ID is not equal to 0, 1, or 4095. ToS is based on
precedence value from the StartMediaTransmission Message from the Unified
Communications 500 Series for the Cisco SPA525G/525G2. However, ToS is
based on the value specified for the specific extension in the web administration
interface for the Cisco SPA50X IP phone.
QoS Resolution for CDP
If there is a valid network policy from CDP:
• If the VLAN=0, 1 or 4095, the VLAN will not be set, or the VLAN is untagged.
CoS is not applicable, but DSCP is applicable. ToS is based on the default
as previously described.
• If the VLAN > 1 and VLAN< 4095, the VLAN is set accordingly. CoS and ToS
are based on the default as previously described. DSCP is applicable.
• For the Cisco SPA525G/525G2, when the VLAN is changed, the user sees
the voice component refreshed when the IP address is changed. For the
Cisco SPA50X, the phone reboots and restarts the fast start sequence.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 147
5
QoS Resolution for LLDP-MED
If CoS is applicable and if CoS=0, the default will be used for the specific
extension as previously described. But the value shown on L2 Priority for TLV for
outgoing LLDPDU is based on value used for extension 1. If CoS is applicable and
if CoS != 0, CoS will be used for all extensions.
If DSCP (mapped to ToS) is applicable and if DSCP=0, the default will be used for
the specific extension as previously described. But the value show on DSCP for
TLV for outgoing LLDPDU is based on value used for the extension 1. If DSCP is
applicable and if DSCP != 0, DSCP will be used for all extensions.
If the VLAN > 1 and VLAN < 4095, the VLAN is set accordingly. CoS and ToS are
based on the default as previously described. DSCP is applicable.
If there is a valid network policy for voice application from LLDP-MED PDU and if
the tagged flag is set, the VLAN, L2 Priority (CoS) and DSCP (mapped to ToS) are
all applicable.
If there is a valid network policy for voice application from LLDP-MED PDU and if
the tagged flag is not set, only the DPSC (mapped to ToS) is applicable.
For the Cisco SPA525G/525G2, when the VLAN is changed, the user sees the
voice component refreshed when IP address is changed. For the Cisco SPA50X,
the phone reboots and restarts the fast start sequence.
Co-Existence with CDP
If both CDP and LLDP-MED are enabled, the network policy for the VLAN is
determined by the last policy set or changed with either one of the discovery
modes. If both LLDP-MED and CDP are enabled, during startup, the phone sends
both CDP and LLDP-MED PDUs at the same time.
Inconsistent configuration and behavior for network connectivity devices for CDP
and LLDP-MED modes could result in an oscillating rebooting behavior for the
phone due to switching to different VLANs.
If the VLAN is not set via CDP and LLDP-MED, the VLAN ID that is configured
manually is used. If the VLAN ID is not configured manually, no VLAN will be
supported. DSCP is used and the network policy is determined by LLDP-MED if
applicable.
Wireless LAN Environments
Network policy for the VLAN feature is not supported for wireless networks. The
Wireless AP or Wireless router must be enabled for LLDP-MED as the Network
Connectivity Device. The DSCP portion for network policy from Wireless AP/
Router will be supported if enabled.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 148
5
LLDP-MED and Multiple Network Devices
If the same application type is used for network policy but different Layer 2 or
Layer 3 QoS Network policies are received by the phones from multiple network
connectivity devices, the last valid network policy is honored. To ensure
deterministic and consistent of Network Policy, multiple network connectivity
devices should not send out conflicting network policies for the same application
type.
LLDP-MED and IEEE 802.X
The phones do not support IEEE 802.X and will not work in a 802.1X wired
environment. However, IEEE 802.1X or Spanning Tree Protocols on network
devices could result in delay of fast start response from switches.
Configuring the VLAN Settings
To configure VLAN settings, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
System. Under VLAN Settings, configure the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Enable VLAN Choose Ye s to enable VLAN. Choose no to
disable.
VLAN ID If you use a VLAN without Cisco Discovery
Protocol (CDP) (VLAN enabled and CDP
disabled), enter a
VLAN ID
for the IP phone.
Note that only voice packets are tagged with
the VLAN ID. Do not use 1 for the VLAN ID.
PC Port VLAN Highest
Priority
Choose No Limit, or 0-7 (default 0). The highest
priority is 7. The priority applied to all frames,
tagged and untagged. The phone modifies the
frame priority only if the incoming frame
priority is higher than this value.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring VLAN Settings
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 149
5
Enable PC Port VLAN Tagging Enables VLAN and priority tagging on the
phone data port (802.1p/q). This feature
facilities tagging of the VLAN ID (802.1Q) and
priority bits (802.1p) of the traffic coming from
the PC port of the IP phone.
Choose Yes to enable the tagging algorithm.
Defaults to No.
PC Port VLAN ID The phone tags all of the untagged frames
coming from the PC. (It does not tag frames
with existing tags). Ranges from 0 to 4095.
Defaults to 0.
Enable CDP Enable CDP only if you are using a switch that
has CDP. CDP is negotiation-based and
determines on which VLAN the IP phone
resides.
Enable LLDP-MED Choose yes to enable LLDP-MED for the phone
to advertise itself to devices that use that
discovery protocol. (By default, this setting is
enabled.)
When the LLDP-MED feature is enabled, after
the phone has initialized and Layer 2
connectivity is established, the phone sends
out LLDP-MED PDU frames. If the phone
receives no acknowledgment, the manually
configured VLAN or default VLAN is used if
applicable. If CDP is used concurrently, a
waiting period of 6 seconds is used. The
waiting period increases the overall startup
time for the phone.
Network Startup Delay Enter the delay in seconds for the switch to get
to the forwarding state before the phone sends
out the first LLDP-MED packet. The default
delay is 3 seconds. For configuration of some
switches, it might be necessary to increase this
value to a higher value for LLDP-MED to work.
Configuring a delay can be important for
networks that use Spanning Tree Protocol.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring SSL VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 150
5
Configuring SSL VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 can be used in a virtual private network
(VPN) to allow users secure access to the office phone network from remote
locations or to connect the Internet and use VPN to access the company phone
network. This feature works on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 using
either SIP or SPCP.
The phone works with the Cisco AnyConnect VPN client and the following VPN
devices:
• Cisco 500 Series Secure Router
• Cisco 5500 Series Adaptive Security Appliance
• Cisco Unified Communications 520 Series
You must configure the SSL VPN device to ensure proper routing of voice data by
using VLAN and QoS at the end of the SSL VPN server. The following restrictions
apply:
• HTTP proxy is not supported.
• SSL client certificate verification is not supported.
• CDP and VLAN tagging and QoS for the voice and PC port are not
supported on the SSL VPN tunnel.
Because using VPN requires internal phone resources, performance can suffer if
using memory-intensive applications or configurations on the phone when the
phone is connected to the VPN. The following restrictions apply:
• Only the G.711 Audio Codec is supported.
• SRTP for secured audio is not supported.
• Video monitoring is not supported.
To configure and use the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 on a VPN, you must
do the following:
1. Configure the VPN on the VPN server by using Cisco AnyConnect VPN client
software.
2. Configure the VPN administrative settings on the IP phone by using the phone
web user interface.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring SSL VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 151
5
3. Configure the VPN user settings using the phone web user interface or on the IP
phone by using the IP phone screen.
Configuring the VPN on the Security Appliance
This configuration is for example purposes. Specific configuration instructions are
not presented in this document. For detailed instructions for your particular device,
see the application notes in the Cisco Small Business Support Community.
STEP 1 Download the Cisco AnyConnect VPN client software from Cisco.com and install it
on the VPN server.
STEP 2 Download a Cisco IOS version that supports this feature and install it on the VPN
server.
STEP 3 Configure SSL VPN on the VPN server.
STEP 4 Ensure the VPN is functional and you can connect to the VPN by using the
Cisco AnyConnect VPN client.
Configuring the VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
The phone obtains its software load from a TFTP server when the phone either
boots in SPCP mode (if the Connect on Bootup field on the phone is set to yes), or
connects to the VPN manually (as a result of a user pressing Connect on the phone
under the Network Configuration > VPN menu).
Administrator Settings
If the phone will be connecting to the VPN by using SPCP:
STEP 1 Navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > System.
STEP 2 Under Optional Network Configuration, from the Alternate TFTP list choose yes.
STEP 3 In the TFTP Server field, enter the IP address of the Cisco Unified Communications
500 Series server.
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring SSL VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 152
5
User Settings
Enter the user settings for the phone, using either the phone web user interface or
the phone itself:
STEP 1 Navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice > System. (Not applicable to the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 in SPCP mode.)
STEP 2 Under VPN Settings, enter the following:
• In the VPN Server field, enter the IP address of the VPN server.
• In the VPN User Name and Password fields, enter the username and
password to log in to the VPN server. These were created when you set up
the VPN on the server.
• (Optional) Enter the VPN tunnel group, if required by your VPN server.
• (Optional) To connect to the VPN when the phone is powered on, in the
Connect on Bootup field, choose yes.
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes. If you did not choose yes in the Connect on Bootup field,
connect to the VPN on the phone by pressing the Setup button and choosing
Network Configuration > VPN > Connect.
To use the phone interface:
STEP 1 On the phone, press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Scroll to Network Configuration and press Select.
STEP 3 Scroll to Web Server and ensure that it is enabled. Press the right arrow key if it is
not enabled.
If the option to edit the parameter is not displayed, press **# to display the option.
If the edit option still does not display, it might be set by your phone system
administrator such that you cannot modify this parameter.
STEP 4 Scroll to VPN and press the right arrow key.
STEP 5 Under VPN server, enter the IP address of the VPN server.
STEP 6 Enter the username to log in to the VPN server.
STEP 7 Enter the password for the user.
STEP 8 (Optional) Enter the tunnel group, if this is required by the VPN server.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Security, Quality, and Network Features
Configuring SSL VPN on the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 153
5
STEP 9 (Optional) To connect to the VPN when the phone is powered on, ensure that
Connect on Bootup is enabled.
STEP 10 To connect to the VPN, ensure that Connect is enabled.
STEP 11 Press Save. After the VPN connection is established, a VPN icon appears in the
upper right of the IP phone screen.
To view the VPN status, either:
• Use the phone web user interface:
- Click Admin Login and advanced. (Not applicable to the Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2 in SPCP mode.) Click the Info tab.
• Use the phone menu:
- Press the Setup button. Scroll to Status and press Select. Scroll to VPN
Status and press Select.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 154
Provisioning
Phones can be provisioned to download configuration profiles or updated
firmware from a remote server when they are connected to a network, when they
are powered up, and at set intervals. Provisioning is typically part of high-volume,
Voice-over-IP (VoIP) deployments and limited to service providers. Configuration
profiles or updated firmware are transferred to the device by using TFTP, HTTP, or
HTTPS.
The Cisco IP phones accept configuration profiles in XML format, or in a
proprietary binary format generated by the SIP Profile Compiler (SPC) available
from Cisco. The Cisco IP phones support 256-bit symmetric key encryption to
secure the XML content of the profiles. SPC compiled binary profiles can be
encrypted when they are complied. Since firmware does not contain sensitive
personal information, typically it is not encrypted.
Provisioning is described in detail in the
Cisco Small Business IP Telephony
Devices Provisioning Guide
.
This chapter describes:
• Redundant Provisioning Servers
• Retail Provisioning
• Automatic In-House Preprovisioning
• Using HTTPS
• Manually Provisioning a Phone from the Keypad
• Updating Profiles and Firmware
• Configuring a Custom Certificate Authority
• General Purpose Parameters
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Redundant Provisioning Servers
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 155
6
Additional information is available in:
• Cisco SPA3xx, SPA50xG, and SPA525G SPC Templates for
Configuration Files, available on the Cisco Support Community at:
https://supportforums.cisco.com/docs/DOC-10008
• Cisco SPA9000 Administration Guide
Redundant Provisioning Servers
The provisioning server may be specified as an IP address or as a fully qualified
domain name (FQDN). The use of a FQDN facilitates the deployment of redundant
provisioning servers. When the provisioning server is identified through a FQDN,
the Cisco IP phone attempts to resolve the FQDN to an IP address through DNS.
Only DNS A-records are supported for provisioning; DNS SRV address resolution
is not available for provisioning. The Cisco IP phone continues to process A-
records until the first server responds. If no server associated with the A-records
responds, the Cisco IP phone logs an error to the syslog server.
Retail Provisioning
The Cisco IP phone includes the web-based phone web user interface that
displays internal configuration and accepts new configuration parameter values.
The server also accepts a special URL command syntax for performing remote
profile resync and firmware upgrade operations.
In a retail distribution model, a customer purchases a Cisco voice endpoint device,
and subsequently subscribes to a particular service. The customer first signs on to
the service and establishes a VoIP account, possibly through an online portal.
Subsequently, the customer binds the particular device to the assigned service
account.
To do so, the unprovisioned Cisco IP phone is instructed to resync with a specific
provisioning server through a resync URL command. The URL command typically
includes an account PIN number or alphanumeric code to associate the device
with the new account.
In the following example, a device at the DHCP-assigned IP address 192.168.1.102
is instructed to provision itself to the SuperVoIP service:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Automatic In-House Preprovisioning
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 156
6
http://192.168.1.102/admin/resync?https://prov.supervoip.com/cisco-init/
1234abcd
In this example, 1234abcd is the PIN number of the new account. The remote
provisioning server is configured to associate the Cisco IP phone that is
performing the resync request with the new account, based on the URL and the
supplied PIN. Through this initial resync operation, the Cisco IP phone is
configured in a single step, and is automatically directed to resync thereafter to a
permanent URL on the server. For example:
https://prov.supervoip.com/cisco-init
For both initial and permanent access, the provisioning server relies on the Cisco
IP phone client certificate for authentication and supplies correct configuration
parameter values based on the associated service account.
Automatic In-House Preprovisioning
Using the phone web user interface and issuing a resync URL is convenient for a
customer in the retail deployment model, but it is not as convenient for
preprovisioning a large number of units.
The Cisco IP phone supports a more convenient mechanism for in-house
preprovisioning. With the factory default configuration, a Cisco IP phone
automatically tries to resync to a specific file on a TFTP server, whose IP address
is offered as one of the DHCP-provided parameters. This lets a service provider
connect each new Cisco IP phone to a LAN environment configured to
preprovision phones. Any new Cisco IP phone connected to this LAN
automatically resyncs to the local TFTP server, initializing its internal state in
preparation for deployment. Among other parameters, this preprovisioning step
configures the URL of the Cisco IP phone provisioning server.
Subsequently, when a new customer signs up for service, the preprovisioned
Cisco IP phone can be simply bar-code scanned, to record its MAC address or
serial number, before being shipped to the customer. Upon receiving the unit, the
customer connects the unit to the broadband link. On power-up the Cisco IP phone
already knows the server to contact for its periodic resync update.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Using HTTPS
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 157
6
Using HTTPS
The Cisco IP phone provides a reliable and secure provisioning strategy based on
HTTPS requests from the Cisco IP phone to the provisioning server, using both
server and client certificates for authenticating the client to the server and the
server to the client.
To use HTTPS with Cisco IP phones, you must generate a Certificate Signing
Request (CSR) and submit it to Cisco. The Cisco IP phone generates a certificate
for installation on the provisioning server that is accepted by Cisco IP phones
when they seek to establish an HTTPS connection with the provisioning server.
The Cisco IP phone implements up to 256-bit symmetric encryption, using the
American Encryption Standard (AES), in addition to 128-bit RC4. The Cisco IP
phone supports the Rivest, Shamir, and Adelman (RSA) algorithm for public/private
key cryptography.
Server Certificates
Each secure provisioning server is issued an secure sockets layer (SSL) server
certificate, directly signed by Cisco. The firmware running on the Cisco IP phone
clients recognizes only these certificates as valid. The clients try to authenticate
the server certificate when connecting via HTTPS, and reject any server
certificate not signed by Cisco.
This mechanism protects the service provider from unauthorized access to the
Cisco IP phone endpoint, or any attempt to spoof the provisioning server. This
might allow the attacker to reprovision the Cisco IP phone to gain configuration
information, or to use a different VoIP service. Without the private key
corresponding to a valid server certificate, the attacker is unable to establish
communication with a Cisco IP phone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Using HTTPS
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 158
6
Client Certificates
In addition to a direct attack on the Cisco IP phone, an attacker might attempt to
contact a provisioning server using a standard web browser, or other HTTPS
client, to obtain the Cisco IP phone configuration profile from the provisioning
server. To prevent this kind of attack, each Cisco IP phone also carries a unique
client certificate, also signed by Cisco, including identifying information about
each individual endpoint. A certificate authority root certificate capable of
authenticating the device client certificate is given to each service provider. This
authentication path allows the provisioning server to reject unauthorized requests
for configuration profiles.
Obtaining a Server Certificate
To obtain a server certificate:
STEP 1 Contact a Cisco support person who will work with you on the certificate process.
If you are not working with a specific support person, you can email your request
to ciscosb-certadmin@cisco.com.)
STEP 2 Generate a private key that will be used in a CSR (Certificate Signing Request).
This key is private and you do not need to provide this key to Cisco support. Use
open source “openssl” to generate the key. For example:
openssl genrsa -out <file.key> 1024
STEP 3 Generate CSR a that contains fields that identify your organization, and location.
For example:
openssl req -new -key <file.key> -out <file.csr>
You must have the following information:
• Subject field—Enter the Common Name (CN) that must be a FQDN (Fully
Qualified Domain Name) syntax. During SSL authentication handshake, the
SPA 9000 verifies that the certificate it receives is from the machine that
presented it.
• Server's hostname—For example, provserv.domain.com.
• Email address—Enter an email address so that customer support can
contact you if needed. This email address is visible in the CSR.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Manually Provisioning a Phone from the Keypad
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 159
6
STEP 4 Email the CSR (in zip file format) to the Cisco support person or to
ciscosb-certadmin@cisco.com. The certificate is signed by Cisco and given to
you.
Manually Provisioning a Phone from the Keypad
Typically Cisco SPA IP phones are configured to be provisioned when first
connected to the network and at configured intervals that are set when the phone
is preprovisioned (configured) by the service provider or the VAR. Service
providers can authorize VARs or advanced users to manually provision Cisco SPA
IP phones by using the phone keypad.
The status of the provisioning process is indicated by the phone mute button
blinking in the following patterns:
• Red/orange slow blink (1.0 seconds on, 1.0 seconds off): Contacting server,
server not resolvable, not reachable, or down.
• Red/orange fast blink (0.2 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.2 seconds on, 1.4
seconds off): Server responded with file not found or corrupt file.
To manually provision the phone by using the keypad:
Cisco SPA303 and Cisco SPA5XXG
STEP 1 Press Setup, then scroll to Profile Rule.
STEP 2 Enter the profile rule by using the following format:
protocol://server[:port]/profile_pathname
For example:
tftp://192.168.1.5/spa504.cfg
If no protocol is specified, TFTP is assumed. If no server-name is specified, the
host that requests the URL is used as the server name. If no port is specified, the
default port is used (69 for TFTP, 80 for HTTP, or 443 for HTTPS).
STEP 3 Press the Resync softkey.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Manually Provisioning a Phone from the Keypad
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 160
6
Cisco WIP310
STEP 1 Press Select to choose Settings and press Select again.
STEP 2 Navigate to Misc Settings.
STEP 3 Navigate to profile rule. Enter the profile rule in the following format:
protocol://server[:port]/profile_pathname
For example, to have the Cisco WIP310 provisioning done by a Cisco SPA9000,
enter:
192.168.2.64/cfg/generic.xml
STEP 4 Press the Resync softkey.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Navigate to Device Administration and press Select.
STEP 3 Scroll to Profile Rule and press Select.
STEP 4 Enter the profile rule by using the following format.
protocol://server[:port]/profile_pathname
For example:
tftp://192.168.1.5/spa525.cfg
STEP 5 Press the Resync softkey.
Sample Configuration File
Following is a sample configuration file:
Set_Local_Date_(mm/dd) "" ;
Set_Local_Time_(HH/mm) "" ;
Time_Zone "GMT-07:00" ; # options: GMT-12:00/GMT-11:00/GMT-10:00/GMT-09:00/
GMT-08:00/GMT-07:00/GMT-06:00/GMT-05:00/GMT-04:00/GMT-03:30/GMT-03:00/GMT-
02:00/GMT-01:00/GMT/GMT+01:00/GMT+02:00/GMT+03:00/GMT+03:30/GMT+04:00/
GMT+05:00/GMT+05:30/GMT+05:45/GMT+06:00/GMT+06:30/GMT+07:00/GMT+08:00/
GMT+09:00/GMT+09:30/GMT+10:00/GMT+11:00/GMT+12:00/GMT+13:00
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 161
6
FXS_Port_Impedance "600" ; # options: 600/900/600+2.16uF/900+2.16uF/
270+750||150nF/220+820||120nF/220+820||115nF/370+620||310nF
FXS_Port_Input_Gain "-3" ;
FXS_Port_Output_Gain "-3" ;
DTMF_Playback_Level "-16" ;
DTMF_Playback_Length ".1" ;
Detect_ABCD "Yes" ;
Playback_ABCD "Yes" ;
Caller_ID_Method "Bellcore(N.Amer,China)" ; # options:
Bellcore(N.Amer,China)/DTMF(Finland,Sweden)/DTMF(Denmark)/ETSI DTMF/ETSI
DTMF With PR/ETSI DTMF After Ring/ETSI FSK/ETSI FSK With PR(UK)
FXS_Port_Power_Limit "3" ; # options: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8
Protect_IVR_FactoryReset “No” ;
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco IP phones support secure remote provisioning (configuration) and firmware
upgrades. An unprovisioned Cisco IP phone can receive an encrypted profile
specifically targeted for that device without requiring an explicit key by using a
secure first-time provisioning mechanism using SSL functionality.
User intervention is not required to initiate or complete a profile update or
firmware upgrade. If intermediate upgrades are required to reach a future upgrade
state from an older release, the Cisco IP phone upgrade logic is capable of
automating multi-stage upgrades. A profile resync is only attempted when the
Cisco IP phone is idle, because this might trigger a software reboot and
disconnect a call.
General purpose parameters manage the provisioning process. Each Cisco IP
phone can be configured to periodically contact a normal provisioning server
(NPS). Communication with the NPS does not require the use of a secure protocol
because the updated profile is encrypted by a shared secret key. The NPS can be
a standard TFTP, HTTP or HTTPS server with client certificates.
The administrator can upgrade, reboot, restart, or resync Cisco IP phones by using
the phone web user interface. The administrator can also perform these tasks by
using a SIP notify message.
Configuration profiles are generated by using common, open-source tools that
integrate with service provider provisioning systems. (Provisioning is described in
detail in the
Cisco Small Business IP Telephony Devices Provisioning Guide
.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 162
6
Allow and Configure Profile Updates
The profile updates can be allowed at specified intervals. Updated profiles are
sent from a server to the phone by using a TFTP or HTTP.
To configure a profile update:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Provisioning.
STEP 2 Under Configuration Profile in the Provision Enable field, choose yes.
STEP 3 Enter the parameters defined in the table:
Parameter Description
Provision Enable Allows or denies resync actions. Defaults to yes.
Resync On Reset The device performs a resync operation after
power-up and after each upgrade attempt when
set to yes.
Resync Random Delay A random delay following the boot-up sequence
before performing the reset, specified in seconds.
In a pool of IP Telephony devices that are
scheduled to simultaneously powered up, this
introduces a spread in the times at which each unit
sends a resync request to the provisioning server.
This feature can be useful in a large residential
deployment, in the case of a regional power
failures.
Resync At (HHmm) Time in 24-hour format (hhmm) to resync the
device.
Resync At Random Delay To avoid flooding the server with simultaneously
resync requests from multiple phones set to resync
at the same time, the phone triggers the resync up
to ten minutes after the specified time. If this
parameter is provisioned, the Resync Periodic
parameter is ignored.
Resync Periodic Time in seconds between periodic resynchs. If this
value is empty or zero, the device does not resync
periodically.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 163
6
Resync Error Retry Delay If a resync operation fails because the IP Telephony
device was unable to retrieve a profile from the
server, if the downloaded file is corrupt, or an
internal error occurs, the device tries to resync
again after a time specified in seconds.
If the delay is set to 0, the device does not try to
resync again following a failed resync attempt.
Forced Resync Delay The resync typically takes place when the voice
lines are idle. When a voice line is active and a
resync is due, the IP Telephony device delays the
resync procedure until the line becomes idle.
However, it waits no longer than the Forced Resync
Delay (seconds). A resync might cause
configuration parameter values to change. This
causes a firmware reboot and terminates any voice
connection active at the time of the resync.
Resync From SIP Controls requests for resync operations by using a
SIP NOTIFY event sent from the service provider
proxy server to the device. When set to yes, the
proxy can request a resync by sending a SIP
NOTIFY message containing the Event: resync
header to the device.
Resync After Upgrade
Attempt
Requests a resync of the device after a failed
upgrade attempt.
Resync Trigger 1
Resync Trigger 2
A conditional expression (that undergoes macro
expansion). If the condition in one of these triggers
evaluates to true, a resync operation is initiated as
though the periodic resync timer had expired.
Resync Fails On FNF A resync is considered unsuccessful if a requested
profile is not received from the server. This can be
overridden by this parameter. When it is set to no,
the device accepts a file-not-found response
from the server as a successful resync.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 164
6
Profile Rule
Profile Rule B
Profile Rule C
Profile Rule D
Remote configuration profile rules evaluated in
sequence. Each resync operation can retrieve
multiple files, potentially managed by different
servers.
DHCP Option To Use DHCP options, delimited by commas, used to
retrieve firmware and profiles.
Transport Protocol The transport protocol used to retrieve firmware
and profiles. If none is selected, TFTP is assumed
and the IP address of the TFTP server is obtained
from the DHCP server.
Log Resync Request Msg The message sent to the syslog server at the start
of a resync attempt. The default value is:
$PN $MAC –
Requesting resync $SCHEME://
$SERVIP:$PORT$PATH
Log Resync Success Msg The syslog message issued upon successful
completion of a resync attempt. The default value
is:
$PN $MAC –Successful resync $SCHEME://
$SERVIP:$PORT$PATH -- $ERR.
Log Resync Failure Msg The syslog message that is issued after a failed
resync attempt. The default value is:
$PN $MAC – Resyncfailed: $ERR.
Report Rule The device provides a mechanism for reporting its
current internal configuration to the provisioning
server. The URL in this field specifies the
destination for a report and can include an
encryption key.
User Configurable
Resync
Allows a user resynch the phone from the IP phone
screen.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 165
6
Allow and Configure Firmware Updates
The firmware updates can be allowed at specified intervals. Updated firmware is
sent from a server to the phone by using a TFTP or HTTP. Security is less of an
issue with a firmware upgrade, because firmware does not contain personal
information.
To configure a firmware update:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Provisioning.
STEP 2 Under Firmware Upgrade in the Upgrade Enable field, choose yes.
STEP 3 Enter the parameters defined in the table:
Parameter Description
Upgrade Enable Allows firmware update operations independent of
resync actions. Defaults to yes.
Upgrade Error Retry
Delay
The interval applied in the event of an upgrade
failure. The firmware upgrade error timer activates
after a failed firmware upgrade attempt and is
initialized with this value. The next firmware
upgrade attempt occurs when this timer counts
down to zero. The default is 3600 seconds.
Downgrade Rev Limit Enforces a lower limit on the acceptable firmware
version number during an upgrade or downgrade.
The device does not complete a firmware upgrade
operation unless the firmware version is greater
than or equal to this parameter. For example: 7.4.8
The default is (empty).
Upgrade Rule A firmware upgrade script that defines upgrade
conditions and associated firmware URLs. It uses
the same syntax as Profile Rule. (See Manually
Provisioning a Phone from the Keypad for the
Upgrade Rule syntax.) The default is (empty).
Log Upgrade Request
Msg
Syslog message issued at the start of a firmware
upgrade attempt. The default is
$PN $MAC -- Requesting upgrade
$SCHEME://$SERVIP:$PORT$PATH
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 166
6
Launch a Firmware Update by using a Browser Command
An upgrade command entered into the browser address bar can be used to
upgrade firmware on a phone. The phone updates only when it is idle. The update
is attempted automatically after the call is complete.
To update the phone firmware, enter this command:
http://phone-ip-address/admin/upgrade?protocol://server-
name[:port]]/firmware-path
• protocol defaults to TFTP.
• server-name defaults to the host requesting the URL.
• port defaults to:
- 69 for TFTP
- 80 for HTTP
- 443 for HTTPS
• firmware-path defaults to /spa.bin (The firmware-pathname typically
includes the file name of the binary located in a directory on the TFTP or
HTTP server. For example, http://192.168.2.217/admin/
upgrade?tftp://192.168.2.251/spa.bin) for SPA phones, and
/wip310.img for the Cisco WIP310.)
Log Upgrade Success
Msg
Syslog message issued after a firmware upgrade
attempt completes successfully. The default is
$PN $MAC -- Successful upgrade
$SCHEME://$SERVIP:$PORT$PATH -- $ERR
Log Upgrade Failure Msg Syslog message issued after a failed firmware
upgrade attempt. The default is
$PN $MAC -- Upgrade failed: $ERR.
License Keys This field is not used.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Updating Profiles and Firmware
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 167
6
Launch a Profile Update by using a Browser Command
Cisco SPA IP phones can synchronize to specific profiles stored on a remote
server. The phone resyncs only when it is idle. The update is attempted
automatically after the call is complete.
To update the phone profile, enter this command:
http://phone-ip-addr/admin/resync?protocol://server-
name[:port]/profile-pathname
• phone-ip-addr is the IP address of the phone.
• Parameter following resync? defaults to the Profile Rule setting on the
web server Provisioning page.
• protocol defaults to TFTP.
• server-name defaults to the host requesting the URL.
• port defaults to:
- 69 for TFTP
- 80 for HTTP
- 443 for HTTPS
• profile-pathname defaults to the path for the new synchronization
profile (for example, http://192.168.2.217admin/resync?tftp://
192.168.2.251/spaconf.cfg).
Rebooting a Phone by using a Browser Command
You can remotely reboot a Cisco IP phone by entering a command in a web
browser URL field.
To reboot a phone, enter the following command:
http://phone-ip-address/admin/reboot
• phone-ip-addr is the IP address of the phone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Configuring a Custom Certificate Authority
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 168
6
Configuring a Custom Certificate Authority
Digital certificates can be used to authenticate network devices and users on the
network. They can be used to negotiate IPSec sessions between network nodes.
A third party uses a Certificate Authority Certificate to validate and authenticate
two or more nodes that are attempting to communicate. Each node has a public
and private key. The public key encrypts data. The private key decrypts data.
Because the nodes have obtained their certificates from the same source, they are
assured of their respective identities.
The device can use digital certificates provided by a third-party Certificate
Authority (CA) to authenticate IPSec connections.
To enable and configure a custom certificate of authority:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Provisioning.
STEP 2 In the CA Settings section in Custom CA Check Enable, select yes.
STEP 3 In Custom CA RULE, enter the rule in the following format:
STEP 4 Click Submit All Changes.
General Purpose Parameters
The general purpose parameters GPP_* are used as free string registers when
configuring the Cisco IP phones to interact with a particular provisioning server
solution. The GPP_* parameters are empty by default. They can be configured to
contain diverse values, including the following:
• Encryption keys
• URLs
• Multistage provisioning status information
• Post request templates
• Parameter name alias maps
• Partial string values, eventually combined into complete parameter values.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Using TR-069
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 169
6
The GPP_* parameters are available for macro expansion within other provisioning
parameters. For this purpose, single-letter upper-case macro names (A through P)
are sufficient to identify the contents of GPP_A through GPP_P. Also, the two-letter
upper-case macro names SA through SD identify GPP_SA through GPP_SD as a
special case when used as arguments of the key URL option.
These parameters can be used as variables in provisioning and upgrade rules.
They are referenced by prepending the variable name with a ‘$’ character, such as
$GPP_A.
To configure general purpose parameters, navigate to Admin Login > advanced >
Voice > Provisioning.
Using TR-069
TR-069 (Technical Report 069) provides Service Providers with a common
platform to manage all voice devices and other customer-premises equipment
(CPE) in large-scale deployments, no matter neither the device type nor the
manufacturer.
As a bidirectional SOAP/HTTP-based protocol, it provides the communication
between customer-premises equipment (CPE) and Auto Configuration Servers
(ACS). It includes both a safe auto configuration and the control of other CPE
management functions within an integrated framework. The protocol allows the
automatic configuration of Internet access devices, such as modems, routers,
gateways, set-top box, and VoIP-phones. The technical specifications are
managed and published by the Broadband Forum.
Cisco IP phones can be managed by using the protocols and standards defined in
TR-069. The ACS enables bulk configuration changes and firmware updates for
CPEs (IP phones). TR-069 inter operates with any ACS that will inter operate with a
MOTIVE client.
To configure the TR-069 client, navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice >
TR-069:
Field Description
Enable TR-069 From the drop-down menu, select yes to enable TR-069. or
no to disable TR-069.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Using TR-069
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 170
6
ACS URL Enter the URL of the ACS using the CPE WAN Management
Protocol. This parameter must be in the form of a valid HTTP
or HTTPS URL. The host portion of this URL is used by the
CPE to validate the ACS certificate when using SSL or TLS.
ACS Username Enter the username that authenticates the CPE to the ACS
by using the CPE WAN Management Protocol. This
username is used only for HTTP-based authentication of the
CPE.
ACS Password Enter the password grants access to the ACS for this user.
This password is used only for HTTP-based authentication
of the CPE.
ACS URL In Use Displays the ACS URL.
Connection
Request URL
Displays the ACS making the connection request to the
CPE.
Connection
Request
Username
Enter the username that authenticates the ACS making the
connection request to the CPE.
Connection
Request
Password
Enter the password used to authenticate the ACS making a
connection request to the CPE.
Periodic Inform
Interval
The duration in seconds of the interval between CPE
attempts to connect to the ACS when Periodic Inform
Enable is set to yes.
Periodic Inform
Enable
From the drop-down menu, select yes to enable CPE
connection requests. Enter no to disable connection
requests.
TR-069
Traceability
From the drop-down menu, select yes to enable TR-069
transaction traceability. Enter no to disable traceability.
CWMP V1.2
Support
From the drop-down menu, select yes to enable CPE WAN
Management Protocol (CWMP) support. Enter no to disable
CWMP support such that the device does not send any
Inform messages to the ACS or accept any connection
requests from the ACS.
Field Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Provisioning
Using TR-069
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 171
6
TR-069
VoiceObject Init
From the drop-down menu, select yes to initialize all voice
objects to factory default values. Enter no to retain the
current values.
TR-069 DHCP
Option Init
From the drop-down menu, select yes to initialize the DHCP
settings from the ACS. Enter no to leave the settings
unchanged.
TR-069 IGD
Support
From the drop-down menu, select yes to enable TR-069 on
the Internet Gateway Device (IGD). Enter no to disable
traceability. (This is used for debugging purposes.)
TR-069 Fallback
Support
From the drop-down menu, select yes to enable TR-069
fallback support. Enter no to disable fallback support. If the
SPA phone first attempt to discover the ACS by using DHCP,
it attempts to use DNS to resolve ACS IP address.
TR-069 DHCP
Inform Timer
Enter the interval in seconds that the phone should poll the
DHCP server.
BACKUP ACS
URL
Enter the backup URL of the ACS using the CPE WAN
Management Protocol. This parameter must be in the form
of a valid HTTP or HTTPS URL. The host portion of this URL
is used by the CPE to validate the ACS certificate when
using SSL or TLS.
BACKUP ACS
User
Enter the backup username that authenticates the CPE to
the ACS by using the CPE WAN Management Protocol. This
username is used only for HTTP-based authentication of the
CPE.
BACKUP ACS
Password
Enter the backup password grants access to the ACS for
the backup user. This password is used only for HTTP-
based authentication of the CPE.
Field Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
7
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 172
Configuring Regional Parameters and
Supplementary Services
Use the
Regional
tab to configure regional and local settings, such as Vertical
Service Activation codes (star codes), Vertical Service Announcement codes, and
local language and dictionary.
• Scripting for Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones
• Call Progress Tones
• Distinctive Ring Patterns
• Control Timer Values (sec)
• Vertical Service Announcement Codes (Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series)
• Miscellaneous Parameters
• Localizing Your IP Phone
• Selecting a Display Language
Call progress tone pass-through lets a user hear call progress tones (such as
ringing) that are generated by the far-end network.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Scripting for Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 173
7
Scripting for Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones
Cisco SPA IP phones have configurable call progress tones. Parameters for each
type of tone can include a number of components, defining frequency, amplitude
and cadence.
Cadence Script
A CadScript is a mini-script that specifies the cadence parameters of a signal up
to 127 characters in length. Syntax:
S
1
[;S
2
]
where:
Si=Di(oni,1/offi,1[,oni,2/offi,2[,oni,3/offi,3[,oni,4/
offi,4[,oni,5/offi,5[,oni,6/offi,6]]]]]) and is known as a
section
oni,j and offi,j are the on/off durations in seconds of a
segment.
The
subscript ranges are: i = 1 or 2, j = 1 to 6.
D
i
is the total duration of the section in seconds. All durations can have up to
three decimal places to provide 1 ms resolution. The wildcard character “*”
indicates infinite duration.
The segments within a section are played in order and repeated until the total
duration is played.
Example: Normal Ring
60(2/4)
where:
• Number of Cadence Sections = 1
• Cadence Section 1: Section Length = 60 s
• Number of Segments = 1
• Segment 1: On=2s, Off=4s
• Total Ring Length = 60s
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Scripting for Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 174
7
Example 2: Distinctive Ring (short, short, short, long)
60(.2/.2,.2/.2,.2/.2,1/4)
Where:
• Number of Cadence Sections = 1
• Cadence Section 1: Section Length = 60s
• Number of Segments = 4
• Segment 1: On=0.2s, Off=0.2s
• Segment 2: On=0.2s, Off=0.2s
• Segment 3: On=0.2s, Off=0.2s
• Segment 4: On=1.0s, Off=4.0s
• Total Ring Length=60s
Tone S cript
A ToneScript is a mini-script that specifies the frequency, level, and cadence of a
call progress tone. It can contain up to 127 characters. Syntax:
FreqScript;Z1[;Z2]
Section Zi is similar to the Si section in a CadScript except that each on/off
segment is followed by a frequency parameter: Zi = Di(oni,1/offi,1/
fi,1[,oni,2/offi,2/fi,2 [,oni,3/offi,3/fi,3 [,oni,4/offi,4/
fi,4 [,oni,5/offi,5/fi,5 [,oni,6/offi,6/fi,6]]]]])
where fi,j = n1[+n2]+n3[+n4[+n5[+n6]]]]] 1< nk < 6 indicates which
of the frequency components given in the FreqScript are used in that segment; if
more than one frequency component is used in a segment, the components are
summed together.
Example: Dial Tone
350@-19,440@-19;10(*/0/1+2)
• Number of Frequencies = 2
• Frequency 1 = 350 Hz at –19 dBm
• Frequency 2 = 440 Hz at –19 dBm
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Scripting for Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 175
7
• Number of Cadence Sections = 1
• Cadence Section 1: Section Length = 10 s
• Number of Segments = 1
• Segment 1: On=forever, with Frequencies 1 and 2
• Total Tone Length = 10s
• Example 2: Stutter Tone
• 350@-19,440@-19;2(.1/.1/1+2);10(*/0/1+2)
• Number of Frequencies = 2
• Frequency 1 = 350 Hz at –19 dBm
• Frequency 2 = 440 Hz at –19 dBm
• Number of Cadence Sections = 2
• Cadence Section 1: Section Length = 2s
• Number of Segments = 1
• Segment 1: On=0.1s, Off=0.1s with Frequencies 1 and 2
• Cadence Section 2: Section Length = 10s
• Number of Segments = 1
• Segment 1: On=forever, with Frequencies 1 and 2
• Total Tone Length = 12s
Example: SIT Tone
985@-16,1428@-16,1777@-16;20(.380/0/1,.380/0/2,.380/0/3,0/4/
0)
• Number of Frequencies = 3
• Frequency 1 = 985 Hz at –16 dBm
• Frequency 2 = 1428 Hz at –16 dBm
• Frequency 3 = 1777 Hz at –16 dBm
• Number of Cadence Sections = 1
• Cadence Section 1: Section Length = 20s
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Scripting for Cadences, Call Progress Tones, and Ring Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 176
7
• Number of Segments = 4
• Segment 1: On=0.38s, Off=0s, with Frequency 1
• Segment 2: On=0.38s, Off=0s, with Frequency 2
• Segment 3: On=0.38s, Off=0s, with Frequency 3
• Segment 4: On=0s, Off=4s, with no frequency components
• Total Tone Length = 20s
Ring Script
A RingScript is a mini-script that describes a ring tone. Syntax:
n=ring-tone-name;w=waveform-id-or-path;c=cadence-
id;b=break-time;t=total-time
ring-tone-name identifies this ring tone. This name appears on the Ring
Tone menu of the phone. The same name can be used in a SIP Alert-Info
header in an inbound INVITE request to tell the phone to play the
corresponding ring tone. The name should contain the same characters
allowed in a URL only.
waveform-id-or-path is the index of the desired waveform to use in this
ring tone. The built-in waveforms are:
- 1 = Classic phone with mechanical bell
- 2 = Typical phone ring
- 3 = Classic ring tone
- 4 = Wide-band frequency sweep signal
This field can also be a network path (url) to download a ring tone data file
from a server on-the-fly. In this case, the syntax of the field is:
w=[tftp://]hostname[:port]/path
cadence-id is the index of the desired cadence to play the given
waveform. 8 cadences (1–8) as defined in <Cadence 1> through <Cadence
8>. Cadence-id can be 0 If w=3,4, or an url. Setting c=0 implies the on-time
is the natural length of the ring tone file.
break-time specifies the number of seconds to break between two
bursts of ring tone, such as b=2.5.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Call Progress Tones
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 177
7
total-time specifies the total number of seconds to play the ring tone
before it times out.
Call Progress Tones
For definitions of all call progress tones, see Call Progress Tone Description.
Distinctive Ring Patterns
Ring cadence defines the ringing pattern that announces a telephone call. The
Cisco WIP310 has only eight distinctive ring pattern fields.
The pattern is:
length(on/off)
where:
• Length: The total length of the ring
• On: The number of on seconds the ring is heard.
• Off: The number of seconds the ring is silent.
Example 1: Normal Ring
60(2/4)
where:
• Number of Cadence Sections = 1
• Cadence Section 1: Section Length = 60 s
• Number of Segments = 1
• Segment 1: On=2s, Off=4s
• Total Ring Length = 60s
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Distinctive Call Waiting Tone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 178
7
Example 2: Distinctive Ring (short, short, short, long)
60(.2/.2,.2/.2,.2/.2,1/4)
where:
• Number of Cadence Sections = 1
• Cadence Section 1: Section Length = 60s
• Number of Segments = 4
• Segment 1: On=0.2s, Off=0.2s
• Segment 2: On=0.2s, Off=0.2s
• Segment 3: On=0.2s, Off=0.2s
• Segment 4: On=1.0s, Off=4.0s
• Total Ring Length=60s
Distinctive Call Waiting Tone
When the phone is off-hook on a call, the call waiting tone plays. Support for
Distinctive Ring is based on the Alert-Info header that supports the Distinctive Call
Waiting tone. The distinctive call waiting tone is generated based on the phone call
waiting tone frequency and gain values, and the cadence value of the matched
ring tone.
The cadence value (following the c= element) of the matched ring tone must be
an integer from 1 to 9 that specifies the ring cadence under the Regional tab of the
phone web user interface.
If there is no matching ring tone name, or an invalid cadence value is specified, the
configured Call Waiting Tone is used.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Control Timer Values (sec)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 179
7
Control Timer Values (sec)
The table describes Control Timer parameters.
Field Description
Reorder Delay Delay after far end hangs up before reorder (busy) tone is
played. Ranges from 0 to 255 seconds.
0 = play immediately
inf = never play
255 = return the phone immediately to on-hook
status and do not play the tone.
Defaults to 5.
Call Back Expires Expiration time of a call back activation request. Ranges
from 0 to 65535 seconds. Defaults to 1800.
Call Back Retry
Intvl
The interval between call back retry requests. Ranges from
0 to 255 seconds. Defaults to 30.
Call Back Delay Delay after receiving the first SIP 18x response before
declaring the remote end is ringing. If a busy response is
received during this time, the Cisco SPA IP phones still
consider the call as failed and continues to retry. Defaults to
0.5.
Interdigit Long
Timer
Long timeout between entering digits when dialing. The
interdigit timer values are used as defaults when dialing.
The
Interdigit Long Timer
is used after any one digit, if all
valid matching sequences in the dial plan are incomplete as
dialed. Ranges from 0 to 64 seconds.
Setting this value high can result in a longer post dialing
delay (PDD), which is the time between the start of a call
and the time the phone starts ringing. A value that is too low
can result in dialed digits not being correctly recognized.
Defaults to 10.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 180
7
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes)
The Cisco IP phones provide native support of a large set of enhanced or
supplementary services (also known as star codes). A user can enter star codes
(such as *21 for call forward, followed by the target number) to perform call
features such as call return, blind call transfers, call pickup, and so on. These codes
can be handled locally by the phone or to be sent to the network as an INVITE to
the service provider.
Some service providers choose to disable star codes. See Configuring
Supplementary Services (Star Codes) for more information.
Entering Star Code Values
The phone provides default values for star codes. To change star code values,
navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Regional. Under Vertical Service
Activation Codes, enter the values you want to change for the codes.
The codes are:
• Call Return (*69)—Calls the last caller, regardless which extension.
• Blind Transfer (*98)—Allows the user to transfer a call to another number
without waiting for the other party to pick up.
• Call Back Act (*66)—Periodically redials the last busy number (every 30
seconds by default) until it rings or until the attempt expires (30 min by
default), regardless which extension. Only one call back operation can be
ordered at a time. A new order automatically cancels the previous order.
• Call Back Deact (*86)—Cancels the last call back operation.
Interdigit Short
Timer
Short timeout between entering digits when dialing. The
Interdigit Short Timer
is used after any one digit, if at least
one matching sequence is complete as dialed, but more
dialed digits would match other as yet incomplete
sequences. Ranges from 0 to 64 seconds.
Defaults to 3.
Field Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 181
7
• Call Forward All Act (*72)—Call forwards all inbound calls. Applies to
primary extension only.
• Call Forward All Deact (*73)—Cancels call forward all. Applies to primary
extension only.0
• Call Forward Busy Act (*90)—Call forwards on busy. Applies to primary
extension only.
• Call Forward Busy Deact (*91)—Cancels call forward on busy. Applies to
primary extension only.
• Call Forward No Answer Act (*92)—Call forwards if no answer. Applies to
primary extension only.
• Call Forward No Answer Deact (*93)—Cancels call forward no answer.
Applies to primary extension only.
• CW Act (*56)—Enables call waiting. For example, if call waiting is turned off
globally, this star code will turn on call waiting until the CW Deact code is
entered.
• CW Deact (*57)—Deactivates call waiting. For example, if call waiting is
turned on globally, this star code deactivates call waiting until the CW Act
code is entered.
• CW Per Call Act (*71)—Enables call waiting for a single call. For example, if
call waiting is turned off globally, this star code will turn on call waiting for
that call.
• CW Per Call Deact (*70)—Deactivates call waiting for a single call. For
example, if call waiting is turned on globally, this star code deactivates call
waiting for that call.
• Block CID Act (*67)—Blocks caller ID on all outbound calls. Applies to all
extensions.
• Block CID Deact (*68)—Deactivates caller ID blocking on outbound calls.
Applies to all extensions.
• Block CID Per Call (*81)—Blocks caller ID on the next outbound call (on the
current call appearance only).
• Block CID Per Call Deact (*82)—Deactivates caller ID blocking on the next
outbound call (on the current call appearance only).
• Block ANC Act—Blocks anonymous calls. Applies to all extensions.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 182
7
• Block ANC Deact—Deactivates anonymous call blocking. Applies to all
extensions.
• DND Act (*78)—Activates Do Not Disturb. Applies to all extensions.
• DND Deact (*79)—Deactivates Do Not Disturb. Applies to all extensions.
• Secure All Call Act (*16)—Defaults to prefer to use encrypted media (voice
codecs).
• Secure No Call Act (*17)—Defaults to prefer to use unencrypted media for
all outbound calls. Applies to all extensions.
• Secure One Call Act (*18)—Prefers to use encrypted media for the
outbound call (on this call appearance only).
• Secure One Call Deact (*19)—Prefers to use unencrypted media for the
outbound call (on this call appearance only).
• Paging (*96)—Pages the number called.
• Call Park (*38)—Parks a call on an entered line number.
• Call UnPark Code (*39)—Retrieves a call from an entered line number.
• Call Pickup (*36)—Picks up a call at an entered extension.
• Group Call Pickup (*37)—Picks up a ringing call at a group of extensions.
• Media Loopback Code (*03)—A service provider can set up a test call from
an IP media loopback server (the source) to a subscriber VoIP device (the
mirror). The test call provides statistical reporting on network performance
and audio quality.
Depending on the source capabilities, a service provider can see packet
jitter, loss, and delay (although Media Loopback cannot identify an offending
hop). This helps the service provider identify an offending hop that could be
causing issues in VoIP calls to a subscriber. The test results can also provide
audio quality scoring, that lets a service provider better understand the
subscriber’s experience.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 183
7
• Referral Services Codes—One or more * codes can be configured into this
parameter, such as *98, or *97|*98|*123, and so forth. The maximum total
length is 79 characters.
This parameter applies when the user places the current call on hold (by
Hook Flash) and is listening to second dial tone. Each * code (and the
following valid target number according to current dial plan) entered on the
second dial-tone triggers the Cisco IP phone to perform a blind transfer to a
target number that is prepended by the service * code. For example:
- After the user dials *98, the Cisco IP phone plays a special prompt tone
while waiting for the user the enter a target number (which is validated
according to the dial plan as in normal dialing).
- When a complete number is entered, the Cisco IP phone sends a blind
REFER to the holding party with the Refer-To target equals to *98
target_number
. This feature allows the Cisco IP phone to hand off a call
to an application server to perform further processing, such as call park.
The * codes should not conflict with any of the other vertical service codes
internally processed by the Cisco IP phone. You can delete any * code that
you do not want the call server to process.
Feature Dial Services Codes: Tells the Cisco IP phone what to do when the
user is listening to the first or second dial tone.
You can configure one or more * codes into this parameter, such as *72, or
*72|*74|*67|*82, and so on. The maximum total length is 79 characters. When
the user has a dial tone (first or second dial tone), they can enter a * code
(and the following target number according to current dial plan) to trigger
the Cisco IP phone to call the target number prepended by the * code. For
example:
- After the user dials *72, the Cisco IP phone plays a special prompt tone
while waiting for the user the enter a target number (which is validated
according to the dial plan as in normal dialing).
- When a complete number is entered, the Cisco IP phone sends an
INVITE to *72
target_number
as in a normal call. This feature allows the
proxy to process features such as call forward (*72) or BLock Caller ID
(*67).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 184
7
You can add a parameter to each * code in
Features Dial Services Codes
to
indicate what tone to play after the * code is entered, such as *72‘c‘|*67‘p‘.
Following is a list of allowed dial tone parameters (note the use of back
quotes surrounding the parameter without spaces).
- ‘c‘ = Cfwd dial tone
- ‘d‘ = Dial tone
- ‘m‘ = MWI dial tone
- ‘o‘ = Outside dial tone
- ‘p‘ = Prompt dial tone
- ‘s‘ = Second dial tone
- ‘x‘ = No tones are place, x is any digit not used above
If no tone parameter is specified, the Cisco IP phone plays the prompt tone
by default.
If the * code is not to be followed by a phone number, such as *73 to cancel
call forwarding, do not include it in this parameter. In that case, add that *
code in the dial plan.
Activating or Deactivating Supplementary Services
You can disable services handled locally by the phone in one of two ways:
• Delete the star code in the
Vertical Service Activation
section in the Regional
tab.
• Disable the service in the
Phone
tab. See Configuring Supplementary
Services (Star Codes), page 180.
If a service is enabled in the Phone tab but cleared in the Regional tab, the service
can still be enabled/disabled from the IP phone screen or the phone web user
interface. If a service is disabled, the soft button associated with that service is
hidden on the IP phone screen. Also, any menu item associated with a disabled
service is preceded with an exclamation mark (!).
A supplementary service should be disabled if
• the user has not subscribed to it
• the service provider intends to support similar service by using means
other than relying on the Cisco IP phone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Vertical Service Announcement Codes (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 185
7
Vertical Service Announcement Codes (Cisco SPA300 Series
and Cisco SPA500 Series)
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones support all services
that can be activated on a phone (call forward, do not disturb, and so on). Vertical
service announcement codes apply only when the user dials the corresponding
star code.
Following is an example of how you can use these fields:
<Service Annc Base Number> = 1234
<Service Annc Extension Codes>=
"CWT:00;CWF:01;FAT:02;FAF:05;FBT:03;FBF:05;FNT:04;FNF:05;"
Here CWT: Call waiting service enabled;
CWF: Call waiting service disabled;
FAT: Call forward all service enabled;
FAF: Call forward all service disabled;
FBT: Call forward busy service enabled;
FBF: Call forward busy service disabled;
FNT: Call forward no answer enabled;
FNF: Call forward no answer disabled;
When the user enables call waiting service, the IP phone automatically calls
123400@$proxy.
When the user
disables
the call waiting service, IP phone connects to
123401@$proxy.
If the <Service Annc Extension Codes> do not define CWT/CWF extension codes,
the IP phone defaults to normal.
Bonus Services Announcement Description
When the user enables the callback service using the *code, the IP phone
automatically calls 123400@$proxy.
When the user disables the callback service using the *code, the IP phone
automatically connects to the 123401@$proxy.
If the
Service Annc Extension Codes
do not define CBT/CBF extension codes, the
IP phone does not use this feature.
[Line1/2]<Service Announcement Serv> = Yes
[Regional]<Service Annc Base Number> = {announcement server base number}
[Regional]<Service Annc Extension Codes> = {SAEC Script}
SAEC Script format:{SA_map;}* Here * means 0 or multiple
SA_map syntax:
SA_serv=SA_extcode
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Vertical Service Announcement Codes (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 186
7
SA_serv is the name of service plus the current condition;
SA_extcode is the extension code which the ANNC server will route to.
Appendix: SA_serv list
1) Call Back
CBT: Call back enabled
CBF: Call back disabled
CBB: Call back busy enabled
2) Call Forward
FAT: Call forward all enabled
FAF: Call forward all disabled
FBT: Call forward busy enabled
FBF: Call forward busy disabled
FNT: Call forward no answer enabled
FNF: Call forward no answer disabled
FLT: Call forward last enabled
FLF: Call forward last disabled
3) Call Waiting
CWT: Call waiting enabled
CWF: Call waiting disabled
4) Block Last Call
BLT: Block last call enabled
BLF: Block last call disabled
5) Accept Last Call
ALT: Accept last call enabled
ALF: Accept last call disabled
6) Block Caller ID
BCT: Block caller id enabled
BCF: Block caller id disabled
7) Distinctive Ringing
DRT: Distinctive ringing enabled
DRF: Distinctive ringing disabled
8) Speed Dial
SDT: Speed dial enabled
SDF: Speed dial disabled
9) Secure Call
SCT: Secure call enabled
SCF: Secure call disabled
10) Do Not Disturb
DDT: DND enabled
DDF: DND disabled
11) Caller ID
CDT: Caller ID enabled
CDF: Caller ID disabled
12) CW CID
WDT: CWCID enabled
WDF: CWCID disabled
13) Block Anonymous call
BAT: Block anonymous call enabled
BAF: Block anonymous call disabled
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Miscellaneous Parameters
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 187
7
Outbound Call Codec Selection Codes
Codec call selection codes affect voice quality. For more information about voice
codecs, see the Configuring Voice Codecs. You can choose a
preferred
codec
for a call or
force
a call to use a specific codec:
• Prefer
G.711u (*017110)
through
G.729a (*01729)
—Sets the preferred
codec for next outbound call. If the preferred codec is unavailable, the
second, then the third preferred codec is used, if specified.
• Force
G.711u (*027110)
through
G.729a (*02729)
—Forces the specified
codec for next outbound call. If the specified codec is unavailable, the
preferred codecs are used in order, if specified.
See Configuring Voice Codecs for more information.
Miscellaneous Parameters
This section describes Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) and localization
parameters:
DTMF Parameters
DTMF is used by touch-tone phones to assign a specific frequency (consisting of
two separate tones) to each key so that it can easily be identified by a
microprocessor.
In-Band and Out-of-Band (RFC-2833): IP phones can relay DTMF digits as
out-of-band events to preserve the fidelity of the digits. This can enhance the
reliability of DTMF transmission required by many IVR applications such as dial-up
banking and airline information.
The following parameters can either reduce false detection or get better detection
by the IVR. In general, the default values are recommended for both IVR functions.
•
DTMF Playback Level
: Local DTMF playback level in decibels per minute, up
to one decimal place. Applicable locally when a user presses a digit or when
the phone receives an out-of-band (OOB) DTMF signal from the network
side. Does not affect DTMF transmission. Defaults to -16.
•
DTMF Playback Length
: Local DTMF playback duration in milliseconds.
Affects only OOB. Defaults to .1.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Localizing Your IP Phone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 188
7
•
Inband DTMF Boost
: Controls the amount of amplification applied to DTMF
signals. Affects only tones sent by inband method. Choices are 0, 3, 6, 9, 12,
15, and 18 decibels. Defaults to 12 dB.
To support false detection, avoid inband and use OOB. With OOB, the DTMF
Playback Length does not matter. If you use inband, use a smaller DTMF Boost
value.
To get better detection by the IVR, avoid inband and use OOB. This way, the DTMF
tone is reconstructed by the PSTN gateway or the remote endpoint, and the
quality is not subject to distortion from the audio codec. If you use OOB, use a
slightly longer DTMF Playback Length.
If you use inband, use a higher Inband DTMF boost.
NOTE On the Cisco SPA525G2, when using the Mobile Link line (through the Bluetooth-
enabled mobile phone), the local user can hear a double tone (echo) when pressing
digits (DTMF tones) and engaged on a call. This can happen with certain mobile
phones that have the option to play locally the local tone (which is also played by
the Cisco SPA525G2). This does not affect operation with interactive voice
response applications, as the tone is audible only on the local device. See the Cisco
support community at http://www.cisco.com/go/smallbizsupport for phone
compatibility information, and also consult the latest Cisco SPA525G2 release
notes, available at cisco.com.
Localizing Your IP Phone
The following table describes the localization parameters in the Miscellaneous
section.
Field Description
Set Local Date
(mm/dd)
Enter the local date (
mm
represents the month and
dd
represents
the day). The year is optional and uses two or four digits. For
example,
May 1, 2008, can be entered as: 05/01 or 05/01/08 or
05/01/2008.
Set Local Time
(HH/mm)
Enter the local time (
hh
represents hours and
mm
represents
minutes). Seconds are optional.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Localizing Your IP Phone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 189
7
Managing the Time and Date
Cisco IP phones obtain the time settings in one of three ways:
• NTP Server—When the phone boots up, it tries to contact the first Network
Time Protocol (NTP) server to get the time. The phone periodically
synchronizes its time with the NTP server. The synchronization period is
fixed at 1 hour. Between updates the phone tracks time with its internal clock.
• SIP Messages—Each SIP message (request or response) sent to the phone
could contain a Date header with the current time information. If the header
is present, the phone uses it to set its clock.
Time Zone Selects the number of hours to add to GMT to generate the
local time for caller ID generation. Choices are GMT-12:00,
GMT-11:00,…, GMT, GMT+01:00, GMT+02:00, …,
GMT+13:00.
Defaults to GMT-08:00.
Time Offset (HH/
mm)
Enter the offset from GMT to use for the local system time.
Daylight Saving
Time Rule
Enter the rule for calculating daylight saving time. See
Configuring Daylight Saving Time.
Daylight Saving
Enable
Select yes to enable or no to disable DST on the phone.
This setting affects all lines (extensions) on the phone.
Dictionary Server
Script
Defines the location of the dictionary server, the languages
available, and the associated dictionary. See Creating a
Dictionary Server Script.
Language
Selection
Specifies the default language. The value must match one
of the languages supported by the dictionary server. The
script (dx value) is:
<Language_Selection ua="na">
</Language_Selection>
Defaults to blank; the maximum number of characters is
512. For example:
<Language_Selection ua="na"> Spanish
</Language_Selection>
Field Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Localizing Your IP Phone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 190
7
• Manual Setup—The time and date can be entered manually by using the IP
phone screen or the phone web user interface. However, this value is
overwritten by the NTP time or SIP Message Date whenever they are
available to the phone. Manual setup requires that you enter the time in
24-hour format only.
The time served by the NTP Server and the SIP Date Header are expressed in
GMT time. The local time is obtained by offsetting the GMT according to the time
zone of the region.
The
Time Zone
parameter can be configured by using the phone web user
interface or through provisioning. This time can be further offset by the
Time
Offset (HH/mm
) parameter. This parameter must be entered in 24-hour format and
can also be configured from the IP phone screen.
The
Time Zone
and
Time Offset (HH/mm)
offset values are
not
applied to manual
time and date setup.
Configuring Daylight Saving Time
The phone supports auto adjustment for daylight saving time. You must set
Daylight Savings Time Enable
to yes and enter the DST rule. This option affects the
time stamp on the
CallerID
.
To enter the rule for calculating DST, include the start, end, and save values
separated by semi-colons (;) as follows:
Start = start-time; end=end-time; save = save-time
For example, the default DST rule is:
start=4/1/7;end=10/-1/7;save=1.
The
start-time
and
end-time
values specify the start and end dates and times of
daylight saving time. The format is:
month/day/weekday[/HH:mm:ss]
The
month
value equals any value in the range 1-12 (January-December).
The
day
value equals any + or - value in the range 1-31. If value is -1, the time will
change on the weekday on or before the end of the month; the last occurrence of a
weekday in that month.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Localizing Your IP Phone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 191
7
The
weekday
value equals any value in the range -7 to 7 (Monday to Sunday). If the
weekday value is 0, the date to start or end daylight saving is exactly the month
and day. If the weekday value is -7 to 7, daylight saving starts or ends on the
weekday value on or after the month and day. If the weekday value is not 0 and the
day value is negative, then daylight saving starts or ends on the weekday value on
or before the month and day.
Optional time values:
HH
represents hours (0-23),
mm
represents minutes (0-59).
and
ss
represents seconds (0-59). Optional values inside brackets [ ] are assumed
to be 0 if not specified. Midnight is represented by 0:0:0.
The
save-time
value is the number of hours, minutes, and/or seconds to add to the
current time during DST. The
save-time
value cannot be a minus (-) in version 7.5.1
and higher. Earlier firmware versions support a negative value.
Daylight Saving Time Examples
The following example configures daylight saving time for the U.S, adding one hour
starting at midnight on the first Sunday in April and ending at midnight on the last
Sunday of October; add 1 hour (USA, North America):
start=4/1/7/0:0:0;end=10/31/7/0:0:0;save=1
start=4/1/7;end=10/-1/7;save=1
start=4/1/7/0;end=10/-1/7/0;save=1
The following example configures daylight saving time for Egypt, starting at
midnight on the last Sunday in April and ending at midnight on the last Sunday of
September:
start=4/-1/7;end=9/-1/7;save=1 (Egypt)
The following example configures daylight saving time for New Zealand (in version
7.5.1 and higher), starting at midnight on the first Sunday of October and ending at
midnight on the third Sunday of March.
start=10/1/7;end=3/22/7;save=1 (New Zealand)
The following example reflects the new change starting March 2007. DST starts on
the second Sunday in March and ends on the first Sunday in November:
start=3/8/7/02:0:0;end=11/1/7/02:0:0;save=1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Localizing Your IP Phone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 192
7
Selecting a Display Language
This section describes how to localize the Cisco SPA300 Series and
Cisco SPA500 Series IP Phone display language. You can define up to nine
languages, in addition to English, to be available and host the dictionaries for each
of the languages on the HTTP or TFTP provisioning server. Language support
follows Cisco dictionary principles.
NOTE The Cisco WIP310 does not support localization.
Use the Language Selection parameter to select the phone default display
language. The value must match one of the languages supported by the dictionary
server. The script (dx value) is as follows:
• <Language_Selection ua="na">
• </Language_Selection>
Defaults to blank; the maximum number of characters is 512. For example:
<Language_Selection ua="na"> Spanish
</Language_Selection>
During startup, the phone checks the selected language and downloads the
dictionary from the TFTP/HTTP provisioning server indicated in the phone
configuration. The dictionaries are available at the support website. See
Appendix B, “Where to Go From Here,” for the website location.
The end user can change the language of the phone on the phone by following
these steps:
STEP 1 Press the Setup button.
STEP 2 Select Language, then press the Select soft button.
STEP 3 Select Option to change the language.
STEP 4 With the desired language highlighted, press Save.
Creating a Dictionary Server Script
The Dictionary Server Script defines the location of the dictionary server, the
languages available and the associated dictionary. The syntax is:
Dictionary_Server_Script ua="na"/Dictionary_Server_Script
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Regional Parameters and Supplementary Services
Localizing Your IP Phone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 193
7
Defaults to blank; the maximum number of characters is 512. The detailed format is
as follows:
serv={server ip port and root path};
d0=language0;x0=dictionary0 filename;
d1=language1;x1=dictionary1 filename;
d2=language2;x2=dictionary2 filename;
d3=language3;x3=dictionary3 filename;
d4=language4;x4=dictionary4 filename;
d5=language5;x5=dictionary5 filename;
d6=language6;x6=dictionary6 filename;
d7=language3;x7=dictionary7 filename;
d8=language8;x8=dictionary8 filename;
d9=language5;x9=dictionary9 filename;
For example:
Dictionary_Server_Script ua="na"
serv=tftp://192.168.1.119/
;d0=English;x0=enS_v101.xml;d1=Spanish;x1=esS_v101.xml /
Dictionary_Server_Script
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
8
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 194
Configuring Dial Plans
Dial plans determine how the digits are interpreted and transmitted. They also
determine whether the dialed number is accepted or rejected. You can use a dial
plan to facilitate dialing or to block certain types of calls such as long distance or
international.
If the Cisco SPA IP phones are part of the Cisco SPA9000, dial plans are
configured on the Cisco SPA9000. In installations where a Cisco SPA9000 is not
present (such as IP Centrex installations), installations where the phones are
removed from the Cisco SPA9000 (such as by a VPN), or other situations, dial
plans can be configured on the IP phone by using the phone web user interface.
For more information on using dial plans on the Cisco SPA9000, see the
Cisco SPA9000 Administration Guide. See the Appendix B, “Where to Go From
Here,” for the location of the document.
This section includes information that you need to understand dial plans, as well as
procedures for configuring your own dial plans:
• About Dial Plans
• Editing Dial Plans on the IP Phone
• Resetting the Control Timers
About Dial Plans
The Cisco SPA IP phones and the Cisco SPA9000 are involved in applying various
levels of the dial plans and process the digits sequence in the same manner.
When a user lifts a handset or presses a speaker button on the IP phone, the
following sequence of events begins:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 195
8
1. The phone begins collecting the dialed digits. The inter-digit timers starts
tracking the time that elapses between digits.
2. If the inter-digit timer value is reached, or if another terminating event occurs, the
phone compares the dialed digits with the IP phone dial plan. (This dial plan is
configured in the phone web user interface in the Voice tab, on the tab for each
extension (Ext N), under the Dial Plan section.)
If the phone is part of a Cisco SPA9000:
3. If the phone dial plan allows the call to process, the dialed numbers are sent to
the Cisco SPA9000.
4. The Cisco SPA9000 compares the dialed digits to the CALL ROUTING RULE (on
SPA9000 Voice > SIP page in the PBX Parameters section).
5. If the call routing rule allows the call to process, then the Cisco SPA9000
compares the dialed digits to the LINE INTERFACE dial plan (on the
Cisco SPA9000 Voice > Line N page, Dial Plan).
6. The Cisco SPA9000 uses the information in the line dial plan to manipulate the
number (for example, to remove steering digits) and then transmits the number.
NOTE The dial plan feature (digit sequences and timers) is not used with the
Cisco SPA525G2 phone line associated to Mobile Link (a Bluetooth-enabled
mobile phone). Mobile phone dial plan rules continue to apply in this scenario.
Digit Sequences
A dial plan contains a series of digit sequences, separated by the | character. The
entire collection of sequences is enclosed within parentheses. Each digit
sequence within the dial plan consists of a series of elements that are individually
matched to the keys that the user presses.
White space is ignored, but can be used for readability.
Digit Sequence Function
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 * # Characters that represent a key that the user must
press on the phone keypad.
x Any character on the phone keypad.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 196
8
[sequence] Characters within square brackets create a list of
accepted key presses. The user can press any
one of the keys in the list.
A numeric range, for example, [2-9] allows a
user to press any one digit from 2 through 9.
A numeric range can include other characters. For
example, [35-8*] allows a user to press 3, 5, 6, 7,
8, or *.
.
(period)
A period indicates element repetition. The dial
plan accepts 0 or more entries of the digit. For
example, 01. allows users to enter 0, 01, 011,
0111, and so forth.
<dialed:substituted> This format indicates that certain dialed digits are
replaced by the substituted characters when the
sequence is transmitted. The dialed digits can be
zero to 9. For example:
<8:1650>xxxxxxx
When the user presses 8 followed by a
seven-digit number, the system automatically
replaces the dialed 8 with the sequence 1650. If
the user dials 85550112, the system transmits
16505550112.
If the dialed parameter is empty and there is a
value in the substituted field, no digits are
replaced and the substituted value is always
prepended to the transmitted string. For example:
<:1>xxxxxxxxxx
When the user dials 9725550112, the number 1
is added at the beginning of the sequence; the
system transmits 19725550112.
Digit Sequence Function
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 197
8
NOTE The Cisco SPA9000 and the Cisco IP phones implicitly append the vertical code
sequences entered in the regional parameter settings to the end of the dial plan.
Likewise, if Enable_IP_Dialing is enabled, IP dialing is also accepted on the
associated line.
,
(comma)
An intersequence tone played (and placed)
between digits plays an outside line dial tone. For
example:
9, 1xxxxxxxxxx
An outside line dial tone is sounded after the user
presses 9. The tone continues until the user
presses 1.
!
(exclamation point)
Prohibits a dial sequence pattern. For example:
1900xxxxxxx!
Rejects any 11-digit sequence that begins with
1900.
*xx Allows a user to enter a 2-digit star code.
S0 or L0 For Interdigit Timer Master Override, enter S0 to
reduce the short inter-digit timer to 0 seconds, or
enter L0 to reduce the long inter-digit timer to 0
seconds.
P To pause, enter P, the number of seconds to pause,
and a space. This feature is typically used for
implementation of a hot line and warm line, with a
0 delay for the hot line and a non-zero delay for a
warm line. For example:
EXAMPLE: P5
A pause of 5 seconds is introduced.
Digit Sequence Function
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 198
8
Digit Sequence Examples
The following examples show digit sequences that you can enter in a dial plan.
In a complete dial plan entry, sequences are separated by a pipe character (|), and
the entire set of sequences is enclosed within parentheses:
( [1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx | 9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx | 8,
<:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900 xxxxxxx ! |
9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]11 )
Extensions on your system:
(
[1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx | 9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx | 8,
<:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900 xxxxxxx
! | 9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]11 )
[1-8]xx Allows a user dial any three-digit number that starts with the digits 1
through 8. If your system uses four-digit extensions, you would instead enter
the following string:
[1-8]xxx
Local dialing with seven-digit number:
( [1-8]xx |
9, xxxxxxx | 9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx | 8,
<:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900 xxxxxxx
! | 9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]111)
9, xxxxxxx After a user presses 9, an external dial tone sounds. The user can
enter any seven-digit number, as in a local call.
Local dialing with 3-digit area code and a 7-digit local number:
( [1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx |
9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx | 8,
<:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900 xxxxxxx
! | 9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]11 )
9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx This example is useful where a local area code is
required. After a user presses 9, an external dial tone sounds. The user must
enter a 10-digit number that begins with a digit 2 through 9. The system
automatically inserts the 1 prefix before transmitting the number to the
carrier.
Local dialing with an automatically inserted 3-digit area code:
EXAMPLE: ( [1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx | 9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx
|
8, <:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900 xxxxxxx
! | 9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]11 )
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 199
8
8, <:1212>xxxxxxx This is example is useful where a local area code is
required by the carrier but the majority of calls go to one area code. After
the user presses 8, an external dial tone sounds. The user can enter any
seven-digit number. The system automatically inserts the 1 prefix and the
212 area code before transmitting the number to the carrier.
U.S. long distance dialing:
EXAMPLE: ( [1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx | 9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx
| 8, <:1212>xxxxxxx |
9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900 xxxxxxx !
| 9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]11 )
9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx After the user presses 9, an external dial tone sounds. The
user can enter any 11-digit number that starts with 1 and is followed by a
digit 2 through 9.
Blocked number:
EXAMPLE: ( [1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx | 9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx
| 8, <:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx |
9, 1 900 xxxxxxx
!
| 9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]11 )
9, 1 900 xxxxxxx ! This digit sequence is useful if you want to prevent users
from dialing numbers that are associated with high tolls or inappropriate
content, such as 1-900 numbers in the U.S.. After the user press 9, an
external dial tone sounds. If the user enters an 11-digit number that starts
with the digits 1900, the call is rejected.
U.S. international dialing:
EXAMPLE: ( [1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx | 9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx
| 8, <:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900
xxxxxxx ! |
9, 011xxxxxx. | 0 | [49]11 )
9, 011xxxxxx. After the user presses 9, an external dial tone sounds. The user
can enter any number that starts with 011, as in an international call from the
U.S.
Informational numbers:
EXAMPLE: ( [1-8]xx | 9, xxxxxxx |
9, <:1>[2-9]xxxxxxxxx |
8, <:1212>xxxxxxx | 9, 1 [2-9] xxxxxxxxx | 9, 1 900
xxxxxxx ! | 9, 011xxxxxx. |
0 | [49]11 )
0 | [49]11 This example includes two digit sequences, separated by the pipe
character. The first sequence allows a user to dial 0 for an operator. The
second sequence allows the user to enter 411 for local information or 911
for emergency services.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 200
8
Acceptance and Transmission of the Dialed Digits
When a user dials a series of digits, each sequence in the dial plan is tested as a
possible match. The matching sequences form a set of candidate digit sequences.
As more digits are entered by the user, the set of candidates diminishes until only
one or none are valid. When a terminating event occurs, the IP PBX either accepts
the user-dialed sequence and initiates a call, or else rejects the sequence as
invalid. The user hears the reorder (fast busy) tone if the dialed sequence is invalid.
The following table explains how terminating events are processed.
Terminating Event Processing
Dialed digits do not match any
sequence in the dial plan.
The number is rejected.
Dialed digits exactly match one
sequence in the dial plan.
If the sequence is allowed by the dial plan,
the number is accepted and is transmitted
according to the dial plan.
If the sequence is blocked by the dial plan,
the number is rejected.
A timeout occurs. The number is rejected if the dialed digits are
not matched to a digit sequence in the dial
plan within the time specified by the
applicable interdigit timer.
The Interdigit Long Timer applies when the
dialed digits do not match any digit sequence
in the dial plan. The default value is 10
seconds.
The Interdigit Short Timer applies when the
dialed digits match one or more candidate
sequences in the dial plan. The default value
is 3 seconds.
A user presses the # key or the
dial softkey on the IP phone
screen.
If the sequence is complete and is allowed by
the dial plan, the number is accepted and is
transmitted according to the dial plan.
If the sequence is incomplete or is blocked by
the dial plan, the number is rejected.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 201
8
Dial Plan Timer (Off-Hook Timer)
You can think of the Dial Plan Timer as the off-hook timer. This timer starts when
the phone goes off hook. If no digits are dialed within the specified number of
seconds, the timer expires and the null entry is evaluated. Unless you have a
special dial plan string to allow a null entry, the call is rejected. The default value
is 5.
Syntax for the Dial Plan Timer
SYNTAX: (Ps<:n> | dial plan )
• s: The number of seconds; if no number is entered after P, the default timer
of 5 seconds applies. With the timer set to 0 seconds, the call is transmitted
automatically to the specified extension when the phone goes off hook.
• n: (optional): The number to transmit automatically when the timer expires;
you can enter an extension number or a DID number. No wildcard characters
are allowed because the number will be transmitted as shown. If you omit
the number substitution, <:n>, then the user hears a reorder (fast busy) tone
after the specified number of seconds.
Examples for the Dial Plan Timer
Allow more time for users to start dialing after taking a phone off hook:
EXAMPLE: (
P9 | (9,8<:1408>[2-9]xxxxxx | 9,8,1[2-
9]xxxxxxxxx | 9,8,011xx. | 9,8,xx.|[1-8]xx)
P9 After taking a phone off hook, a user has 9 seconds to begin dialing. If no
digits are pressed within 9 seconds, the user hears a reorder (fast busy)
tone. By setting a longer timer, you allow more time for users to enter the
digits.
Create a hotline for all sequences on the System Dial Plan:
EXAMPLE: (
P9<:23> | (9,8<:1408>[2-9]xxxxxx | 9,8,1[2-
9]xxxxxxxxx | 9,8,011xx. | 9,8,xx.|[1-8]xx)
P9<:23> After taking the phone off hook, a user has 9 seconds to begin
dialing. If no digits are pressed within 9 seconds, the call is transmitted
automatically to extension 23.
Create a hotline on a line button for an extension:
EXAMPLE:
( P0 <:1000>)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 202
8
With the timer set to 0 seconds, the call is transmitted automatically to the
specified extension when the phone goes off hook. Enter this sequence in
the Phone Dial Plan for Ext 2 or higher on a client phone.
Interdigit Long Timer (Incomplete Entry Timer)
You can think of this timer as the incomplete entry timer. This timer measures the
interval between dialed digits. It applies as long as the dialed digits do not match
any digit sequences in the dial plan. Unless the user enters another digit within the
specified number of seconds, the entry is evaluated as incomplete, and the call is
rejected. The default value is 10 seconds.
This section explains how to edit a timer as part of a dial plan. Alternatively, you
can modify the Control Timer that controls the default interdigit timers for all calls.
See Resetting the Control Timers.
Syntax for the Interdigit Long Timer
SYNTAX: L:s, ( dial plan )
• s: The number of seconds; if no number is entered after L:, the default timer
is 5 seconds. With the timer set to 0 seconds, the call is transmitted
automatically to the specified extension when the phone goes off hook.
• Note that the timer sequence appears to the left of the initial parenthesis for
the dial plan.
Example for the Interdigit Long Timer
EXAMPLE: L:15, (9,8<:1408>[2-9]xxxxxx | 9,8,1[2-9]xxxxxxxxx |
9,8,011xx. | 9,8,xx.|[1-8]xx)
L:15, This dial plan allows the user to pause for up to 15 seconds between digits
before the Interdigit Long Timer expires. This setting is especially helpful to users
such as sales people, who are reading the numbers from business cards and other
printed materials while dialing.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
About Dial Plans
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 203
8
Interdigit Short Timer (Complete Entry Timer)
You can think of this timer as the “complete entry” timer. This timer measures the
interval between dialed digits. It applies when the dialed digits match at least one
digit sequence in the dial plan. Unless the user enters another digit within the
specified number of seconds, the entry is evaluated. If it is valid, the call proceeds.
If it is invalid, the call is rejected. The default value is 3 seconds.
Syntax for the Interdigit Short Timer
SYNTAX 1: S:s, ( dial plan )
Use this syntax to apply the new setting to the entire dial plan within the
parentheses.
SYNTAX 2: sequence Ss
Use this syntax to apply the new setting to a particular dialing sequence.
s: The number of seconds; if no number is entered after S, the default timer
of 5 seconds applies.
Examples for the Interdigit Short Timer
Set the timer for the entire dial plan:
EXAMPLE:
S:6, (9,8<:1408>[2-9]xxxxxx | 9,8,1[2-
9]xxxxxxxxx | 9,8,011xx. | 9,8,xx.|[1-8]xx)
S:6, While entering a number with the phone off hook, a user can pause for
up to 15 seconds between digits before the Interdigit Short Timer expires.
This setting is especially helpful to users such as sales people, who are
reading the numbers from business cards and other printed materials while
dialing.
Set an instant timer for a particular sequence within the dial plan:
EXAMPLE: (9,8<:1408>[2-9]xxxxxx |
9,8,1[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0 |
9,8,011xx. | 9,8,xx.|[1-8]xx)
9,8,1[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0 With the timer set to 0, the call is transmitted
automatically when the user dials the final digit in the sequence.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
Editing Dial Plans on the IP Phone
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 204
8
Editing Dial Plans on the IP Phone
You can edit dial plans and modify the control timers. To edit the dial plans on the
IP phone:
STEP 1 Navigate to Admin Login > advanced > Voice.
STEP 2 Click the Ext
N
tab, where
N
is the extension being configured.
STEP 3 In the Dial Plan section, enter the digit sequences in the Dial Plan field. For more
information and examples, see Digit Sequences.
The default (US-based) system-wide dial plan appears automatically in the
field. You can delete digit sequences, add digit sequences, or replace the
entire dial plan with a new dial plan. For more information and examples, see
Digit Sequences.
Separate each digit sequence with a pipe character, and enclose the entire
set of digit sequences within parentheses. Refer to the following example:
(9,8<:1408>[2-9]xxxxxx | 9,8,1[2-9]xxxxxxxxx |
9,8,011xx. | 9,8,xx.|[1-8]xx)
STEP 4 (Optional) Enter the Caller ID Map—Inbound caller ID numbers can be mapped to a
different string. For example, a number that begins with +44xxxxxx can be
mapped to 0xxxxxx. This feature has the same syntax as the Dial Plan parameter.
With this parameter, you can specify how to map a caller ID number for display on
screen and recorded into call logs. (Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.)
STEP 5 (Optional) Enable IP dialing—Enable or disable IP dialing. Defaults to no.
STEP 6 (Optional) Emergency Number—Enter a comma-separated list of emergency
numbers. When one of these numbers is dialed, the unit disables processing of
CONF
,
HOLD
, and other similar softkeys or buttons to avoid accidentally putting the
current call on hold. The phone also disables hook flash event handling. Only the
far end can terminate an emergency call. The phone is restored to normal after the
call is terminated and the phone is back on-hook.
Maximum number length is 63 characters. Defaults to blank (no emergency
number). (Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.)
STEP 7 Click Submit All Changes. The phone reboots.
STEP 8 If you need to configure a dial plan for any other extensions on the phone
(depending on the model), click the appropriate Extension tab, enter the dial plan,
and submit the changes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring Dial Plans
Resetting the Control Timers
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 205
8
STEP 9 Verify that you can successfully complete a call using each digit sequence that
you entered in the dial plan.
NOTE If you hear a reorder (fast busy) tone, you need to review your entries and modify
the dial plan appropriately. See Digit Sequences.
Resetting the Control Timers
You can use the following procedure to reset the default timer settings for all calls.
If you need to edit a timer setting only for a particular digit sequence or type of
call, you can edit the dial plan. See About Dial Plans.
STEP 1 Log in to the phone web user interface.
STEP 2 Click Admin Login and advanced.
STEP 3 Click Voice > Regional.
STEP 4 Scroll down to the Control Timer Values section.
STEP 5 Enter the desired values in the Interdigit Long Timer field and the Interdigit Short
Timer field. Refer to the definitions at the beginning of this section.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
9
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 206
Configuring LED Patterns
You can customize the LED patterns for the line keys.
To configure Line Key LED patterns:
STEP 1 Click Admin Login > advanced > Voice > Phone
STEP 2 Under Line Key LED Pattern, use the following letters to customize the fields
shown in the following table:
• p indicates pattern: the blinking pattern of the LED
• c indicates color: the color setting of the LED
• r indicates red: a red-colored LED
• g indicates green: a green-colored LED
Parameters Description
Idle LED The line is idle.
Defaults to blank (c=r).
Remote Undefined
LED
The Remote Undefined state pattern, where the shared
call state is undefined (the phone is still waiting for the
state information from the application server). Not
applicable if the call appearance is not shared. Leaving
this entry blank indicates the default value of c=r;p=d.
Local Seized LED This phone seized the call appearance in preparation for
a new outbound call.
Defaults to blank (c=r).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring LED Patterns
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 207
9
Remote Seized LED
(applicable only to
shared call
appearance)
The shared call appearance was seized by another
phone.
Defaults to blank (c=r; p=d).
Local Progressing
LED
This phone attempts an outgoing call on this call
appearance (the called number is ringing).
Defaults to blank (c=r).
Remote
Progressing LED
(applicable only to
shared call
appearance)
Another phone attempts an outbound call on this shared
call appearance.
Defaults to blank (c=r; p=d).
Local Ringing LED The call appearance is ringing.
Defaults to blank (c=r;p=f).
Remote Ringing
LED (applicable
only to shared call
appearance)
The shared call appearance is in ringing on another
phone.
Defaults to blank (c=r;p=d).
Local Active LED The call appearance is engaged in an active call.
Defaults to blank (c=r).
Remote Active LED
(applicable only to
shared call
appearance)
Another phone is engaged in an active call on this shared
call appearance.
Defaults to blank (c=r;p=d).
Local Held LED The call appearance is held by this phone.
Defaults to blank (c=r;p=s).
Remote Held LED
(applicable only to
shared call
appearance)
Another phone placed this call appearance on hold.
Defaults to blank (c=r,p=s).
Register Failed LED The corresponding extension has failed to register with
the proxy server. Leaving this entry blank defaults to c=a.
Parameters Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring LED Patterns
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 208
9
STEP 3 Click Submit All Changes.
LED Script
The LED script describes the color and blinking pattern of a Line Key LED. Each
script contains a number of fields separated by a semicolon(;). White spaces are
ignored. Each field has the syntax <field-name> = <field-value>. The allowed field-
name and corresponding field-values are listed below:
c=o|r|g|a
This field sets the color of the LED. The 4 choices are:
• o = off
• r = red
• g = green
• a = amber (orange)
p=n[b]|s[b]|f[b]|d[b]|u[d]
This field sets the blinking pattern of the LED. The 4 choices are:
• nb = no blink (steady on or off)
• sb = slow blink (1s on and 1s off)
• fb = fast blink (100ms on and 100ms off)
• ud = user-defined (according to the contents of the u field)
Disabled LED Call Appearance is disabled (not available for any
incoming or outgoing call). Leaving this entry blank
defaults to c=o.
Registering LED The corresponding extension tries to register with the
proxy server.
Defaults to blanks (c=r;p=s).
Call Back Active
LED
Call Back operation is currently active on this call.
Defaults to blank (c=r;p=s).
Parameters Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring LED Patterns
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 209
9
u=on/off/on/off/etc.
This is a user-defined blinking pattern used only when p = ud. It consists of up to 4
pairs of on/off duration in seconds with up to 2 decimal places; each value is
separated by a forward slash (/).
LED Script Examples
c=r;p=sb
Color is red and pattern is slow blink.
c=o
LED is off.
c=g
Color is green and pattern is steady on (default).
c=a;p=ud;u=.1/.1/.1/.1/.1/.9
Color is amber (orange) and the blink pattern is: 100ms on, 100ms off, 100ms on,
100ms off, 100ms on, 900ms off
LED Pattern
The administrator can also specify a different color and pattern for each of the
following states of the call appearance.
• Idle: This call appearance is not in use. It can be used to make outbound call
on this phone
• Local Seized: This call appearance has been seized by this phone to
prepare for an outbound call
• Local Progressing: This phone is making an outbound call that is
progressing
• Local Active: This phone is engaged in a connected call on this call
appearance
• Local Ringing: This phone is ringing for an incoming call on this call
appearance
• Local Held: This phone has placed this call appearance on hold
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuring LED Patterns
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 210
9
• Remote Seized: This call appearance has been seized by another phone to
prepare for an outbound call
• Remote Progressing: Another phone is making a call on this call appearance
and is progressing
• Remote Active: Another phone is engaged in a connected call on this call
appearance
• Remote Ringing: Another phone is ringing for an incoming call to this call
appearance
• Remote Held: Another phone has placed this call appearance on hold
• Remote Undefined: The share call state is not known (this phone is waiting
for a notification from the application server)
• Registration Failed: This phone has failed to register with the proxy server
for the corresponding extension
• Registering: The phone is attempting registration with the proxy server for
the corresponding extension.
• Disabled: This line key on this phone is disabled
• Call Back: A call back (repeat dialing) operation is currently active on this
call appearance
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 211
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
This appendix describes the fields within the following sections of the phone web
user interface:
• Info Tab
• System Tab
• SIP Tab
• Provisioning Tab
• Regional Tab
• Phone Tab
• Ext Tab
• User Tab
• Attendant Console Tab (Cisco SPA500 Series)
• Attendant Console Status
• Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2-Specific Tabs
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 212
A
Info Tab
The fields on this tab are read-only and cannot be edited.
System Information
Parameter Description
Connection Type Indicates the type of internet connection for the
phone:
•DHCP
• Static IP
• PPPoE (only applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2)
Current IP Displays the current IP address assigned to the IP
phone.
Host Name Displays the current host name assigned to the
SPA9000 (defaults to SipuraSPA).
Domain Displays the network domain name of the
SPA9000.
Current Netmask Displays the network mask assigned to the
SPA9000.
Current Gateway Displays the default router assigned to the
SPA9000.
Primary DNS Displays the primary DNS server assigned to the
SPA9000.
Secondary DNS Displays the secondary DNS server assigned to
the SPA9000.
Reboot History Stores information about the last reboot/refresh
reasons. When the phone is reset to factory
defaults, this information is deleted. For each
reboot, this parameter provides a reason and a
time stamp.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 213
A
NTP Enable
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows if Network Time Protocol is enabled.
Primary NTP Server
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
IP Address of the primary NTP server.
Secondary NTP Server
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
IP Address of the secondary NTP server.
TFTP Server
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Address of the TFTP server for provisioning.
Bluetooth Enabled
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows if Bluetooth is enabled.
Bluetooth Firmware
Version (
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Displays the Bluetooth firmware version.
Bluetooth Connected
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows if a Bluetooth device is connected to the
phone.
Bluetooth MAC
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows the hardware address of the Bluetooth
device.
Connected Device ID
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows the name of the connected Bluetooth
device.
Wireless Enabled
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows if Wireless-G is enabled on the phone.
Wireless Connected
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows if the phone is connected to the wireless
network.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 214
A
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2-Specific Parameters:
Wireless MAC
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows the hardware address of the Wireless-G
controller.
SSID
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows the SSID, or name of the wireless router to
which the phone is connected.
Standard Channel
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows the wireless channel being used in the
wireless connection.
Security Mode
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Shows if wireless security is configured on the
phone (yes or no).
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
NTP Enable Shows if Network Time Protocol is enabled.
Primary NTP Server IP Address of the primary NTP server.
Secondary NTP Server IP Address of the secondary NTP server.
TFTP Server Address of the TFTP server for provisioning.
Bluetooth Enabled Shows if Bluetooth is enabled.
Bluetooth Firmware
Version
Displays the Bluetooth firmware version.
Bluetooth Connected Shows if a Bluetooth device is connected to the
phone.
Bluetooth MAC Shows the hardware address of the Bluetooth
device.
Connected Device ID Shows the name of the connected Bluetooth
device.
Wireless Enabled Shows if Wireless-G is enabled on the phone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 215
A
Network Configuration (SPCP)
Wireless Connected Shows if the phone is connected to the wireless
network.
Wireless MAC Shows the hardware address of the Wireless-G
controller.
SSID Shows the SSID, or name of the wireless router to
which the phone is connected.
Standard Channel Shows the wireless channel being used in the
wireless connection.
Security Mode Shows if wireless security is configured on the
phone (yes or no).
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
TFTP Server Address of the TFTP server for provisioning.
Call Manager IP address of the Unified Communications server.
Directories URL Populated by the Unified Communications Server;
points to the directory application server.
Services URL Populated by the Unified Communications Server;
points to the Cisco XML application server.
Authentication URL Populated by the Unified Communications Server;
points to the authentication server.
DHCP Address Released Populated by the Unified Communications Server;
indicates if the DHCP address has been released.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 216
A
VPN Status (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only)
Product Information
Parameter Description
VPN Connected Indicates if the phone is connected to a VPN.
Client Address IP address given to the phone from the VPN
server.
Client Netmask Netmask given to the phone from the VPN server.
Bytes Sent Size of data sent from the phone.
Bytes Recv Size of data received by the phone.
Parameter Description
Product Name Model number of the IP phone.
Serial Number Serial number of the IP phone.
Software Version Version number of the IP phone software.
Hardware Version Version number of the IP phone hardware.
MAC Address Hardware address of the IP phone.
Client Certificate Status of the client certificate, which
authenticates the IP phone for use in the ITSP
network. This field indicates if the client certificate
is properly installed in the IP phone.
Customization For an RC unit, this field indicates whether the unit
has been customized or not. Pending indicates a
new RC unit that is ready for provisioning. If the
unit has already retrieved its customized profile,
this field displays the name of the company that
provisioned the unit.
Licenses Indicates any additional licenses that you have
installed in the IP phone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 217
A
Phone Status
Parameter Description
Current Time Current date and time of the system; for example,
10/3/2003 16:43:00.
Elapsed Time Total time elapsed since the last reboot of the
system; for example, 25 days and 18:12:36.
Broadcast Pkts Sent Total number of broadcast packets sent.
Broadcast Bytes Sent Total number of broadcast packets received.
Broadcast Pkts Recv Total number of broadcast bytes sent.
Broadcast Bytes Recv Total number of broadcast bytes received and
processed.
Broadcast Pkts Dropped Total number of broadcast packets received but
not processed. Most codecs can handle up to 5%
random packet drops as long as the packets are
random and not in groups of two or more.
Concurrent packet drops result in voice quality
issues.
Broadcast Bytes Dropped Total number of broadcast bytes received but not
processed.
RTP Packets Sent Total number of RTP packets sent (including
redundant packets).
RTP Bytes Sent Total number of RTP packets received (including
redundant packets).
RTP Packets Recv Total number of RTP bytes sent.
RTP Bytes Recv Total number of RTP bytes received.
SIP Messages Sent Total number of SIP messages sent (including
retransmissions).
SIP Bytes Sent Total number of SIP messages received (including
retransmissions).
SIP Messages Recv Total number of bytes of SIP messages sent
(including retransmissions).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 218
A
Ext Status
The following parameters show for each extension on the phone.
SIP Bytes Recv Total number of bytes of SIP messages received
(including retransmissions).
External IP External IP address used for NAT mapping.
Operational VLAN ID ID of the VLAN currently in use if applicable.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.
SW Port (Cisco SPA300
Series and Cisco SPA500
Series)
Displays the type of Ethernet connection from the
IP phone to the switch.
PC Port (Cisco SPA303
and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Indicates whether the link from the IP phone to a
device plugged into the PC port on the phone is
up or down.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Registration State Shows “Registered” if the phone is registered,
“Not Registered” if the phone is not registered to
the ITSP.
Last Registration At Last date and time the line was registered.
Next Registration In Number of seconds before the next registration
renewal.
Message Waiting Indicates whether the phone user has a new voice
mail waiting: Yes or No. This is updated when
voice mail notification is received.
Mapped SIP Port Port number of the SIP port mapped by NAT.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 219
A
Line/Call Status
The following parameters show for each line and call on the phone.
Parameter Description
Call State Status of the call.
Tone Type of tone used by the call.
Encoder Codec used for encoding.
Decoder Codec used for decoding.
Type Direction of the call.
Remote Hold Indicates whether the far end has placed the call
on hold.
Callback Indicates whether the call was triggered by a call
back request.
Peer Name Name of the internal phone.
Peer Phone Phone number of the internal phone.
Duration Duration of the call.
Packets Sent Number of packets sent.
Packets Recv Number of packets received.
Bytes Sent Number of bytes sent.
Bytes Recv Number of bytes received.
Mapped RTP Port The port mapped for Real Time Protocol traffic for
the call.
Media Loopback If the call is a loopback call, displays the loopback
mode (source or mirror) and type (media or
packet). If the call is not loopback, the field appears
blank.
Decode Latency Number of milliseconds for decoder latency.
Jitter Number of milliseconds for receiver jitter.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 220
A
Round Trip Delay Number of milliseconds for delay in the RTP-to-RTP
interface round trip.
End System Delay Number of milliseconds for delay in the internal
round trip within the reporting endpoint.
Packets Lost Number of packets lost.
Packet Error Number of invalid packets received.
Loss Rate The fraction of RTP data packets from the source
lost since the beginning of reception. Defined in
RFC-3611—RTP Control Protocol Extended
Reports (RTCP XR).
Discard Rate The fraction of RTP data packets from the source
that have been discarded since the beginning of
reception, due to late or early arrival, under-run or
overflow at the receiving jitter buffer. Defined in
RFC-3611—RTP Control Protocol Extended
Reports (RTCP XR).
Burst Duration The mean duration, expressed in milliseconds, of
the burst periods that have occurred since the
beginning of reception. Defined in RFC-3611—RTP
Control Protocol Extended Reports (RTCP XR).
Gap Duration The mean duration, expressed in milliseconds, of
the gap periods that have occurred since the
beginning of reception. Defined in RFC-3611—RTP
Control Protocol Extended Reports (RTCP XR).
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Info Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 221
A
Downloaded Ring Tone
R Factor Voice quality metric describing the segment of the
call that is carried over this RTP session. Defined in
RFC-3611—RTP Control Protocol Extended
Reports (RTCP XR).
MOS-LQ/MOS Listening The estimated mean opinion score for listening
quality (MOS-LQ) is a voice quality metric on a
scale from 1 to 5, in which 5 represents excellent
and 1 represents unacceptable. Defined in
RFC-3611—RTP Control Protocol Extended
Reports (RTCP XR).
MOS-CQ/MOS
Conversational
The estimated mean opinion score for
conversational quality (MOS-CQ) is defined as
including the effects of delay and other effects that
would affect conversational quality. Defined in
RFC-3611—RTP Control Protocol Extended
Reports (RTCP XR).
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Status Indicates whether the phone is downloading a
ring tone (and from where) or if it is idle.
Ring Tone 1 Information about the user downloaded ring tone
1: name, size, and time-stamp of the tone.
Ring Tone 2 Information about the user downloaded ring tone
2: name, size, and time-stamp of the tone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 222
A
System Tab
System Configuration
Parameter Description
Restricted Access
Domains
(SIP)
This feature is used when implementing software
customization.
Enable Web Server Enable/disable web server of the IP phone.
Defaults to yes.
Web Server Port Port number of the phone web user interface.
Defaults to 80.
SPA525-http-write
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 SPCP
only)
Allow Cisco Configuration Assistant (CCA) or
other application to write XML file parameters
directly to the phone using HTTP.
Choose yes to allow this feature, or no to disable
this feature.
Enable Web Admin Access Lets you enable or disable local access to the
phone web user interface. Select yes or no from
the drop-down menu.
Defaults to yes.
Admin Passwd Password for the administrator.
Defaults to no password.
User Password Password for the user.
Defaults to no password.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 223
A
SPA525-protocol
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Allows you to choose the type of protocol for the
phone:
• SIP—Session Initiation Protocol. Choose if the
phone is used with a SIP call control system, such
as the
Cisco SPA9000 or a SIP call control system
from another provider such as BroadSoft or
Asterisk.
• SPCP—Smart Phone Control Protocol. Choose if
the phone is used with a Cisco Unified
Communications Series server, such as the Cisco
Unified Communications 500 Series for Small
Business.
SPA525-auto-detect-sccp
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Choose if the phone should automatically detect
the type of protocol used on the network to which
it is connected. If set to yes, the phone
automatically discovers if it is connected to a call
control system using SPCP.
SPA525-readonly
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only)
If set to yes, the Signaling Protocol and Auto
Detect SCCP Settings on the phone are read only.
If set to no, the above settings on the phone can
be changed by the end user.
Phone-UI-user-mode Allows you to restrict the menus and options that
phone users see when they use the phone
interface. Choose yes to enable this parameter
and restrict access. The default is no.
Specific parameters are then designated as “na”
or “ro” using provisioning files. Parameters
designated as “na” will not appear on the phone
interface. Parameters designated as “ro” will not
be editable by the user.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 224
A
Internet Connection Type and Static IP Settings
Parameter Description
Internet Connection Type Choose the type of internet connection:
•DHCP
• Static IP
• PPPoE (not applicable to
Cisco WIP310)
Static IP If static IP was chosen as the type of internet
connection, displays the static IP address
assigned to the phone.
Netmask If static IP was chosen as the type
Gateway Default router IP address. Blank if DHCP assigned.
LAN MTU LAN Maximum Transmission Unit size. Default
value: 1500.
Ethernet MTU
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 SPCP
only)
Ethernet Maximum Transmission Unit size. Default
value: 1500.
Duplex Mode Duplex Mode—Choose one of the following to
configure the speed/duplex for the phone
Ethernet ports:
•Auto
• 10MBps/Duplex
• 10MBps/Half
• 100Mbps/Duplex
• 100MBps/Half
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 225
A
Power Settings (Cisco SPA500 Series or Cisco SPA300
Series Only)
PPPoE Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only)
Parameter Description
PoE Power Required Specifies the PoE power setting: Normal (default)
or Maximum.
When one or more attendant consoles are
attached to the phone, use Maximum to advertise
to a PoE switch that the phone will consume up to
12 watts.
When no attendant consoles are attached, use
Minimum to advertise a required power budget of
6.5 watts.
This parameter is not applicable to Cisco SPA301
or SPA303 as they do not have Cisco Attendant
Console support.
Parameter Description
PPPoE Login Name Specifies the account name assigned by the ISP
for connecting on a Point-to-Point Protocol over
Ethernet (PPPoE) link.
PPPoE Login Password Specifies the password assigned by the ISP for
connecting on a Point-to-Point Protocol over
Ethernet (PPPoE) link.
PPPoE Service Name Specifies the service name assigned by the ISP
for connecting on a Point-to-Point Protocol over
Ethernet (PPPoE) link.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 226
A
Optional Network Configuration
Parameter Description
Host Name The host name of the SPA9000.
Domain The network domain of the SPA9000.
Primary DNS DNS server used by SPA9000 in addition to DHCP
supplied DNS servers if DHCP is enabled; when
DHCP is disabled, this is the primary DNS server.
Defaults to 0.0.0.0.
Secondary DNS DNS server used by SPA9000 in addition to DHCP
supplied DNS servers if DHCP is enabled; when
DHCP is disabled, this is the secondary DNS
server.
Defaults to 0.0.0.0.
DNS Server Order Specifies the method for selecting the DNS
server. The options are Manual, Manual/DHCP, and
DHCP/Manual.
DNS Query Mode Do parallel or sequential DNS Query. With parallel
DNS query mode, the SPA9000 sends the same
request to all the DNS servers at the same time
when doing a DNS lookup, the first incoming reply
is accepted by the SPA9000.
Defaults to parallel.
Syslog Server Specify the syslog server name and port. This
feature specifies the server for logging IP phone
system information and critical events. If both
Debug Server and Syslog Server are specified,
Syslog messages are also logged to the Debug
Server.
Debug Server The debug server name and port. This feature
specifies the server for logging IP phone debug
information. The level of detailed output depends
on the debug level parameter setting.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 227
A
VLAN Settings
Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Debug Level The debug level from 0-3. The higher the level, the
more debug information is generated. Zero (0)
means no debug information is generated. To log
SIP messages, you must set the Debug Level to at
least 2.
Defaults to 0.
Primary NTP Server IP address or name of primary NTP server.
Secondary NTP Server IP address or name of secondary NTP server.
Enable Bonjour
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Enable Bonjour networking that is used by Office
Manager and Cisco Configuration Assistant to
discover the Cisco IP phones. Choose yes to
enable or no to disable.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Enable VLAN Choose Ye s to enable VLAN. Choose no to
disable.
VLAN ID If you use a VLAN without CDP (VLAN enabled
and CDP disabled), enter a
VLAN ID
for the IP
phone. Note that only voice packets are tagged
with the VLAN ID. Do not use 1 for the VLAN ID.
Enable PC Port VLAN
Tagging
Enables VLAN and priority tagging on the phone
data port (802.1p/q). This feature facilities tagging
of the VLAN ID (802.1Q) and priority bits (802.1p)
of the traffic coming from the PC port of the IP
phone.
Defaults to No. Choose Yes to enable the tagging
algorithm.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 228
A
PC Port VLAN Highest
Priority
0-7 (default 0). The priority applied to all frames,
tagged and untagged. The phone modifies the
frame priority only if the incoming frame priority is
higher than this value.
PC Port VLAN ID 0-4095 (default 0). Value of the VLAN ID. The
phone tags all the untagged frames coming from
the PC (it will not tag frames with an existing tag).
Enable CDP Enable CDP only if you are using a switch that has
Cisco Discovery Protocol. CDP is negotiation
based and determines which VLAN the IP phone
resides in.
Enable LLDP-MED Choose yes to enable LLDP-MED for the phone to
advertise itself to devices that use that discovery
protocol.
When the LLDP-MED feature is enabled, after the
phone has initialized and Layer 2 connectivity is
established, the phone sends out LLDP-MED PDU
frames. If the phone receives no
acknowledgment, the manually configured VLAN
or default VLAN will be used if applicable. If the
CDP is used concurrently, the waiting period of 6
seconds is used. The waiting period will increase
the overall startup time for the phone.
Network Startup Delay Setting this value causes a delay for the switch to
get to the forwarding state before the phone will
send out the first LLDP-MED packet. The default
delay is 3 seconds. For configuration of some
switches, you might need to increase this value to
a higher value for LLDP-MED to work. Configuring
a delay can be important for networks that use
Spanning Tree Protocol.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
System Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 229
A
Wi-Fi Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only)
Bluetooth Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Only)
VPN Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only)
Parameter Description
SPA525-wifi-on Set to yes to enable Wireless-G service.
Parameter Description
Enable BT Set to yes to enable support for Bluetooth
devices.
Parameter Description
VPN Server The IP address of the VPN server to which the
phone connects.
VPN User Name Username configured on the VPN server for the
phone.
VPN Password Password associated with the username
configured on the VPN for the phone.
VPN Tunnel Group (Optional) The tunnel group, if required by the
VPN server.
Connect on Bootup If the phone should attempt to connect to the
VPN each time it is powered on. Choose yes to
have the phone try to automatically connect, or
no to keep the default behavior.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 230
A
SIP Tab
This section describes the fields for the SIP tab.
SIP Parameters
Parameter Description
Max Forward SIP Max Forward value, which can range from 1 to
255.
Defaults to 70.
Max Redirection Number of times an invite can be redirected to
avoid an infinite loop.
Defaults to 5.
Max Auth Maximum number of times (from 0 to 255) a
request may be challenged.
Defaults to 2.
SIP User Agent Name Used in outbound REGISTER requests.
Defaults to $VERSION. If empty, the header is not
included. Macro expansion of $A to $D
corresponding to GPP_A to GPP_D allowed.
SIP Server Name Server header used in responses to inbound
responses.
Defaults to $VERSION.
SIP Reg User Agent Name User-Agent name to be used in a REGISTER
request. If this is not specified, the <SIP User
Agent Name> is also used for the REGISTER
request.
Defaults to blank.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 231
A
SIP Accept Language Accept-Language header used. To access, click
the SIP tab, and fill in the SIP Accept Language
field.
There is no default (this indicates SPA9000 does
not include this header). If empty, the header is not
included.
DTMF Relay MIME Type MIME Type used in a SIP INFO message to signal
a DTMF event. This field must match that of the
Service Provider.
Defaults to application/dtmf-relay.
Hook Flash MIME Type MIME Type used in a SIP INFO message to signal
a hook flash event.
The default is application/hook-flash.
Remove Last Reg Lets you remove the last registration before
registering a new one if the value is different.
Select yes or no from the drop-down menu.
Defaults to no.
Use Compact Header Lets you use compact SIP headers in outbound
SIP messages. Select yes or no from the drop-
down menu. If set to yes, the phone uses compact
SIP headers in outbound SIP messages. If set to
no, the phone uses normal SIP headers. If inbound
SIP requests contain compact headers, the phone
reuses the same compact headers when
generating the response regardless the settings
of the <Use Compact Header> parameter. If
inbound SIP requests contain normal headers, the
phone substitutes those headers with compact
headers (if defined by RFC-261) if <Use Compact
Header> parameter is set to yes.
Default: no
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 232
A
Escape Display Name Lets you keep the Display Name private. Select
yes if you want the IP phone to enclose the string
(configured in the Display Name) in a pair of
double quotes for outbound SIP messages. Any
occurrences of or \ in the string is escaped with \
and \\ inside the pair of double quotes. Otherwise,
select no.
Defaults to yes.
SIP-B Enable Enables SIP for Business (supports Sylantro call
flows) call features.
Talk Package Enables support for the BroadSoft Talk Package,
which enables a user to answer or resume a call
by clicking a button in an external application.
Hold Package Enables support for the BroadSoft Hold Package,
which enables a user to place a call on hold by
clicking a button in an external application.
Conference Package Enables support for the BroadSoft Conference
Package, which enables a user to start a
conference by clicking a button in an external
application.
Notify Conference If enabled, the unit will send out a NOTIFY with
event=conference when starting a conference.
RFC 2543 Call Hold If set to yes, unit will include c=0.0.0.0 syntax in
SDP when sending a SIP re-INVITE to the peer to
hold the call. If set to no, unit will not include the
c=0.0.0.0 syntax in the SDP. The unit will always
include a=sendonly syntax in the SDP in either
case.
Defaults to yes.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 233
A
Random REG CID On
Reboot
If set to yes, the Cisco IP phone uses a different
random call-ID for registration after the next
software reboot. If set to no, the Cisco IP phone
tries to use the same call-ID for registration after
the next software reboot. The Cisco IP phone
always uses a new random Call-ID for registration
after a power-cycle, regardless of this setting.
Defaults to no.
Mark All AVT packets If set to yes, all audio video transport (AVT) tone
packets (encoded for redundancy) have the
marker bit set. If set to no, only the first packet has
the marker bit set for each DTMF event.
Defaults to yes.
SIP TCP Port Min Specifies the lowest TCP port number that can be
used for SIP sessions. Defaults to 5060.
SIP TCP Port Max Specifies the highest TCP port number that can
be used for SIP sessions. Defaults to 5080.
CTI Enable The CTI interface allows a third-party application
to control and monitor the state of a phone that
has registered with the Cisco SPA9000. With this
interface, an application can control a phone to
initiate an outgoing call or answer an incoming call
with a mouse click from a PC.
Caller ID Header Provides the option to take the caller ID from
PAID-RPID-FROM, P-ASSERTEDIDENTITY,
REMOTE-PARTY-ID, or FROM header.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 234
A
SRTP Method Selects the method to use for SRTP. Two choices
are available:
•x-sipura—legacy SRPT method
• s-descriptor—new method compliant with RFC-
3711 and RFC-4568
The default value is "x-sipura.”
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.
Hold Target Before REFER Controls whether to hold call leg with transfer
target before sending REFER to the transferee
when initiating a fully-attended call transfer
(where the transfer target has answered). Default
value is "no,” where the call leg is not held.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310.
Keep Referee When REFER
Failed
Set this parameters to yes to configure the phone
to immediately handle NOTIFY sipfrag messages.
You can also configure this parameter in the
configuration file:
<Keep_Referee_When_REFER_Failed ua="na">Yes
</Keep_Referee_When_REFER_Failed>
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 235
A
SIP Timer Values (sec)
Parameter Description
SIP T1 RFC 3261 T1 value (RTT estimate) that can range
from 0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to .5 seconds.
SIP T2 RFC 3261 T2 value (maximum retransmit interval
for non-INVITE requests and INVITE responses)
that can range from 0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to 4
seconds.
SIP T4 RFC 3261 T4 value (maximum duration a message
remains in the network) that can range from 0 to
64 seconds. Defaults to 5 seconds.
SIP Timer B INVITE time-out value that can range from 0 to 64
seconds. Defaults to 16 seconds.
SIP Timer F Non-INVITE time-out value that can range from 0
to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16 seconds.
SIP Timer H INVITE final response, time-out value that can
range from 0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16
seconds.
SIP Timer D ACK hang-around time that can range from 0 to 64
seconds. Defaults to 16 seconds.
SIP Timer J Non-INVITE response hang-around time that can
range from 0 to 64 seconds. Defaults to 16
seconds.
INVITE Expires INVITE request Expires header value. If you enter
0, the Expires header is not included in the
request. Ranges from 0 to
19999999999999999999999999999999.
Defaults to 240 seconds.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 236
A
ReINVITE Expires ReINVITE request Expires header value. If you
enter 0, the Expires header is not included in the
request. Ranges from 0 to
19999999999999999999999999999999.
Defaults to 30
Reg Min Expires Minimum registration expiration time allowed from
the proxy in the Expires header or as a Contact
header parameter. If the proxy returns a value less
than this setting, the minimum value is used.
Defaults to 1 second.
Reg Max Expires Maximum registration expiration time allowed
from the proxy in the Min-Expires header. If the
value is larger than this setting, the maximum
value is used.
Defaults to 7200.
Reg Retry Intvl (See note
below)
Interval to wait before the SPA9000 retries
registration after failing during the last registration.
Defaults to 30.
Reg Retry Long Intvl (See
note below)
When registration fails with a SIP response code
that does not match<Retry Reg RSC>, the
SPA9000 waits for the specified length of time
before retrying. If this interval is 0, the SPA9000
stops trying. This value should be much larger
than the Reg Retry Intvl value, which should not be
0.
Defaults to 1200.
Reg Retry Random Delay Random delay range (in seconds) to add to
<Register Retry Intvl> when retrying REGISTER
after a failure. This feature was added in Release
5.1.
Defaults to blank, which disables this feature.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 237
A
NOTE Cisco IP phones can use a RETRY-AFTER value when received from a SIP proxy
server that is too busy to process a request (503 Service Unavailable message). If
the response message includes a RETRY-AFTER header, the phone waits for the
specified length of time before retrying to REGISTER again. If a RETRY-AFTER
header is not present, the phone waits for the value specified in the
Reg Retry
Interval
or the
Reg Retry Long Interval
parameter.
Reg Retry Long Random
Delay
Random delay range (in seconds) to add to
<Register Retry Long Intvl> when retrying
REGISTER after a failure. This feature was added
in Release 5.1.
Defaults to blank, which disables this feature.
Reg Retry Intvl Cap The maximum value to cap the exponential back-
off retry delay (which starts at <Register Retry
Intvl> and doubles on every REGISTER retry after
a failure). In other words, the retry interval is
always at <Register Retry Intvl> seconds after a
failure. If this feature is enabled, <Reg Retry
Random Delay> is added on top of the
exponential back-off adjusted delay value. This
feature was added in Release 5.1.
Defaults to blank, which disables the exponential
back-off feature.
Sub Min Expires This value sets the lower limit of the REGISTER
expires value returned from the Proxy server.
Sub Max Expires This value sets the upper limit of the REGISTER
min-expires value returned from the Proxy server
in the Min-Expires header. Defaults to 7200.
Sub Retry Intvl This value (in seconds) determines the retry
interval when the last Subscribe request fails.
Defaults to 10.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 238
A
Response Status Code Handling
Parameter Description
SIT1 RSC SIP response status code for the appropriate
Special Information Tone (SIT). For example, if you
set the SIT1 RSC to 404, when the user makes a
call and a failure code of 404 is returned, the SIT1
tone is played. Reorder or Busy Tone is played by
default for all unsuccessful response status code
for SIT 1 RSC through SIT 4 RSC.
Defaults to blank.
SIT2 RSC SIP response status code to INVITE on which to
play the SIT2 Tone.
Defaults to blank.
SIT3 RSC SIP response status code to INVITE on which to
play the SIT3 Tone.
Defaults to blank.
SIT4 RSC SIP response status code to INVITE on which to
p l a y t h e S I T4 To n e .
Defaults to blank.
Try Backup RSC SIP response code that retries a backup server
for the current request.
Defaults to blank.
Retry Reg RSC Interval to wait before the SPA9000 retries
registration after failing during the last registration.
Defaults to blank.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 239
A
RTP Parameters
Parameter Description
RTP Port Min Minimum port number for RTP transmission and
reception. Minimum port number for RTP
transmission and reception. Should define a range
that contains at least 10 even number ports (twice
the number of lines); for example, configure RTP
port min to 16384 and RTP port max to 16402.
Defaults to 16384.
RTP Port Max Maximum port number for RTP transmission and
reception. Should define a range that contains at
least 10 even number ports (twice the number of
lines); for example, configure RTP port min to
16384 and RTP port max to 16402.
Defaults to 16482.
RTP Packet Size Packet size in seconds, which can range from 0.01
to 0.16. Valid values must be a multiple of 0.01
seconds.
Defaults to 0.030.
Max RTP ICMP Err Number of successive ICMP errors allowed when
transmitting RTP packets to the peer before the
SPA9000 terminates the call. If value is set to 0,
the SPA9000 ignores the limit on ICMP errors.
Defaults to 0.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 240
A
RTCP Tx Interval Interval for sending out RTCP sender reports on
an active connection. It can range from 0 to 255
seconds. During an active connection, the
SPA9000 can be programmed to send out
compound RTCP packet on the connection. Each
compound RTP packet except the last one
contains a SR (Sender Report) and a SDES
(Source Description). The last RTCP packet
contains an additional BYE packet. Each SR
except the last one contains exactly 1 RR
(Receiver Report); the last SR carries no RR. The
SDES contains CNAME, NAME, and TOOL
identifiers. The CNAME is set to <User
ID>@<Proxy>, NAME is set to <Display Name> (or
Anonymous if user blocks caller ID), and TOOL is
set to the Vendor/Hardware-platform-software-
version (such as Cisco/SPA9000-1.0.31(b)). The
NTP timestamp used in the SR is a snapshot of
the SPA9000 local time, not the time reported by
an NTP server. If the SPA9000 receives a RR from
the peer, it attempts to compute the round trip
delay and show it as the <Call Round Trip Delay>
value (ms) in the Info section of SPA9000 web
page.
Defaults to 0.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 241
A
SDP Payload Types
The configured dynamic payloads are used for outbound calls only where the
Cisco SPA9000 presents the SDP offer. For inbound calls with a SDP offer, the
Cisco SPA9000 follows the caller dynamic payload type assignments.
The Cisco SPA9000 uses the configured codec names in its outbound SDP. The
SPA9000 ignores the codec names in incoming SDP for standard payload types
(0-95). For dynamic payload types, the Cisco SPA9000 identifies the codec by the
configured codec names. Comparison is case-insensitive.
No UDP Checksum Select yes if you want the SPA9000 to calculate
the UDP header checksum for SIP messages.
Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
Symmetric RTP Enable symmetric RTP operation. If enabled,
sends RTP packets to the source address and
port of the last received valid inbound RTP
packet. If disabled (or before the first RTP packet
arrives) sends RTP to the destination as indicated
in the inbound SDP.
Defaults to no.
Stats In BYE Determines whether the IP phone includes the P-
RTP-Stat header or response to a BYE message.
The header contains the RTP statistics of the
current call. Select yes or no from the drop-down
menu. The format of the P-RTP-Stat header is:
P-RTP-State: PS=<packets sent>,OS=<octets
sent>,PR=<packets received>,OR=<octets
received>,PL=<packets lost>,JI=<jitter in
ms>,LA=<delay in ms>,DU=<call duration in
s>,EN=<encoder>,DE=<decoder>.
Defaults to no.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 242
A
Parameter Description
AVT Dynamic Payload AVT dynamic payload type. Ranges from 96-127.
Defaults to 101.
INFOREQ Dynamic Payload INFOREQ dynamic payload type.
Defaults to blank.
G726r16 Dynamic Payload G.726-16 dynamic payload type. Ranges from 96-
127.
Defaults to 98.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
or Cisco WIP310.
G726r24 Dynamic Payload G.726-24 dynamic payload type. Ranges from 96-
127.
Defaults to 97.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
or Cisco WIP310.
G726r40 Dynamic Payload G.726-40 dynamic payload type. Ranges from 96-
127.
Defaults to 96.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
or Cisco WIP310.
G729b Dynamic Payload G729b Dynamic Payload type.
Defaults to 99.
EncapRTP Dynamic
Payload
EncapRTP Dynamic Payload type.
Defaults to 112.
RTP-Start-Loopback
Dynamic
RTP-Start-Loopback Dynamic Payload.
Defaults to 113.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 243
A
RTP-Start-Loopback
Codec
RTP-Start-Loopback Codec. Select one of
following: G711u, G711a, G726-16, G726-24,
G726-32, G726-40, G729a, or G723.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2: G711u,
G711a, G726-32, G729a, G722.
Defaults to G711u.
AVT Codec Name AVT codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to telephone-event.
G711u Codec Name G.711u codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to PCMU.
G711a Codec Name G.711a codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to PCMA.
G726r16 Codec Name G.726-16 codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to G726-16.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
or Cisco WIP310.
G726r24 Codec Name G.726-24 codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to G726-24.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2.
G726r32 Codec Name G.726-32 codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to G726-32.
G726r40 Codec Name G.726-40 codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to G726-40.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
or Cisco WIP310.
G729a Codec Name G.729a codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to G729a.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 244
A
NAT Support Parameters
G729b Codec Name G.729b codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to G729ab.
G722 Codec Name G.722 codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to G722.
NOTE Not supported on the Cisco WIP310.
EncapRTP Codec Name EncapRTP codec name used in SDP.
Defaults to encaprtp.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Handle VIA received If you select yes, the phone processes the
received parameter in the VIA header (this is
inserted by the server in a response to any of its
requests). If you select no, the parameter is
ignored. Select yes or no from the drop-down
menu.
Defaults to no.
Handle VIA rport If you select yes, the SPA9000 processes the
rport parameter in the VIA header (this is inserted
by the server in a response to any of its requests).
If you select no, the parameter is ignored. Select
yes or no from the drop-down menu.
Defaults to no.
Insert VIA received Inserts the received parameter into the VIA
header of SIP responses if the received-from IP
and VIA sent-by IP values differ. Select yes or no
from the drop-down menu.
Defaults to no.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 245
A
Insert VIA rport Inserts the rport parameter into the VIA header of
SIP responses if the received-from IP and VIA
sent-by IP values differ. Select yes or no from the
drop-down menu.
Defaults to no.
Substitute VIA Addr Lets you use NAT-mapped IP:port values in the
VIA header. Select yes or no from the drop-down
menu.
Defaults to no.
Send Resp To Src Port Sends responses to the request source port
instead of the VIA sent-by port. Select yes or no
from the drop-down menu.
Defaults to no.
STUN Enable Enables the use of STUN to discover NAT
mapping. Select yes or no from the drop-down
menu.
Defaults to no.
STUN Test Enable If the STUN Enable feature is enabled and a valid
STUN server is available, the SPA9000 can
perform a NAT-type discovery operation when it
powers on. It contacts the configured STUN
server, and the result of the discovery is reported
in a Warning header in all subsequent REGISTER
requests. If the SPA9000 detects symmetric NAT
or a symmetric firewall, NAT mapping is disabled.
Defaults to no.
STUN Server IP address or fully-qualified domain name of the
STUN server to contact for NAT mapping
discovery. You can use a public STUN server or
set up your own STUN server.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 246
A
EXT IP External IP address to substitute for the actual IP
address of the SPA9000 in all outgoing SIP
messages. If 0.0.0.0 is specified, no IP address
substitution is performed.
If this parameter is specified, the SPA9000
assumes this IP address when generating SIP
messages and SDP (if NAT Mapping is enabled
for that line). However, the results of STUN and VIA
received parameter processing, if available,
supersede this statically configured value.
Defaults to blank.
EXT RTP Port Min External port mapping number of the RTP Port
Min. number. If this value is not zero, the RTP port
number in all outgoing SIP messages is
substituted for the corresponding port value in the
external RTP port range.
Defaults to blank.
NAT Keep Alive Intvl Interval between NAT-mapping keep alive
messages.
Defaults to 15.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
SIP Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 247
A
Linksys Key System Parameters
Parameter Description
Linksys Key System Enable or disable the Linksys Key System on the
IP phone.
Defaults to yes.
Multicast Address The multicast address is used by the
Cisco SPA9000 to communicate with the
Cisco SPA IP phones.
Defaults to 224.168.168.168:6061.
Key System Auto
Discovery
Enables or disables auto discovery of the call
control server (for example, the Cisco SPA9000).
Disable this feature for teleworkers or other
scenarios where multicast does not work.
Key System IP Address IP address of the call control server IP. Enter the IP
address for teleworkers or other scenarios where
multicast does not work.
Force LAN Codec The choices are: none, G.711u, or G.711a. Defaults
to none.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Provisioning Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 248
A
Provisioning Tab
For information about the Provisioning page, see the Cisco Small Business IP
Telephony Devices Provisioning Guide.
Regional Tab
This section describes the fields for the Regional tab.
Call Progress Tone Description
Parameter Description
Dial Tone Prompts the user to enter a phone number.
Defaults to 350@-19,440@-19;10(*/0/1+2).
Bluetooth Dial Tone
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Indicates a bluetooth headset is paired and the
user can make a call.
Defaults to 350@-19,440@-19;1(0/*/0);10(*/0/1+2).
Outside Dial Tone Alternative to the Dial Tone. It prompts the user to
enter an external phone number, as opposed to an
internal extension. It is triggered by a, (comma)
character encountered in the dial plan.
Defaults to 420@-16;10(*/0/1).
Prompt Tone Prompts the user to enter a call forwarding phone
number.
Defaults to 520@-19,620@-19;10(*/0/1+2).
Busy Tone Played when a 486 RSC is received for an
outbound call.
Defaults to 480@-19,620@-19;10(.5/.5/1+2).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 249
A
Reorder Tone Played when an outbound call has failed or after
the far end hangs up during an established call.
Reorder Tone is played automatically when <Dial
Tone> or any of its alternatives times out.
Defaults to 480@-19,620@-19;10(.25/.25/1+2).
Off Hook Warning Tone Played when the caller has not properly placed
the handset on the cradle. Off Hook Warning Tone
is played when Reorder Tone times out.
Defaults to 480@10,620@0;10(.125/.125/1+2).
Ring Back Tone Played during an outbound call when the far end
is ringing.
Defaults to 440@-19,480@-19;*(2/4/1+2).
Call Waiting Tone Played when a call is waiting. Defaults to
440@-10;30(.3/9.7/1)
Call Pickup Tone The default value for this parameter is
440@-10;30(.3/9.7/1), which is the same as the call
waiting tone.
This feature appears as follows in the phone
configuration file:
<Call_Pickup_Tone ua="na">440@-10;30(.3/9.7/
1)</Call_Pickup_Tone>
Confirm Tone Brief tone to notify the user that the last input
value has been accepted.
Defaults to 600@-16; 1(.25/.25/1).
SIT1 Tone Alternative to the Reorder Tone played when an
error occurs as a caller makes an outbound call.
The RSC to trigger this tone is configurable on
theIP phone screen.
Defaults to 985@-16,1428@-16,1777@-16;20(.380/
0/1,.380/0/2,.380/0/3,0/4/0).
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 250
A
Reorder Tone Played when an outbound call has failed or after
the far end hangs up during an established call.
Reorder Tone is played automatically when <Dial
Tone> or any of its alternatives times out.
Defaults to 480@-19,620@-19;10(.25/.25/1+2).
Off Hook Warning Tone Played when the caller has not properly placed
the handset on the cradle. Off Hook Warning Tone
is played when Reorder Tone times out.
Defaults to 480@10,620@0;10(.125/.125/1+2).
Ring Back Tone Played during an outbound call when the far end
is ringing.
Defaults to 440@-19,480@-19;*(2/4/1+2).
Call Waiting Tone Played when a call is waiting. Defaults to
440@-10;30(.3/9.7/1)
Call Pickup Tone The default value for this parameter is
440@-10;30(.3/9.7/1), which is the same as the call
waiting tone.
This feature appears as follows in the phone
configuration file:
<Call_Pickup_Tone ua="na">440@-10;30(.3/9.7/
1)</Call_Pickup_Tone>
Confirm Tone Brief tone to notify the user that the last input
value has been accepted.
Defaults to 600@-16; 1(.25/.25/1).
SIT1 Tone Alternative to the Reorder Tone played when an
error occurs as a caller makes an outbound call.
The RSC to trigger this tone is configurable on
theIP phone screen.
Defaults to 985@-16,1428@-16,1777@-16;20(.380/
0/1,.380/0/2,.380/0/3,0/4/0).
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 251
A
SIT2 Tone Alternative to the Reorder Tone played when an
error occurs as a caller makes an outbound call.
The RSC to trigger this tone is configurable on the
IP phone screen.
Defaults to 914@-16,1371@-16,1777@-16;20(.274/
0/1,.274/0/2,.380/0/3,0/4/0).
SIT3 Tone Alternative to the Reorder Tone played when an
error occurs as a caller makes an outbound call.
The RSC to trigger this tone is configurable on the
IP phone screen.
Defaults to 914@-16,1371@-16,1777@-16;20(.380/
0/1,.380/0/2,.380/0/3,0/4/0)
SIT4 Tone This is an alternative to the Reorder Tone played
when an error occurs as a caller makes an
outbound call. The RSC to trigger this tone is
configurable on the IP phone screen.
Defaults to 985@-16,1371@-16,1777@-16;20(.380/
0/1,.274/0/2,.380/0/3,0/4/0).
MWI Dial Tone Played instead of the Dial Tone when there are
unheard messages in the caller’s mailbox.
Defaults to 350@-19,440@-19;2(.1/.1/1+2);10(*/0/
1+2).
Cfwd Dial Tone Played when all calls are forwarded.
Defaults to 350@-19,440@-19;2(.2/.2/1+2);10(*/0/
1+2).
Holding Tone Informs the local caller that the far end has placed
the call on hold.
Defaults to 600 @-19*(.1/.1/1,.1/.1/1,.1/9.5/1).
Conference Tone Played to all parties when a three-way conference
call is in progress.
Defaults to 350@-19;20(.1/.1/1,.1/9.7/1).
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 252
A
Distinctive Ring Patterns
Secure Call Indication Tone Played when a call has been successfully
switched to secure mode. It should be played only
for a short while (less than 30 seconds) and at a
reduced level (less than -19 dBm) so it does not
interfere with the conversation.
Defaults to 397@-19,507@-19;15(0/2/0,.2/.1/1,.1/
2.1/2).
Page Tone Specifies the tone transmitted when the paging
feature is enabled.
Defaults to 600@-16;.3(.05/0.05/1).
Alert Tone Played when an alert occurs.
Defaults to 600@-19;.2(.05/0.05/1).
System Beep Audible notification tone played when a system
error occurs.
Defaults to 600@-16;.1(.05/0.05/1).
NOTE Applies to Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
or Cisco WIP310 only.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Cadence 1 Cadence script for distinctive ring 1.
Defaults to 60(2/4).
Cadence 2 Cadence script for distinctive ring 2.
Defaults to 60(.3/.2, 1/.2,.3/4).
Cadence 3 Cadence script for distinctive ring 3.
Defaults to 60(.8/.4,.8/4).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 253
A
Cadence 4 Cadence script for distinctive ring 4.
Defaults to 60(.4/.2,.3/.2,.8/4).
Cadence 5 Cadence script for distinctive ring 5.
Defaults to 60(.2/.2,.2/.2,.2/.2,1/4)
Cadence 6 Cadence script for distinctive ring 6.
Defaults to 60(.2/.4,.2/.4,.2/4).
Cadence 7 Cadence script for distinctive ring 7.
Defaults to 60(4.5/4).
Cadence 8 Cadence script for distinctive ring 8.
Defaults to 60(0.25/9.75)
Cadence 9 Cadence script for distinctive ring 9.
Defaults to 60(.4/.2,.4/2).
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 254
A
Control Timer Values (sec)
Parameter Description
Reorder Delay Delay after far end hangs up before reorder (busy) tone
is played. 0 = plays immediately, inf = never plays.
Range: 0–255 seconds. Set to 255 to return the phone
immediately to on-hook status and to not play the tone.
Defaults to 5.
Call Back Expires Expiration time in seconds of a call back activation.
Range: 0–65535 seconds.
Defaults to 1800.
Call Back Retry Intvl Call back retry interval in seconds. Range: 0–255
seconds.
Defaults to 30.
Call Back Delay Delay after receiving the first SIP 18x response before
declaring the remote end is ringing. If a busy response
is received during this time, the SPA9000 still
considers the call as failed and keeps on retrying.
Defaults to 0.5.
Interdigit Long Timer Long timeout between entering digits when dialing.
The interdigit timer values are used as defaults when
dialing. The Interdigit_Long_Timer is used after any
one digit, if all valid matching sequences in the dial
plan are incomplete as dialed. Range: 0–64 seconds.
Defaults to 10.
Interdigit Short Timer Short timeout between entering digits when dialing.
The Interdigit_Short_Timer is used after any one digit,
if at least one matching sequence is complete as
dialed, but more dialed digits would match other as yet
incomplete sequences. Range: 0–64 seconds.
Defaults to 3.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 255
A
Vertical Service Activation Codes
The following Vertical Service Activation Codes are automatically appended to
the dial plan.
Parameter Description
Call Return Code This code calls the last caller.
Defaults to *69.
Blind Transfer Code Begins a blind transfer of the current call to the
extension specified after the activation code.
Defaults to *98.
Call Back Act Code Starts a callback when the last outbound call is not
busy.
Defaults to *66.
Call Back Deact Code Cancels a callback.
Defaults to *86.
Cfwd All Act Code Forwards all calls to the extension specified after the
activation code.
Defaults to *72.
Cfwd All Deact Code Cancels call forwarding of all calls.
Defaults to *73.
Cfwd Busy Act Code Forwards busy calls to the extension specified after
the activation code.
Defaults to *90.
Cfwd Busy Deact
Code
Cancels call forwarding of busy calls.
Defaults to *91.
Cfwd No Ans Act
Code
Forwards no-answer calls to the extension specified
after the activation code.
Defaults to *92.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 256
A
Cfwd No Ans Deact
Code
Cancels call forwarding of no-answer calls.
Defaults to *93.
CW Act Code Enables call waiting on all calls.
Defaults to *56.
CW Deact Code Disables call waiting on all calls.
Defaults to *57.
CW Per Call Act Code Enables call waiting for the next call.
Defaults to *71.
CW Per Call Deact
Code
Disables call waiting for the next call.
Defaults to *70.
Block CID Act Code Blocks caller ID on all outbound calls.
Defaults to *67.
Block CID Deact Code Removes caller ID blocking on all outbound calls.
Defaults to *68.
Block CID Per Call Act
Code
Blocks caller ID on the next outbound call.
Defaults to *81.
Block CID Per Call
Deact Code
Removes caller ID blocking on the next inbound call.
Defaults to *82.
Block ANC Act Code Blocks all anonymous calls.
Defaults to *77.
Block ANC Deact
Code
Removes blocking of all anonymous calls.
Defaults to *87.
DND Act Code Enables the do not disturb feature.
Defaults to *78.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 257
A
DND Deact Code Disables the do not disturb feature.
Defaults to *79.
Secure All Call Act
Code
Makes all outbound calls secure.
Defaults to *16.
Secure No Call Act
Code
Makes all outbound calls not secure.
Defaults to *17.
Secure One Call Act
Code
Makes the next outbound call secure. (It is redundant if
all outbound calls are secure by default.)
Defaults to *18.
Secure One Call
Deact Code
Makes the next outbound call not secure. (It is
redundant if all outbound calls are not secure by
default.)
Defaults to *19.
Paging Code The star code used for paging the other clients in the
group.
Defaults to *96.
Call Park Code The star code used for parking the current call.
Defaults to *38.
Call Pickup Code The star code used for picking up a ringing call.
Defaults to *36.
Call UnPark Code The star code used for picking up a call from the call
park.
Defaults to *39.
Group Call Pickup
Code
The star code used for picking up a group call.
Defaults to *37.
Media Loopback
Code
The star code used for media loopback.
Defaults to *03.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 258
A
Referral Services
Codes
These codes tell the SPA9000 what to do when the
user places the current call on hold and is listening to
the second dial tone.
One or more *code can be configured into this
parameter, such as *98, or *97|*98|*123, etc. Max total
length is 79 chars. This parameter applies when the
user places the current call on hold (by Hook Flash)
and is listening to second dial tone. Each *code (and
the following valid target number according to current
dial plan) entered on the second dial-tone triggers the
SPA9000 to perform a blind transfer to a target number
that is prepended by the service *code.
For example, after the user dials *98, the SPA9000
plays a special dial tone called the Prompt Tone while
waiting for the user the enter a target number (which is
checked according to dial plan as in normal dialing).
When a complete number is entered, the SPA9000
sends a blind REFER to the holding party with the
Refer-To target equals to *98<target_number>. This
feature allows the Cisco SPA9000 to hand off a call to
an application server to perform further processing,
such as call park.
The *codes should not conflict with any of the other
vertical service codes internally processed by the
Cisco SPA9000. You can empty the corresponding
*code that you do not want to Cisco SPA9000 to
process.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 259
A
Feature Dial Services
Codes
These codes tell the Cisco SPA9000 what to do when
the user is listening to the first or second dial tone.
One or more *code can be configured into this
parameter, such as *72, or *72|*74|*67|*82, and so forth.
The maximum total length is 79 characters. This
parameter applies when the user has a dial tone (first
or second dial tone). Enter *code (and the following
target number according to current dial plan) entered
at the dial tone triggers the Cisco SPA9000 to call the
target number prepended by the *code. For example,
after user dials *72, the Cisco SPA9000 plays a prompt
tone awaiting the user to enter a valid target number.
When a complete number is entered, the
Cisco SPA9000 sends a INVITE to
*72<target_number> as in a normal call. This feature
allows the proxy to process features like call forward
(*72) or BLock Caller ID (*67).
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 260
A
Vertical Service Announcement Codes
• Service Annc (Announcement) Base Number: Defaults to blank.
• Service Annc (Announcement) Extension Codes: Defaults to blank.
Feature Dial Services
Codes (continued
The *codes should not conflict with any of the other
vertical service codes internally processed by the
Cisco SPA9000. You can empty the corresponding
*code that you do not want to Cisco SPA9000 to
process.
You can add a parameter to each *code in Features
Dial Services Codes to indicate what tone to play after
the *code is entered, such as *72‘c‘|*67‘p‘. Below are a
list of allowed tone parameters (note the use of back
quotes surrounding the parameter without spaces)
•c = Cfwd Dial Tone
•d = Dial Tone
•m = MWI Dial Tone
•o = Outside Dial Tone
• p = Prompt Dial Tone
• s = Second Dial Tone
• x = No tones are place, x is any digit not used above
If no tone parameter is specified, the Cisco SPA9000
plays Prompt tone by default.
If the *code is not to be followed by a phone number,
such as *73 to cancel call forwarding, do not include it
in this parameter. In that case, simple add that *code in
the dial plan and the SPA9000 send INVITE *73@..... as
usual when user dials *73.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 261
A
Outbound Call Codec Selection Codes
These codes automatically appended to the dial plan. You do not need to include
them in the dial plan.
Parameter Description
Prefer G711u Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *017110.
Force G711u Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *027110.
Prefer G711a Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *017111
Force G711a Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *027111.
Prefer G722 Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *01722.
Only one G.722 call at a time is allowed. If a conference
call is placed, a SIP re-invite message is sent to switch
the calls to narrowband audio.
NOTE Not supported on the Cisco WIP310.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 262
A
Force G722 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *02722.
Only one G.722 call at a time is allowed. If a conference
call is placed, a SIP re-invite message is sent to switch
the calls to narrowband audio.
NOTE Not supported on the Cisco WIP310.
Prefer L16 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *01016.
Force L16 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *02016.
Prefer G723 Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *01723.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Force G723 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *02723.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Prefer G726r16 Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *0172616.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 263
A
Force G726r16 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *0272616.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Prefer G726r24 Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *0172624.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Force G726r24 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *0272624.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Prefer G726r32 Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *0172632.
Force G726r32 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *0272632.
Prefer G726r40 Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *0172640.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 264
A
Time (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only)
Force G726r40 Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *0272640.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2.
Prefer G729a Code Makes this codec the preferred codec for the
associated call.
Defaults to *01729.
Force G729a Code Makes this codec the only codec that can be used for
the associated call.
Defaults to *02729.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Time Zone Selects the number of hours to add to GMT to
generate the local time for caller ID generation.
Choices are GMT-12:00, GMT-11:00,…, GMT,
GMT+01:00, GMT+02:00, …, GMT+13:00.
Defaults to GMT-08:00.
Time Offset This specifies the offset from GMT to use for the
local system time.
Daylight Saving Time Rule See Daylight Saving Time Rule in
Miscellaneous.
Daylight Saving Time
Enable
Select yes to enable Daylight Saving Time.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 265
A
Language (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 Only)
Miscellaneous
Parameter Description
Dictionary Server Script. See Dictionary Server Script in
Miscellaneous.
Language Selection See Language Selection in Miscellaneous.
Parameter Description
Set Local Date (mm/
dd)
Sets the local date (mm represents the month and dd
represents the day). The year is optional and uses two
or four digits.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Set Local Time (HH/
mm)
Sets the local time (hh represents hours and mm
represents minutes). Seconds are optional.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Time Zone Selects the number of hours to add to GMT to
generate the local time for caller ID generation.
Choices are GMT-12:00, GMT-11:00,…, GMT,
GMT+01:00, GMT+02:00, …, GMT+13:00.
Defaults to GMT-08:00.
NOTE Found in the Time section for the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Time Offset (HH/mm) This specifies the offset from GMT to use for the local
system time.
NOTE Found in the Time section for the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 266
A
Daylight Saving Time
Rule
Enter the rule for calculating daylight saving time; it
should include the start, end, and save values. This rule
is comprised of three fields. Each field is separated by
; (a semicolon) as shown below. Optional values inside [
] (the brackets) are assumed to be 0 if they are not
specified. Midnight is represented by 0:0:0 of the given
date.
This is the format of the rule: Start = <start-time>;
end=<end-time>; save = <save-time>.
The <start-time> and <end-time> values specify the
start and end dates and times of daylight saving time.
Each value is in this format: <month> /<day> /
<weekday>[/HH:[mm[:ss]]]
The <save-time> value is the number of hours, minutes,
and/or seconds to add to the current time during
daylight saving time. The <save-time> value can be
preceded by a negative (-) sign if subtraction is
desired instead of addition. The <save-time> value is in
this format: [/[+|-]HH:[mm[:ss]]]
The <month> value equals any value in the range 1-12
(January-December).
The <day> value equals [+|-] any value in the range 1-
31.
If <day> is 1, it means the <weekday> on or before the
end of the month (in other words the last occurrence of
< weekday> in that month).
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 267
A
Daylight Saving Time
Rule (continued)
The <weekday> value equals any value in the range 1-
7 (Monday-Sunday). It can also equal 0. If the
<weekday> value is 0, this means that the date to start
or end daylight saving is exactly the date given. In that
case, the <day> value must not be negative. If the
<weekday> value is not 0 and the <day> value is
positive, then daylight saving starts or ends on the
<weekday> value on or after the date given. If the
<weekday> value is not 0 and the <day> value is
negative, then daylight saving starts or ends on the
<weekday> value on or before the date given. Where:
HH stands for hours (0-23).
mm stands for minutes (0-59).
ss stands for seconds (0-59).
The default Daylight Saving Time Rule is start=4/1/
7;end=10/-1/7;save=1.
NOTE Found in the Time section for the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Daylight Saving Time
Enable
Select yes to enable Daylight Saving Time.
NOTE Found in the Time section for the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
DTMF Playback Level Local DTMF playback level in dBm, up to one decimal
place.
Defaults to -16.
DTMF Playback
Length
Local DTMF playback duration in milliseconds.
Defaults to .1.
Inband DTMF Boost Controls the amount of amplification applied DTMF
signals.
Choices are OdB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, or 18dB.
Defaults to 12dB.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 268
A
Dictionary Server
Script/SCCP
Dictionary Server
Script
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
SCCP only)
Defines the location of the dictionary server, the
languages available and the associated dictionary. The
syntax is as follows:
<Dictionary_Server_Script ua="na">
</Dictionary_Server_Script>
Defaults to blank and the maximum number of
characters is 512. The detailed format is as follows:
serv={server ip port and root path};
d0=<language0>;x0=<dictionary0 filename>;
d1=<language1>;x1=<dictionary1 filename>;
d2=<language2>;x2=<dictionary2 filename>;
d3=<language3>;x3=<dictionary3 filename>;
d4=<language4>;x4=<dictionary4 filename>;
d5=<language5>;x5=<dictionary5 filename>;
d6=<language6>;x6=<dictionary6 filename>;
d7=<language3>;x7=<dictionary7 filename>;
d8=<language8>;x8=<dictionary8 filename>;
d9=<language5>;x9=<dictionary9 filename>;
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Regional Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 269
A
The following is an example value:
<Dictionary_Server_Script ua="na">
serv=tftp://192.168.1.119/
;d0=English;x0=enS_v101.xml;d1=Spanish;x1
=esS_v101.xml </Dictionary_Server_Script>
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Language Selection/
SCCP Language
Selection
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
SCCP Only)
Specifies the default language. The value needs to
match one of the languages supported by the
dictionary server. The script (dx value) is as follows:
<Language_Selection ua="na">
</Language_Selection>
Defaults to blank and the maximum number of
characters is 512. The following is an example:
<Language_Selection ua="na"> Spanish
</Language_Selection>
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Default Character
Encoding
(Cisco SPA303,
Cisco SPA500 Series)
The default is ISO-8859-1 for backward compatibility
with Cisco SPA900 series phones. If set to UTF-8, line
keys and other labels entered by using the phone web
user interface containing UTF-8 characters are
displayed correctly on the phone. (SIP only)
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 270
A
Phone Tab
This section describes the fields for the Phone tab.
General
Parameter Description
Station Display Name Name to identify the IP phone; appears on the IP
phone screen on models that have a display. You
can use spaces in this field and the name does not
have to be unique. If both the Station Display
Name and Station Name fields are populated, the
Station Display Name field takes precedence and
is displayed on the phone.
Station Name Name to identify this IP phone; appears on the IP
phone screen on models that have a display. No
spaces are allowed and the name must be unique.
Voice Mail Number Phone number or URL to check voice mail. The
service provider often hosts a voice mail service.
The advantages of hosted voice mail include:
• Advanced features such as voice mail to
email conversion.
• Calls can go to voice mail when the
broadband connection is down.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 271
A
Text Logo Text logo to display when the phone boots up. A
service provider, for example, can enter logo text
as follows:
• Up to 2 lines of text
• Each line must be fewer than 32 characters
• Insert a new line character (\n) between
lines
• Insert escape code %0a
For example, Super\n%0aTelecom displays:
Super
Telecom
Use the + character to add spaces for formatting.
For example, you can add multiple + characters
before and after the text to center it.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G. On the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, this setting is
located on the User tab.
BMP Picture Download
URL
URL locating the bitmap (.BMP) file to display on
the IP phone screen background.
For more information, see Configuring Phone
Information and Display Settings.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G. On the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, this setting is
located on the User tab.
Select Logo Select from Default, BMP Picture, Text Logo, or
None.
Defaults to Default.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G. On the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, this setting is
located on the User tab.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 272
A
Select Background Picture Select from Default, BMP Picture, or None.
Defaults to Default.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G. On the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, this setting is
located on the User tab.
Softkey Labels Font Choose the font width for the softkey labels to
display on your phone. See Customizing Phone
Softkeys.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G.
Screen Saver Enable Enables a screen saver on the IP phone screen.
When the phone is idle for a specified time, it
enters screen saver mode. (Users can set up
screen savers directly using phone Setup button.)
Any button press or on/off hook event triggers the
phone to return to its normal mode. (The screen
shows Press any key to unlock your
phone.) If a user password is set, the user must
enter it to exit screen saver mode.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G. On the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, this setting is
located on the User tab.
Screen Saver Wait Amount of idle time before screen saver displays.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G. On the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, this setting is
located on the User tab.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 273
A
Line Key
When used in the configuration profile, parameters in this section must be
appended with
n
, where
n
represents line 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. For more information on
these parameters, see Configuring Lines.
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco WIP310.
Screen Saver Icon In screen saver mode, the IP phone screen can
display:
• A background picture.
• The station time in the middle of the screen.
• A moving padlock icon. When the phone is
locked, the status line displays a scrolling
message “Press any key to unlock your
phone.”
• A moving phone icon.
• The station date and time in the middle of
the screen.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G. On the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, this setting is
located on the User tab.
JPEG Logo Download URL
(
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
)
URL from which to download a .jpg file for the
phone logo display.
JPEG Wallpaper Download
URL (
Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
)
URL from which to download a .jpg file for the
phone wallpaper.
Enable SMS Enables sending and receiving of SMS text
messages on the phone.
NOTE Cisco WIP310 only.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 274
A
Parameter Description
Extension Extension number of the line key.
Short Name A short label shown on the IP phone screen for
Line Key 1 through Line Key 6.
Share Call Appearance Yes indicates that Line Key 1/2/3/4/5/6 is a
shared call appearance. Otherwise this call
appearance is not shared (it is private).
Defaults to no.
Extended Function Use to assign Busy Lamp Field, Call Pickup, and
Speed Dial Functions to Idle Lines on the IP
phone.
Syntax is:
fnc=type;sub=stationname@$PROXY;ext
=extension#@$PROXY
where:
• fnc: function
• blf: busy lamp field
• cp: call pickup
• sub: station name (not needed for speed
dial)
• ext or usr: extension or user (the usr and ext
keywords are interchangeable)
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310,
Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 275
A
Miscellaneous Line Key Settings
Does not apply to the Cisco WIP310.
Parameter Description
SCA Line ID Mapping Specifies the shared call appearance line ID
mapping. Choose Vertical First or Horizontal First.
Each LED can hold multiple calls and the first call
on an LED makes it light up. Horizontal first means
the second call makes the same LED flash.
Vertical first means the second call lights up the
next LED.
For example, if Extension 101 is assigned to two
LEDs, and Vertical First is selected, the second
call on Extension 101 lights up the second LED.
The third call makes the first LED flash, and the
fourth call makes the second LED flash.
If Horizontal First is selected, the second call on
Extension 101 makes the first LED flash. The third
call lights up the second LED, and the fourth call
makes the second LED flash.
SCA Barge-In Enable Enables the SCA Barge-In.
Defaults to no.
SCA Sticky Auto Line
Seize
When enabled, taking the phone off-hook will not
automatically pick up an incoming call on a shared
line.
Call Appearance Per Line Specifies how many calls per line to allow. You
can choose a value from 2 (default) to the
maximum value of 10. This parameter is not
supported on the Cisco SPA501G and
Cisco SPA301 phones. Also, this parameter is
only supported when the phones are operating in
the SIP mode.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 276
A
Line Key LED Pattern
Does not apply to the Cisco WIP310.
Parameter Description
Idle LED The call appearance is not is in use and is
available to make a new call. Leaving this entry
blank indicates the default value of c=g.
Remote Undefined LED The shared call state is undefined (the phone is
still waiting for the state information from the
application server). Not applicable if the call
appearance is not shared. Leaving this entry blank
indicates the default value of c=r;p=d.
Local Seized LED This phone has seized the call appearance to
prepare for a new outbound call. Leaving this
entry blank indicates the default value of c=r.
Remote Seized LED The shared call appearance is seized by another
phone. Not application if the call appearance is
not shared. Leaving this entry blank indicates the
default value of c=r;p=d.
Local Progressing LED This phone is attempting on this call appearance
an outgoing call that is in proceeding (i.e. the
called number is ringing). Leaving this entry blank
indicates the default value of c=r.
Remote Progressing LED Another phone is attempting on this shared call
appearance an outbound call that is progressing.
Not applicable if the call appearance is not
shared. Leaving this entry blank indicates the
default value of c=r;p=d.
Local Ringing LED The call appearance is ringing. Leaving this entry
blank indicates the default value of c=r;p=f.
Remote Ringing LED The shared call appearance is in ringing on
another phone. Not applicable if the call
appearance is not shared. Leaving this entry blank
indicates the default value of c=r;p=d.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 277
A
Local Active LED The call appearance is engaged in an active call.
Leaving this entry blank indicates the default
value of c=r.
Remote Active LED Another station is engaged in an active call on this
shared call appearance. Not applicable is this call
appearance is not shared. Leaving this entry blank
indicates the default value of c=r;p=d.
Local Held LED The call appearance is held by this phone.
Leaving this entry blank indicates the default
value of c=r;p=s.
Remote Held LED Another phone has placed this call appearance on
hold. Not applicable if the call appearance is not
shared. Leaving this entry blank indicates the
default value of c=r,p=s.
Register Failed LED The corresponding extension has failed to
register with the proxy server. Leaving this entry
blank indicates the default value of c=a.
Disabled LED The Call Appearance is disabled (not available for
any incoming or outgoing call). Leaving this entry
blank indicates the default value of c=o.
Registering LED The corresponding extension is trying to register
with the proxy server. Leaving this entry blank
indicates the default value of c=r;p=s.
Call Back Active LED Call Back operation is currently active on and this
call appearance is not shared. Leaving this entry
blank indicates the default value of c=r;p=s.
Trunk In-Use LED A shared trunk is in use.
Trunk No Service LED A shared trunk is not in service.
Trunk Reserved LED A shared trunk has been reserved.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 278
A
Supplementary Services
Enable or disable the corresponding supplementary services on the phone. A
value of yes indicates enabled; no indicates disabled.
Parameter Description
Conference Serv Enable/disable Three way conference service.
Defaults to yes.
Attn Transfer Serv Enable/disable attended-call-transfer service.
Defaults to yes.
Blind Transfer Serv Enable/disable blind-call-transfer service.
Defaults to yes.
DND Serv Enable/disable do-not-disturb service.
Defaults to yes.
Block ANC Serv Enable/disable block-anonymous-call service.
Defaults to yes.
Call Back Serv Enable/disable call-back (aka. repeating dialing)
service.
Defaults to yes.
Block CID Serv Enable/disable blocking outbound Caller-ID
service.
Defaults to yes.
Secure Call Serv Enable/disable secure-call service.
Defaults to yes.
Cfwd All Serv Enable/disable call-forward-all service.
Defaults to yes.
Cfwd Busy Serv Enable/disable call-forward-on-busy service.
Defaults to yes.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 279
A
Cfwd On No Ans Serv Enable/disable call-forward-on-no-answer
service.
Defaults to yes.
Paging Serv Enable/disable the paging service.
Defaults to yes.
Call Park Serv Enable/disable the call park service.
Defaults to yes.
Call Pick Up Serv Enable/disable the call pickup service.
Defaults to yes.
ACD Login Serv Enable/disable the ACD Login Service, used for
call centers. Typically enabled with the <SIP-B>
parameter.
Defaults to no.
Group Call Pick Up Serv Enable/disable the group call pickup service.
Defaults to yes.
Group Call Pick Up Serv Enable/disable the group call pickup service.
Defaults to yes.
ACD Ext The extension used for handling ACD calls. Select
from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
Defaults to 1.
Service Annc Serv Enable/disable sending announcement requests
to a customer-supplied announcement server.
Defaults to no.
Web Serv (
Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Enable/disable the web server.
Defaults to yes.
SMS Serv (
Cisco SPA525G
or Cisco SPA525G2
only)
Enable/disable the SMS text messaging server.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 280
A
Ring Tone (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Each entry defines a ring tone to be used on the phone, with an ID between1
and12. The ID can be used in a DirEntry to indicate which ring tone to use when
the corresponding caller calls.
Parameter Description
Ring1 Ring tone script for ring 1. Defaults to n=Classic-1;w=3;c=1.
Ring2 Ring tone script for ring 2. Defaults to n=Classic-2;w=3;c=2.
Ring3 Ring tone script for ring 3. Defaults to n=Classic-3;w=3;c=3.
Ring4 Ring tone script for ring 4. Defaults to n=Classic-4;w=3;c=4.
Ring5 Ring tone script for ring 5. Defaults to n=Simple-1;w=2;c=1.
Ring6 Ring tone script for ring 6. Defaults to n=Simple-2;w=2;c=2.
Ring7 Ring tone script for ring 7. Defaults to n=Simple-3;w=2;c=3.
Ring8 Ring tone script for ring 8. Defaults to n=Simple-4;w=2;c=4.
Ring9 Ring tone script for ring 9. Defaults to n=Simple-5;w=2;c=5.
Ring10 Ring tone script for ring 10. Defaults to n=Office;w=4;c=1.
Ring11 (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Ring tone script for ring 11. Defaults to n=Pulse;w=5;c=1.
(Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Ring tone script for ring 11. Defaults to n=Pulse;w=file://
Pulse1.raw;c=1.
Ring12 (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
Ring tone script for ring 12. Defaults to n=Du-dut;w=6;c=1.
(Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Ring tone script for ring 11. Defaults to n=Du-dut;w=file://
Ring7.raw;c=1.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 281
A
In addition to these two ring tones, four user-configurable ring tones were added:
These four ring tones must be provisioned or configured by using the phone web
user interface.
Ring Tone (Cisco WIP310)
Label Value of the w Parameter
Warble (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
w=7
((Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2))
w=file://Warble.raw
Low (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
w=8
((Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2))
w=file://Low.raw
Floor (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
w=9
((Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2))
w=file://Floor.raw
Reverb (Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series)
w=10
((Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2))
w=file://Reverb.raw
Parameter Description
Keypad Tone Select yes to enable the keypad tone to be
played when a key on the keypad is pressed.
Select no to silence the keypad.
Keypad Tone Volume Corresponds to the volume of the keypad tone.
Default is 5.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 282
A
Auto Input Gain (dB)
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco WIP310.
Parameter Description
Handset Input Gain The amount of amplification to apply to the audio
input signal for the handset.
Defaults to zero.
Headset Input Gain The amount of amplification to apply to the audio
input signal for the headset.
Defaults to zero.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or the
Cisco SPA501G.
Speakerphone Input Gain The amount of amplification to apply to the audio
input signal for the speakerphone.
Defaults to zero.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or the
Cisco SPA501G.
Bluetooth Input Gain
(Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only)
The amount of amplification to apply to the audio
input signal for the Bluetooth device.
Defaults to zero.
Handset Additional Input
Gain
Applies additional input gain to the handset.
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Headset Additional Input
Gain
Applies additional input gain to the headset.
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2, or the Cisco SPA501G.
Speakerphone Additional
Input Gain
Applies additional input gain to the speakerphone.
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco SPA301 or
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 or
Cisco SPA501G.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 283
A
Multiple Paging Group Parameters
You can configure a phone as part of a paging group by using a Group Paging
Script. Users can then direct pages to specific groups of phones. A phone can be
part of no more than two paging groups, and user can page a maximum of five
paging groups.
Syntax:
pggrp=ip-address:port;[name=xxx;]num=xxx;
[listen={yes|no}]];
Where:
IP address
: Multicast IP address of the phone that listens for and receives pages.
port
: Port on which to page; you must use different ports for each paging group.
name (optional): The name of the paging group. In this name, do not use the pggrp
string because it is reserved. Using it causes the script not to work, as in these
examples:
pggrp=224.168.168.168:3141;name=ITGPgGrp;
num=800;listen=yes;
pggrp=224.168.168.168:3141;name=PgGrp;num=800;listen=yes;
num: The number users dial to access the paging group; must be unique to the
group.
listen: If the phone should listen on the page group. Only the first two groups with
listen set to yes will listen to group pages. If the field is not defined, the default
value is no, so you must set this field to listen to the group pages.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 284
A
BroadSoft Settings
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series supports the BroadSoft
directory feature and synchronization of Do Not Disturb and Call Forward.
Parameter Description
Directory Enable Set to yes to enable BroadSoft directory for the
phone user. Defaults to no.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or
Cisco SPA501G.
XSI Host Server Enter the name of the server; for example,
xsp.xdp.broadsoft.com.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or
Cisco SPA501G.
Directory Name Name of the directory. Displays on the user phone
as a directory choice.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or
Cisco SPA501G.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 285
A
LDAP Corporate Directory Search
If using Active Directory with authentication set to MD5, you must first configure
the following:
• Click the System tab. In the Optional Network Configuration section, under
Primary DNS, enter the IP address of the DNS server.
• In the Optional Network Configuration section, under Domain, enter the
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) domain.
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco WIP310, Cisco SPA301, or Cisco SPA501G.
Directory Type Select the type of BroadSoft directory:
Enterprise (default): Allows users to search on last
name, first name, user or group ID, phone number,
extension, department, or email address.
Group: Allows users to search on last name, first
name, user ID, phone number, extension,
department, or email address.
Personal: Allows users to search on last name, first
name, or telephone number.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or
Cisco SPA501G.
Directory UserID BroadSoft User ID of the phone user; for example,
johndoe@xdp.broadsoft.com.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or
Cisco SPA501G.
Directory Password Alphanumeric password associated with the User
ID.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or
Cisco SPA501G.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 286
A
Parameter Description
LDAP Dir Enable Choose yes to enable LDAP.
LDAP Corp Dir Name Enter a free-form text name, such as “Corporate
Directory.”
LDAP Server Enter a fully qualified domain name or IP address of
LDAP server, in the following format:
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
LDAP Auth Method Select the authentication method that the LDAP server
requires. Choices are:
None—No authentication is used between the client
and the server.
Simple—The client sends its fully-qualified domain
name and password to the LDAP server. Might present
security issues.
Digest-MD5—The LDAP server sends authentication
options and a token to the client. The client returns an
encrypted response that is decrypted and verified by
the server.
LDAP Client DN Enter the distinguished name domain components [dc]
; for example:
dc=cv2bu,dc=com
If using the default Active Directory schema
(Name(cn)->Users->Domain), an example of the client
DN follows:
cn="David Lee",dc=users,dc=cv2bu,dc=com
LDAP Username Enter the username for a credentialed user on the
LDAP server.
LDAP Password Enter the password for the LDAP username.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 287
A
LDAP Search Base Specify a starting point in the directory tree from
which to search. Separate domain components [dc]
with a comma. For example:
dc=cv2bu,dc=com
LDAP Last Name Filter This defines the search for surnames [sn], known as
last name in some parts of the world. For example,
sn:(sn=*$VALUE*). This search allows the provided text
to appear anywhere in a name, beginning, middle, or
end.
LDAP First Name Filter This defines the search for the common name [cn]. For
example, cn:(cn=*$VALUE*). This search allows the
provided text to appear anywhere in a name,
beginning, middle, or end.
LDAP Search Item 3 Additional customized search item. Can be blank if not
needed.
LDAP Item 3 Filter Customized filter for the searched item. Can be blank if
not needed.
LDAP Search Item 4 Additional customized search item. Can be blank if not
needed.
LDAP Item 4 Filter Customized filter for the searched item. Can be blank if
not needed.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 288
A
LDAP Display Attrs Format of LDAP results display on phone where:
• a—Attribute name
• cn—Common name
• sn—Surname (last name)
• telephoneNumber—Phone number
• n—Display name
For example, n=Phone causes "Phone:" to be displayed
in front of the phone number of an LDAP query result
when the detail soft button is pressed.
• t—type
When t=p, that is, t is of type phone number, then the
retrieved number can be dialed. Only one number can
be made dialable. If two numbers are defined as
dialable, only the first number is used. For example,
a=ipPhone, t=p; a=mobile, t=p;
This example results in only the IP Phone number
being dialable and the mobile number will be ignored.
• p—phone number
When p is assigned to a type attribute, example t=p,
then the retrieved number is dialable by the phone.
LDAP Number
Mapping
Can be blank if not needed.
NOTE With the LDAP number mapping you can manipulate
the number that was retrieved from the LDAP server. For
example, you can append 9 to the number if your dial plan
requires a user to enter 9 before dialing. Add the 9 prefix by
adding (<:9xx.>) to the LDAP Number Mapping field. For
example, 555 1212 would become 9555 1212.
If you do not manipulate the number in this fashion, a
user can use the Edit Dial feature to edit the number
before dialing out.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 289
A
XML Service
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones support XML
services, such as an XML Directory Service or other XML applications. (Not
applicable to the Cisco SPA301 or the Cisco SPA501G.)
Extension Mobility
For more information, see Configuring Extension Mobility.
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco WIP310.
Parameter Description
XML Directory Service
Name
Name of the XML Directory. Displays on the user’s
phone as a directory choice.
XML Directory Service
URL
URL where the XML Directory is located.
XML Application Service Name of the XML application. Displays on the
user’s phone as a web application choice.
XML Application Service
URL
URL where the XML application is located.
Parameter Description
Extension Mobility Enable or disable extension mobility.
Defaults to no (disabled).
EM User Domain The user domain for extension mobility.
Defaults to blank.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Phone Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 290
A
Programmable Softkeys
The Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones (models with
display screens) have four softkeys on the screen that, when pressed, perform
certain actions.
You can customize the softkeys displayed on the phone, and create your own
softkeys for speed dials or XML scripts. Customized softkey information is entered
in the PSK1 through PSK6 fields. (See Customizing Phone Softkeys for more
information.)
Parameter Description
Programmable
Softkey Enable
Enables programmable softkeys (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only).
Idle Key List Softkeys that display when the phone is idle.
Missed Call Key List Softkeys that display when a call has been missed.
Off Hook Key List Softkeys that display when the receiver is lifted, or the
headphone or speakerphone buttons are pressed.
Dialing Input Key List Softkeys that display when the user must enter dialing
data.
Progressing Key List Softkeys that display when a call is attempting to
connect. (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Connected Key List Softkeys that display when a call is connected.
Start-Xfer Key List Softkeys that display when a call transfer has been
initiated.
Start-Conf Key List Softkeys that display when a conference call has been
initiated.
Conferencing Key List Softkeys that display when a conference call is in
progress.
Releasing Key List Softkeys that display when a call is disconnecting.
(Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Hold Key List Softkeys that display when one or more calls are on
hold. (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2only)
Ringing Key List Softkeys that display when a call is incoming.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 291
A
Ext Tab
The Ext tabs vary by phone and depend on the number of extensions the phone
model supports. In a configuration profile, the Line parameters must be appended
with the appropriate numeral to indicate the line to which the setting applies. For
example:
[1] to specify line one
[2] to specify line two
Shared Active Key List Softkeys that display when a call is active on a shared
line. (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Shared Held Key List Softkeys that display when a call is on hold on a shared
line. (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only)
PSK1 through PSK6 To configure a speed dial script, enter the following in
the PSK field:
fnc=sd;ext=extensionname@$PROXY;vid=out
boundextnum;nme=name
where fnc is the function of the key (speed dial), ext
(extensionname) is the extension being dialed, vid
is the extension on the calling phone from which the
outbound call is sent, and name is the name of the
speed dial being configured.
To configure an XML script, enter the following in the
PSK field:
fnc=xml;url=http://
scriptURL.xml;nme=scriptname
where fnc is the function of the key (an XML script),
scriptURL.xml is the URL where the script is
located, and scriptname is the name of the script.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 292
A
General
Line Enable: To enable this line for service, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
Share Line Appearance
Parameter Description
Share Ext Indicates whether this extension is to be shared
with other Cisco SPA IP phones or private. If the
extension is not shared, then a call appearance
assigned to this extension is not shared,
regardless the setting of <Share Call
Appearance> for that call appearance. If the
extension is shared, then whether or not a call
appearance assigned to this extension is shared
follows the setting of <Share Call
Appearance> for that call appearance. The
choices are shared or private.
Defaults to shared.
Shared User ID The user identified assigned to the shared line
appearance.
Subscription Expires Number of seconds before the SIP subscription
expires. Before the subscription expiration, the
phone gets NOTIFY messages from the SIP
server on the status of the shared phone
extension. Defaults to 60 seconds.
Restrict MWI When enabled, the message waiting indicator
lights only for messages on private lines.
Monitor User ID
(Cisco SPA300 Series,
Cisco SPA500 Series)
This field is for future use.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 293
A
NAT Settings
Parameter Description
NAT Mapping Enable To use externally mapped IP addresses and SIP/
RTP ports in SIP messages, select yes.
Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
NAT Keep Alive Enable To send the configured NAT keep alive message
periodically, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
NAT Keep Alive Msg Enter the keep alive message that should be sent
periodically to maintain the current NAT mapping.
If the value is $NOTIFY, a NOTIFY message is sent.
If the value is $REGISTER, a REGISTER message
without contact is sent.
Defaults to $NOTIFY.
NAT Keep Alive Dest Destination that should receive NAT keep alive
messages. If the value is $PROXY, the messages
are sent to the current or outbound proxy.
Defaults to $PROXY.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 294
A
Network Settings
Parameter Description
SIP TOS/DiffServ Value TOS/DiffServ field value in UDP IP packets
carrying a SIP message.
Defaults to 0x68.
SIP CoS Value CoS value for SIP messages.
Defaults to 3.
RTP TOS/DiffServ Value ToS/DiffServ field value in UDP IP packets
carrying RTP data.
Defaults to 0xb8.
RTP CoS Value CoS value for RTP data.
Defaults to 6.
Network Jitter Level Determines how jitter buffer size is adjusted by
the Cisco SPA9000. Jitter buffer size is adjusted
dynamically. The minimum jitter buffer size is 30
milliseconds or (10 milliseconds + current RTP
frame size), whichever is larger, for all jitter level
settings. However, the starting jitter buffer size
value is larger for higher jitter levels. This setting
controls the rate at which the jitter buffer size is
adjusted to reach the minimum. Select the
appropriate setting: low, medium, high, very high,
or extremely high.
Defaults to high.
Jitter Buffer Adjustment Controls how the jitter buffer should be adjusted.
Select the appropriate setting: up and down, up
only, down only, or disable.
Defaults to up and down.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 295
A
SIP Settings
Parameter Description
SIP Transport Select from UDP, TCP, or TLS.
Defaults to UDP.
SIP Port Port number of the SIP message listening and
transmission port.
Defaults to 5060.
SIP 100REL Enable To enable the support of 100REL SIP extension for reliable
transmission of provisional responses (18x) and use of
PRACK requests, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
EXT SIP Port The external SIP port number.
Auth Resync-
Reboot
If this feature is enabled, the Cisco SPA9000 authenticates
the sender when it receives the NOTIFY resync reboot
(RFC 2617) message. To use this feature, select yes.
Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
SIP Proxy-Require The SIP proxy can support a specific extension or
behavior when it sees this header from the user agent. If
this field is configured and the proxy does not support it, it
responds with the message, unsupported. Enter the
appropriate header in the field provided.
SIP Remote-Party-
ID
To use the Remote-Party-ID header instead of the From
header, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
Referor Bye Delay Controls when the SPA9000 sends BYE to terminate stale
call legs upon completion of call transfers. Multiple delay
settings (Referor, Refer Target, Referee, and Refer-To
Target) are configured on this screen. For the Referor Bye
Delay, enter the appropriate period of time in seconds.
Defaults to 4.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 296
A
R e fe r-To Ta r g e t
Contact
To contact the refer-to target, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
Referee Bye Delay For the Referee Bye Delay, enter the appropriate period of
time in seconds.
Defaults to 0.
SIP Debug Option SIP messages are received at or sent from the proxy listen
port. This feature controls which SIP messages to log.
Choices are as follows:
none—No logging.
1-line—Logs the start-line only for all messages.
1-line excl. OPT—Logs the start-line only for all messages
except OPTIONS requests/responses.
1-line excl. NTFY—Logs the start-line only for all
messages except NOTIFY requests/responses.
1-line excl. REG—Logs the start-line only for all messages
except REGISTER requests/responses.
1-line excl. OPT|NTFY|REG—Logs the start-line only for all
messages except OPTIONS, NOTIFY, and REGISTER
requests/responses.
full—Logs all SIP messages in full text.
full excl. OPT—Logs all SIP messages in full text except
OPTIONS requests/responses.
full excl. NTFY—Logs all SIP messages in full text except
NOTIFY requests/responses.
full excl. REG—Logs all SIP messages in full text except
REGISTER requests/responses.
full excl. OPT|NTFY|REG—Logs all SIP messages in full text
except for OPTIONS, NOTIFY, and REGISTER requests/
responses.
Defaults to none.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 297
A
Refer Target Bye
Delay
For the Refer Target Bye Delay, enter the appropriate
period of time in seconds.
Defaults to 0.
Sticky 183 If this feature is enabled, the IP telephony ignores further
180 SIP responses after receiving the first 183 SIP
response for an outbound INVITE. To enable this feature,
select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
Auth INVITE When enabled, authorization is required for initial incoming
INVITE requests from the SIP proxy.
Ntfy Refer On 1xx-
To - I n v
If set to yes, as a transferee, the phone will send a NOTIFY
with Event:Refer to the transferor for any 1xx response
returned by the transfer target, on the transfer call leg.
If set to no, the phone will only send a NOTIFY for final
responses (200 and higher).
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Use Anonymous
With RPID
This parameter applies only if <SIP Remote-Party-ID> is
set to yes; otherwise, it is ignored.
If the parameter is set to yes, the FROM header's display-
name and user-id fields are set to anonymous when the
caller blocks his caller-id. If the parameter is set to no, the
FROM header's display-name and user-id are not masked.
The Remote-Party-ID header indicates privacy=full when
the caller wishes to block his caller-id.
Defaults to yes.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
Set G729annexb Configure G.729 Annex B settings.
NOTE Not applicable to Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 298
A
Voice Quality
Report Address
For configuration of a SIP event package, SIP PUBLISH,
that enables the collection and reporting of metrics that
measure the quality for VoIP sessions. Voice call quality
information derived from RTCP-XR and call information
from SIP is conveyed from a User Agent in a session to the
third party in SIP PUBLISH method.
To configure, first configure RTCP-XR (see RTP
Parameters). Configure the RTCP Tx Interval. In the Voice
Quality Report Address field, enter the name of the
collector that collects the statistics from the SIP PUBLISH
events. For example, enter
collector@
fully-qualified-domain-name
(collector@reports.cisco.com) or
collector
@
IP
-
address
(collector@192.168.5.1).
After RTCP-XR feature is enabled, the call status
information is updated on Voice > Info during an active call.
Additionally, RTCP-XR packets containing a voice metrics
block report are sent with the interval specified in the
RTCP Tx Interval. When the call session is ended, a SIP
PUBLISH with voice metrics information is sent to the
collector endpoint. This parameter supports a full SIP URI.
Examples of valid addresses are:
• collector@domain.com
• 123.collect@123.123.123.123:5555
• 5678@domain.com:5656
For example to configure for extension 1, edit the phone
configuration file as follows:
<Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_
ua="na">collector@domain.com
</Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_>
<Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_
ua="na">123.collect@123.123.123.123:5555
</Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_>
<Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_
ua="na">5678@domain.com:5656
</Voice_Quality_Report_Address_1_>
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 299
A
Call Feature Settings
Parameter Description
Blind Attn-Xfer Enable Enables the IP phone to perform an attended
transfer operation by ending the current call leg
and performing a blind transfer of the other call
leg. If this feature is disabled, the IP phone
performs an attended transfer operation by
referring the other call leg to the current call leg
while maintaining both call legs. To use this
feature, select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
MOH Server User ID or URL of the auto-answering streaming
audio server. When only a user ID is specified, the
current or outbound proxy is contacted. Music-on-
hold is disabled if the MOH Server is not
specified.
Defaults to imusic when used with a
Cisco SPA9000 IP PBX.
Message Waiting Indicates whether the Message Waiting Indicator
on the phone is lit. This parameter is toggled by a
message from the SIP proxy to indicate if a
message is waiting. You can manually modify it to
clear or set the flag in the Ext 1-6 tab.
Setting this value to Yes can activate stutter tone
and VMWI signal. This parameter is stored in long-
term memory and survives after reboot or power
cycle.
Defaults to No.
Auth Page Specifies whether to authenticate the invite
before auto answering a page.
Defaults to No.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 300
A
Default Ring Type of ring heard. This corresponds to the Ring
Tone on the Phone tab. Choose from No Ring, 1
through 10, User 1, or User 2.
Defaults to 1.
Auth Page Realm Identifies the Realm part of the Auth that is
accepted when the Auth Page parameter is set to
yes. This parameter accepts alphanumeric
characters.
Defaults to blank.
Conference Bridge URL This is the URL used to join into a conference call,
generally in the form of the word conference or
user@IPaddress:port.
Defaults to blank.
Auth Page Password Identifies the password used when the Auth Page
parameter is set to yes. This parameter accepts
alphanumeric characters.
Defaults to blank.
Mailbox ID Identifies the voice mailbox number/ID for the
phone.
Defaults to blank.
Voice Mail Server Identifies the SpecVM server for the phone,
generally the IP address and port number of the
VM server.
Voice Mail Subscribe
Interval
The expiration time, in seconds, of a subscription
to a voice mail server.
State Agent Reserved feature.
CFWD Notify Serv Specifies whether to enable a SIP-B feature
regarding the sending of a Notify to the phone
when a call is forwarded elsewhere.
Defaults to No.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 301
A
CFWD Notifier Typically, this field is configured with the SIP
proxy information.
User ID with Domain
(Cisco SPA300 Series)
When this field is set to yes, the IP phone will
show the Caller ID followed by domain name, and
the domain name is also shown in the received
calls list. This parameter is used when calls are
made between different branches of the same
phone system. For example, if user
John@domain1.com receives a call from
Mary@domain2.com, by default the phone only
shows the call as being from Mary, so John is not
able to pick up or call back Mary from the
received call list. With this parameter set to yes,
the phone logs the call as being from
Mary@domain2.com, and John can dial Mary from
the received call list.
Device Feature Sync Set this parameter to yes to enable DND/CFWD
synchronization per extension.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 302
A
Proxy and Registration
Parameter Description
Proxy SIP proxy server and port number set by the Service
Provider for all outbound requests. For example:
192.168.2.100:6060.
Outbound Proxy SIP Outbound Proxy Server where all outbound
requests are sent as the first hop.
Use Outbound Proxy Enables an outbound proxy (for example,
172.20.2.1:5060—port is optional) or a domain name
such as sip.server.com as long as this name is a fully-
qualified domain name. If set to no, the Outbound
Proxy and Use OB Proxy in Dialog fields are ignored.
Defaults to no.
Optionally, the proxy can be configured (Cisco SPA500
Series only) for Survivable Remote Site Telephony
(SRST) support. The proxy is configured with an
extension that includes a statically-configured DNS
SRV record or DNS A record. Configuring the proxy
allows for failover and fallback functionality with a
secondary proxy server. For example:
For SRV Record:
sip.server.com:SRV=node1.sip.server.com
:5060:p=1:w=50|node2.sip.server.com:506
0:p=2:w=50
Set Use DNS SRV to no and DNS SRV Auto Prefix to
no.
For A Record:
sip.server.com:A=172.20.2.1,172.20.2.2
Set Use DNS SRV to no and DNS SRV Auto Prefix to
no.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 303
A
Use OB Proxy In
Dialog
Whether to force SIP requests to be sent to the
outbound proxy within a dialog. Ignored if <Use
Outbound Proxy> is no or <Outbound Proxy> is empty.
Defaults to yes.
Register Enable periodic registration with the <Proxy>. This
parameter is ignored if <Proxy> is not specified.
Defaults to yes.
Make Call Without
Reg
Allow making outbound calls without successful
(dynamic) registration by the unit. If no, the dial tone
will not play unless registration is successful.
Defaults to no.
Register Expires Allow answering inbound calls without successful
(dynamic) registration by the unit. If proxy responded
to REGISTER with a smaller Expires value, the phone
will renew registration based on this smaller value
instead of the configured value. If registration failed
with an Expires too brief error response, the phone will
retry with the value given in the Min-Expires header in
the error response.
Defaults to 60.
Ans Call Without Reg If enabled, the user does not have to be registered with
the proxy to answer calls.
Defaults to no.
Use DNS SRV Whether to use DNS SRV lookup for Proxy and
Outbound Proxy.
Defaults to no.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 304
A
DNS SRV Auto Prefix If enabled, the phone will automatically prepend the
Proxy or Outbound Proxy name with _sip._udp when
performing a DNS SRV lookup on that name.
Defaults to no.
Proxy Fallback Intvl This parameter sets the delay (sec) after which the
phone will retry from the highest priority proxy (or
outbound proxy) servers after it has failed over to a
lower priority server. This parameter is useful only if
the primary and backup proxy server list is provided to
the phone via DNS SRV record lookup on the server
name. (Using multiple DNS A record per server name
does not allow the notion of priority and so all hosts
will be considered at the same priority and the phone
will not attempt to fall back after a fail over).
Defaults to 3600
Proxy Redundancy
Method
Select Normal or Based on SRV port. The phone
creates an internal list of proxies returned in the DNS
SRV records.
If you select Normal, the list contains proxies ranked by
weight and priority.
If you select Based on SRV, the phone uses normal,
then inspects the port number based on the first listed
proxy port.
Defaults to Normal.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 305
A
Subscriber Information
Parameter Description
Display Name Display name for caller ID.
User ID Extension number for this line.
Password Password for this line.
Defaults to blank.
Use Auth ID To use the authentication ID and password for SIP
authentication, select yes. Otherwise, select no to
use the user ID and password.
Defaults to no.
Auth ID Authentication ID for SIP authentication.
Defaults to blank.
Mini Certificate Base64 encoded of Mini-Certificate concatenated
with the 1024-bit public key of the certificate
authority (CA) signing the mini-certificate of all
subscribers in the group.
Defaults to blank.
SRTP Private Key Base64 encoded of the 512-bit private key per
subscriber for establishment of a secure call.
Defaults to blank.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 306
A
Audio Configuration
A codec resource is considered as allocated if it has been included in the SDP
codec list of an active call, even though it eventually might not be the one chosen
for the connection. So, if the G.729a codec is enabled and included in the codec
list, that resource is tied up until the end of the call whether or not the call actually
uses G.729a. If the G.729a resource is already allocated and since only one
G.729a resource is allowed per device, no other low-bit-rate codec might be
allocated for subsequent calls; the only choices are G711a and G711u. On the
other hand, two G.723.1/G.726 resources are available per device.
Therefore it is important to disable the use of G.729a in order to guarantee the
support of two simultaneous uses of the G.723/G.726 codecs.
Parameter Description
Preferred Codec Preferred codec for all calls. (The actual codec used in
a call still depends on the outcome of the codec
negotiation protocol.) Select one of the following:
G711u, G711a, G722, G726-16, G726-24, G726-32,
G726-40, G729a, or G723.
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2: G711u, G711a,
G726-32, G729a, and G722. G.723 (not available on
Cisco SPA300 Series or Cisco SPA500 Series). G722
not available on Cisco WIP310.
Defaults to G711u.
Use Pref Codec Only To use only the preferred codec for all calls, select yes.
(The call fails if the far end does not support this
codec.) Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to no.
Second Preferred
Codec
The second preferred codec when the preferred
codec cannot be used. If
Use Pref Codec Only i
s
enabled (set to yes), this parameter is not used.
Defaults to Unspecified.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 307
A
Third Preferred Codec The third preferred codec when the preferred codec
and second preferred codec cannot be used. If
Use
Pref Codec Only i
s enabled (set to yes), this parameter
is not used.
Defaults to Unspecified.
G729a Enable To enable the use of the G.729a codec at 8 kbps,
select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
G722 Enable Enables use of the G.722 codec. Defaults to yes.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco WIP310.
G723 Enable To enable the use of the G.723a codec at 6.3 kbps,
select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
NOTE G.723 is not supported on the Cisco SPA300 Series,
Cisco SPA500 Series, or Cisco WIP310.
G726-16 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 16 kbps,
select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
NOTE Not supported on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
G726-24 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 24 kbps,
select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
NOTE Not supported on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 or
Cisco WIP310.
L16 Enable To enable the use of the L16 codec, select yes.
Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
NOTE Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 308
A
G726-32 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 32 kbps,
select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
G726-40 Enable To enable the use of the G.726 codec at 40 kbps,
select yes. Otherwise, select no.
Defaults to yes.
NOTE Not applicable to the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2.
Release Unused
Codec
Allows the release of codecs not used after codec
negotiation on the first call so that other codecs can be
used for the second line. To use this feature, select yes.
Defaults to yes.
DTMF Process AVT Select yes to process RTP DTMF events. Otherwise,
select no. If this parameter is set to no, the AVT
payload type is not included in outbound SDP.
Defaults to yes.
Silence Supp Enable To enable silence suppression so that silent audio
frames are not transmitted, select yes. Otherwise,
select no.
Defaults to no.
DTMF Tx Method Select the method to transmit DTMF signals to the far
end: InBand, AVT, INFO, Auto, InBand+INFO, or
AVT+INFO. InBand sends DTMF using the audio path.
AV T se nds DTMF a s AV T events. INFO u ses the S IP
INFO method. Auto uses InBand or AVT based on the
outcome of codec negotiation.
Defaults to Auto.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 309
A
DTMF Tx Volume for
AV T Packet
Allows you to manually configure the AVT Tx volume.
The value of this parameter is inserted into the volume
field of the payload in the AVT packet.
Values are based on the AVT specification as
described in RFC 2833,
RTP Payload for DTMF Digits,
Telephony Tones and Telephony Signals
. According to
RFC 2833, the volume field is represented by 6 bits,
and describes the power level of the tone, expressed
in dBm0 after dropping the sign.
Valid range for this parameter is 0 to 63. If the
provisioned value is negative, it will be negated first.
Thereafter, if the value is beyond the high limit of 63, it
will be clipped to 63.
The default value is 0, and is the recommended setting.
However, some gateways do not accept this volume
setting. If the gateway does not accept the value of 0,
the DTMF tone is not relayed to the remote end. As a
workaround for the phone to interoperate with those
gateways, you can change the value to a value greater
than 0.
Use Remote Pref
Codec
If set to yes, the phone communicates using the
remote phone preferred codec. If set to no, the Cisco
IP phone communicates using its own preferred codec
(as indicated in the Preferred Codec field and in the
SDP by order of preferences). The default vale is no.
Codec Negotiation When set to Default, the Cisco IP phone responds to
an Invite with a 200 OK response advertising the
preferred codec only. When set to List All, the Cisco IP
phone responds listing all the codecs that the phone
supports. The default value is Default, or to respond
with the preferred codec only.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 310
A
A codec resource is considered allocated if it has been included in the SDP codec
list of an active call, even though it eventually might not be chosen for the
connection. If the G.729a codec is enabled and included in the codec list, that
resource is tied up until the end of the call whether or not the call actually uses
G.729a. If the G729a resource is already allocated (and since only one G.729a
resource is allowed per phone), no other low-bit-rate codec can be allocated for
subsequent calls. The only choices are G711a and G711u.
Since two G.723.1/G.726 resources are available per IP phone, you should disable
the use of G.729a to guarantee support for two simultaneous G.723/G.726
codecs.
Dial Plan Script
The default dial plan script for each line is as follows:
(*xx|[3469]11|0|00|[2-9]xxxxxx|1xxx[2-
9]xxxxxx|xxxxxxxxxxxx.).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Ext Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 311
A
Parameter Description
Dial Plan Dial plan script for this line.
The default is (<9:>xx.)
(*xx|[3469]11|0|00|[2-
9]xxxxxx|1xxx[2-
9]xxxxxxS0|xxxxxxxxxxxx.)
The dial plan syntax is expanded in the Cisco SPA
IP phones to allow the designation of three
parameters to be used with a specific gateway:
• uid— authentication user-id
• pwd—authentication password
• nat— if this parameter is present, use NAT
mapping
Each parameter is separated by a semi-colon (;).
Caller ID Map Inbound caller ID numbers can be mapped to a
different string. For example, a number that begins
with +44xxxxxx can be mapped to 0xxxxxx. This
feature has the same syntax as the Dial Plan
parameter. With this parameter, you can specify
how to map a caller ID number for display on
screen and recorded into call logs. (Not applicable
to Cisco WIP310.)
Enable IP Dialing Enable or disable IP dialing.
Defaults to no.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
User Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 312
A
User Tab
This section describes the fields for the User tab.
Call Forward
See Vertical Service Activation Codes for more information on call forwarding
parameters.
Speed Dial
You can configure speed dials on the Cisco SPA300 Series and Cisco SPA500
Series IP phones. Speed dial configuration is on a separate tab on the
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2. It is not configurable from the phone web
user interface on the Cisco WIP310. Speed dial configuration for the
Cisco WIP310 is done on the IP phone screen.
Speed Dial 2 through 9: Target phone number (or URL) assigned to speed dial 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
Defaults to blank.
See the respective phone user guides for the phone for more information.
Parameter Description
Cfwd All Dest Enter the extensions to forward calls to.
Cfwd Busy Dest Enter the extensions to forward calls to when the
line is busy.
Defaults to voice mail.
Cfwd No Ans Dest Enter the extension to forward calls to when the
call is not answered.
Defaults to voice mail.
Cfwd No Ans Delay Enter the time delay in seconds to wait before
forwarding a call that is not answered.
Defaults to 20 seconds.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
User Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 313
A
Supplementary Services
The Cisco SPA9000 provides native support of a large set of enhanced or
supplementary services. All of these services are optional. A supplementary
service should be disabled if the user has not subscribed to it or the service
provider intends to support similar service by using other means. Most
supplementary service parameters are listed in Supplementary Services.
The user can enable or disable supplementary services and the other settings in
this section. For more star code or supplementary service information, see
Configuring Supplementary Services (Star Codes).
Camera Settings (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
The Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 works with the Cisco WVC2300 Wireless-G
Business Internet Video Camera and the Cisco PVC2300 Business Internet Video
Camera to provide simple video monitoring from your IP phone. See Entering
Camera Information Into the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
Configuration Utility.
Web Information Service Settings (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2)
These parameters apply only to the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2. For
configuration information, see Configuring RSS Newsfeeds (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2).
Audio Volume
NOTE Does not apply to the Cisco WIP310.
Parameter Description
Ringer Volume Sets the default volume for the ringer.
Speaker Volume Sets the default volume for the full-duplex speakerphone.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
User Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 314
A
Screen (Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2)
Handset Volume Sets the default volume for the handset.
Headset Volume Sets the default volume for the headset.
Bluetooth Volume Volume of the Bluetooth device.
NOTE Applies to the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2
only.
Parameter Description
Screen Saver Enable Enables a screen saver on the IP phone screen. When
the phone is idle for a specified time, it enters screen
saver mode. (Users can set up screen savers directly
using phone Setup button.) Any button press or on/off
hook event triggers the phone to return to its normal
mode. (The screen shows “Press any key to unlock
your phone.”) If a user password is set, the user must
enter it to exit screen saver mode.
Screen Saver Type Choose the type of screen saver:
• Black Background—Displays a black screen.
• Gray Background—Displays a gray screen.
• Black/Gray Rotation—The screen incrementally cycles
from black to gray.
• Picture Rotation—The screen rotates through available
pictures on the phone.
• Digital Frame—Shows the background picture.
Screen Saver Trigger
Time
Number of seconds that the phone remains idle before
the screen saver turns on.
Screen Saver Refresh
Time
Number of seconds before the screen saver should
refresh (if, for example, you chose a rotation of
pictures).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
User Tab
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 315
A
Text Logo Text logo to display when the phone boots up. A
service provider, for example, can enter logo text as
follows:
• Up to 2 lines of text
• Each line must be fewer than 32 characters
• Insert a new line character (\n) between lines
•Insert escape code %0a
For example, “Super\n%0aTelecom” will display:
Super
Telecom
For more information, see the “Configuring Phone
Information and Display Settings” section on
page 48.
BMP Picture
Download URL
URL locating the bitmap (.BMP) or .jpg file to display on
the IP phone screen background.
For more information, see the “Configuring Phone
Information and Display Settings” section on
page 48.
Logo Type Select from Default, Download BMP Picture, or Text
Logo.
Defaults to Default.
For more information, see the “Configuring Phone
Information and Display Settings” section on
page 48.
Background Picture
Type
Select from Default, Download BMP Picture, or None.
Defaults to Default.
For more information, see the “Configuring Phone
Information and Display Settings” section on
page 48.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Attendant Console Tab (Cisco SPA500 Series)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 316
A
Attendant Console Tab (Cisco SPA500 Series)
General
LCD Contrast Enter a number value from 1 to 30. The higher the
number, the greater the contrast on the IP phone
screen.
Back Light Enable Select yes to enable the IP phone screen back light.
Back Light Timer (sec) Enter the number of seconds before the back light
should turn off.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Subscribe Expires Specifies how long the subscription remains valid.
After the specified period of time, elapses, the
Cisco Attendant Console initiates a new
subscription.
Defaults to 1800.
Subscribe Retry Interval Specifies the length of time to wait to try again if
subscription fails.
Unit 1 Enable Enables or disables the first Cisco Attendant
Console unit (each IP phone can have up to two
Cisco Attendant Consoles attached).
Subscribe Delay Length of delay before attempting to subscribe.
Defaults to 1.
Unit 2 Enable Enables or disables the second Cisco Attendant
Console unit (each IP phone can have up to two
Cisco Attendant Consoles attached).
Server Type Selects the type of server used (Cisco SPA9000,
BroadSoft, or Asterisk).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Attendant Console Tab (Cisco SPA500 Series)
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 317
A
For more information, see Chapter 9, “Configuring the Cisco Attendant
Console.”.
Test Mode Enable Enables or disables test mode. When test mode is
enabled, the LEDs are turned on when keys are
pressed, going from off to green to red, and back
to off. In test mode, when all the buttons on the
Cisco SPA500S are returned to off, all the keys
become orange. The IP phone must be rebooted
after the test is completed.
Attendant Console Call
Pickup Code
The star code used for picking up a ringing call.
Defaults to *98.
BLF List URI Automatically configures Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
subscriptions for all users on a monitored list. See
Configuring BroadSoft Busy Lamp Field Auto-
Configuration.
Unit 1 Key 1-32 Enter a strings that define the extension and other
parameters associated with each lighted button
on the first Cisco Attendant Console. Keywords
and values are case-sensitive. The configuration
script is described in the Unit/Key Configuration
Scripts.
Call Pickup Audio
Notification
By default, this parameter is set to no. If you set it
to yes, the phone plays the Call Pickup tone when
there are incoming calls to any of the lines that the
user is monitoring with the Call Pickup function.
Use the following in your configuration file:
<Call_Pickup_Audio_Notification ua="na">Yes
</Call_Pickup_Audio_Notification>
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Attendant Console Status
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 318
A
Attendant Console Status
This page provides two tabs to display the status of up to two Cisco Attendant
Consoles that are supported by a single IP phone:
• Unit 1—Displays information about the first Cisco Attendant Console.
• Unit 2—Displays information about the second Cisco Attendant Console.
Each tab provides the read-only fields described in the following table:
Parameter Description
Unit Enable Indicates that the Cisco Attendant Console is
enabled or disabled.
Subscribe Expires When the current subscription expires. After the
subscription expires, the Cisco Attendant Console
automatically requests a new subscription.
HW Version Version of the hardware.
Unit Online Indicates that the Cisco Attendant Console is
powered on and connected.
Subscribe Retry Interval Length of time the Cisco Attendant Console waits
to try again if subscription fails.
SW Version Version of the software.
Key Name Name assigned to each key (1-32).
Type Function enabled for each key (1-32).
Line Extension assigned to each key (1-32).
Station Displays the subscribe URI configured for each
key (1-32).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2-Specific Tabs
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 319
A
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2-Specific Tabs
The tabs described in this section appear on the Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2
.
Wi-Fi
Enable or disable the Wireless-G service on the phone from this tab.
Bluetooth
For more information on configuring Bluetooth, see Configuring Bluetooth
(Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2 only).
Parameter Description
Wireless Enable Click on to enable the wireless controller.
Wi-Fi Device Choose the method of wireless setup:
• Wi-Fi Profile—Create a wireless profile by
manually entering the information.
• Wi-Fi Protected Setup—If your router has a
WPS button, you can use Wi-Fi Protected Setup
to add a new wireless network profile.
Wireless Status Information about the wireless network.
Wi-Fi Profile Contains up to 3 wireless profiles for the phone.
Includes a wireless profile for the Cisco Unified
Communications Server.
Parameter Description
Bluetooth Device Click on to enable Bluetooth.
Bluetooth Status
(Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Name and status of any connected Bluetooth
devices.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2-Specific Tabs
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 320
A
Bluetooth Mode
(Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Shows the method of Bluetooth connection
chosen:
• Phone—Pairs with a Bluetooth headset
only.
• Handsfree—Operates as a handsfree
device with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone.
• Both—Uses a Bluetooth headset, or
operates with a Bluetooth-enabled
mobile phone (see Configuring
Bluetooth (Cisco SPA525G or
Cisco SPA525G2 only).
The Cisco SPA525G2 connects to only one
Bluetooth device at a time.
Bluetooth Profiles
(Cisco SPA525G2 only)
This table shows the MAC (hardware) address,
device name, and other information for the
Bluetooth device that is associated with a
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2.
If multiple Bluetooth devices are in range of a
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2, the
phone attempts to pair with the devices in
order the shown in the list. Highlight an entry
and click the arrow keys to move devices up
and down the list, changing the priority.
You can choose yes or no to indicate if the
phone should connect to a Bluetooth device
automatically. You can also remove devices
from the list.
Bluetooth Device List
(Cisco SPA525G2 only)
Click Scan for Bluetooth Devices to locate
Bluetooth devices in the area. Found devices
are shown with the type of device, MAC
address, and device name.
Parameter Description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cisco SPA IP Phone Field Reference
Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2-Specific Tabs
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 321
A
Personal Address Book
Address book for the phone. For more information, see the respective Cisco Small
Business IP Phone User Guide.
Call History
Displays the call history for the phone. To change the information displayed, select
the type of call history from the drop-down list:
• All Calls
• Received Calls
• Placed Calls
• Missed Calls
Speed Dials
See Speed Dial.
Firmware Upgrade
Used to upgrade the firmware for the Cisco SPA525G or Cisco SPA525G2. See
Updating Firmware.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
B
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 322
Where to Go From Here
Cisco provides a wide range of resources to help you and your customer obtain
the full benefits of the Cisco SPA IP phone.
Support
Cisco Small Business
Support Community
www.cisco.com/go/smallbizsupport
Cisco Small Business
Support and Resources
www.cisco.com/go/smallbizhelp
Phone Support Contacts www.cisco.com/en/US/support/
tsd_cisco_small_business
_support_center_contacts.html
Cisco Small Business
Firmware Downloads
www.cisco.com/cisco/web/download/ index.html
Select a link to download firmware for Cisco Small
Business Products. No login is required.
Product Documentation
Cisco SPA300 Series IP
Phones
www.cisco.com/go/300phones
Cisco SPA500 Series
IP
Phones
www.cisco.com/go/spa500phones
Cisco Cisco WIP310
www.cisco.com/en/US/partner/products/ps10033/
tsd_products_support_series_home.html
IP Phone Accessories
www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10042/
tsd_products_support_series_home.html
Cisco SPA9000 Voice
System
www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10030/
tsd_products_support_series_home.html
Cisco Unified
Communications 500
Series for Small Business
www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps7293/
tsd_products_support_series_home.html
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Where to Go From Here
Cisco Small Business SPA300 Series, SPA500 Series, and WIP310 IP Phone Administration Guide 323
B
NOTE For older Cisco IP phone models, such as the Cisco SPA9XX, see the
Cisco SPA9XX Phone Administration Guide
on cisco.com. This guide covers
only the
Cisco SPA300 Series IP phones, Cisco SPA500 Series IP phones, and
the Cisco Cisco WIP310.
Cisco Small Business
Cisco Partner Central for
Small Business (Partner
Login Required)
www.cisco.com/web/partners/sell/smb
Cisco Small Business
Home
www.cisco.com/smb
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copyright © 2009-2012 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. OL-19749-06
Document revised May 2012
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks,
go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does
not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
… 22 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Cisco spa509g ip at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Cisco spa509g ip in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 2,55 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Cisco spa509g ip

Cisco spa509g ip Additional guide - Dutch - 19 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info